ID ‘boot camp’ emphasizes practice pearls

Article Type
Changed

 

An intensive, day-long precourse on infectious diseases will return to the SHM annual meeting program for the first time in several years.

“Bugs, Drugs, and You: Infectious Diseases ‘Boot Camp’ for Hospitalists” will focus on a range of important clinical issues, including infectious diseases that appear with frequency and the high-stakes nature of which require correct diagnosis and treatment.

Dr. James Pile
“We have designed the precourse with a strong emphasis on practicality, recognizing that hospitalists, NPs, and PAs spend a high percentage of time caring for patients with infectious diseases,” said session cochair James Pile, MD, FACP, SFHM, of MetroHealth Medical Center and Case Western Reserve University in Cleveland.

Cochair Jennifer Hanrahan, DO, also of MetroHealth Medical Center, agreed, noting that hospitalists must be able to recognize infectious disease emergencies and have some familiarity with HIV as it presents in hospitalized patients.

“We want [attendees] to think about which tests to order and when to stop antibiotic therapy,” she said.

The faculty includes infectious diseases specialists with extensive teaching backgrounds. Several are practicing hospitalists. John Sanders, MD, MPH, of Wake Forest University, Winston-Salem, N.C., and Glenn Wortmann, MD, of MedStar Washington Hospital Center will join Dr. Hanrahan and Dr. Pile as faculty members.

Dr. Jennifer Hanrahan
“We trust that the precourse will give hospitalists who are early in their careers a general overview and more confidence in dealing with infections,” Dr. Hanrahan said. “For more experienced hospitalists, the session will serve as a good refresher, as well as point out some important changes in testing and treatment of infections.”

The precourse has five objectives:
  • Describe best practices in skin and soft tissue infection treatment based on current guidelines and recently approved antimicrobial agents.
  • Outline optimal strategies for prevention and treatment of Clostridium difficile, including disease recurrences.
  • Identify key strategies for prevention of selected infections and discuss resistance issues impacting antimicrobial use.
  • Focus on prompt recognition and treatment of certain infectious disease emergencies.
  • Cover significant trends in endocarditis and other endovascular infections and their impact on treatment approaches.

When the infectious disease precourse was last presented, it received highly positive evaluations. “We believe that this new, improved iteration will be better than ever,” Dr. Pile said. “It will be well worth attendees’ time and money, providing them with renewed confidence in their ability to manage common and less common infectious diseases. They will be able to return to their practices armed with new strategies that they can immediately put to use.”
 

Bugs, Drugs, and You: Infectious Diseases “Boot Camp” for Hospitalists

Monday, May 1, 8:15 a.m.–4:30 p.m.

Publications
Sections

 

An intensive, day-long precourse on infectious diseases will return to the SHM annual meeting program for the first time in several years.

“Bugs, Drugs, and You: Infectious Diseases ‘Boot Camp’ for Hospitalists” will focus on a range of important clinical issues, including infectious diseases that appear with frequency and the high-stakes nature of which require correct diagnosis and treatment.

Dr. James Pile
“We have designed the precourse with a strong emphasis on practicality, recognizing that hospitalists, NPs, and PAs spend a high percentage of time caring for patients with infectious diseases,” said session cochair James Pile, MD, FACP, SFHM, of MetroHealth Medical Center and Case Western Reserve University in Cleveland.

Cochair Jennifer Hanrahan, DO, also of MetroHealth Medical Center, agreed, noting that hospitalists must be able to recognize infectious disease emergencies and have some familiarity with HIV as it presents in hospitalized patients.

“We want [attendees] to think about which tests to order and when to stop antibiotic therapy,” she said.

The faculty includes infectious diseases specialists with extensive teaching backgrounds. Several are practicing hospitalists. John Sanders, MD, MPH, of Wake Forest University, Winston-Salem, N.C., and Glenn Wortmann, MD, of MedStar Washington Hospital Center will join Dr. Hanrahan and Dr. Pile as faculty members.

Dr. Jennifer Hanrahan
“We trust that the precourse will give hospitalists who are early in their careers a general overview and more confidence in dealing with infections,” Dr. Hanrahan said. “For more experienced hospitalists, the session will serve as a good refresher, as well as point out some important changes in testing and treatment of infections.”

The precourse has five objectives:
  • Describe best practices in skin and soft tissue infection treatment based on current guidelines and recently approved antimicrobial agents.
  • Outline optimal strategies for prevention and treatment of Clostridium difficile, including disease recurrences.
  • Identify key strategies for prevention of selected infections and discuss resistance issues impacting antimicrobial use.
  • Focus on prompt recognition and treatment of certain infectious disease emergencies.
  • Cover significant trends in endocarditis and other endovascular infections and their impact on treatment approaches.

When the infectious disease precourse was last presented, it received highly positive evaluations. “We believe that this new, improved iteration will be better than ever,” Dr. Pile said. “It will be well worth attendees’ time and money, providing them with renewed confidence in their ability to manage common and less common infectious diseases. They will be able to return to their practices armed with new strategies that they can immediately put to use.”
 

Bugs, Drugs, and You: Infectious Diseases “Boot Camp” for Hospitalists

Monday, May 1, 8:15 a.m.–4:30 p.m.

 

An intensive, day-long precourse on infectious diseases will return to the SHM annual meeting program for the first time in several years.

“Bugs, Drugs, and You: Infectious Diseases ‘Boot Camp’ for Hospitalists” will focus on a range of important clinical issues, including infectious diseases that appear with frequency and the high-stakes nature of which require correct diagnosis and treatment.

Dr. James Pile
“We have designed the precourse with a strong emphasis on practicality, recognizing that hospitalists, NPs, and PAs spend a high percentage of time caring for patients with infectious diseases,” said session cochair James Pile, MD, FACP, SFHM, of MetroHealth Medical Center and Case Western Reserve University in Cleveland.

Cochair Jennifer Hanrahan, DO, also of MetroHealth Medical Center, agreed, noting that hospitalists must be able to recognize infectious disease emergencies and have some familiarity with HIV as it presents in hospitalized patients.

“We want [attendees] to think about which tests to order and when to stop antibiotic therapy,” she said.

The faculty includes infectious diseases specialists with extensive teaching backgrounds. Several are practicing hospitalists. John Sanders, MD, MPH, of Wake Forest University, Winston-Salem, N.C., and Glenn Wortmann, MD, of MedStar Washington Hospital Center will join Dr. Hanrahan and Dr. Pile as faculty members.

Dr. Jennifer Hanrahan
“We trust that the precourse will give hospitalists who are early in their careers a general overview and more confidence in dealing with infections,” Dr. Hanrahan said. “For more experienced hospitalists, the session will serve as a good refresher, as well as point out some important changes in testing and treatment of infections.”

The precourse has five objectives:
  • Describe best practices in skin and soft tissue infection treatment based on current guidelines and recently approved antimicrobial agents.
  • Outline optimal strategies for prevention and treatment of Clostridium difficile, including disease recurrences.
  • Identify key strategies for prevention of selected infections and discuss resistance issues impacting antimicrobial use.
  • Focus on prompt recognition and treatment of certain infectious disease emergencies.
  • Cover significant trends in endocarditis and other endovascular infections and their impact on treatment approaches.

When the infectious disease precourse was last presented, it received highly positive evaluations. “We believe that this new, improved iteration will be better than ever,” Dr. Pile said. “It will be well worth attendees’ time and money, providing them with renewed confidence in their ability to manage common and less common infectious diseases. They will be able to return to their practices armed with new strategies that they can immediately put to use.”
 

Bugs, Drugs, and You: Infectious Diseases “Boot Camp” for Hospitalists

Monday, May 1, 8:15 a.m.–4:30 p.m.

Publications
Publications
Article Type
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME

Use and misuse of opioid agonists in opioid addiction

Article Type
Changed
Display Headline
Use and misuse of opioid agonists in opioid addiction

For a patient struggling with opioid addiction, opioid agonist therapy with methadone or buprenorphine can reduce craving and opioid use and may even save his or her life. But many clinicians are unfamiliar with this evidence-based treatment,1,2 which is best started early in the course of addiction.3

See related editorial

This article outlines the pharmacology of these drugs, their clinical uses, and the challenges of using them to treat opioid addiction.

DIAGNOSTIC CRITERIA

Opioid addiction, formally known as opioid use disorder, is a pattern of opioid misuse leading to clinically significant impairment in multiple areas of life. The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, Fifth Edition, lists 11 diagnostic criteria, but only 2 need to be present within the past year to make the diagnosis4:

  • Taking opioids longer or in higher doses than was intended
  • A persistent desire or unsuccessful efforts to cut down or control opioid use
  • Spending a great deal of time obtaining, using, or recovering from using opioids
  • Craving opioids
  • Repeatedly failing to fulfill obligations at work, school, or home due to opioid use
  • Continuing to use opioids even though it causes or exacerbates social or interpersonal problems
  • Giving up or curtailing important social, occupational, or recreational activities because of opioid use
  • Repeatedly using opioids in situations in which it is physically hazardous
  • Continuing to use opioids despite knowledge of having a persistent or recurrent physical or psychological problem that is likely to have been caused or exacerbated by the substance
  • Tolerance
  • Withdrawal.

Recent estimates indicate that 2.23 million people in the United States have opioid use disorder (426,000 with heroin and 1.8 million with prescription opioids).5

Progression from prescription opioids to heroin

We have observed that many patients with opioid use disorder start by misusing prescription opioids. Over time, tolerance can develop, which drives patients to use higher and higher doses.6

As the addiction progresses, a subset of prescription opioid users advances to using heroin, which is typically less expensive and easier to obtain.7 Most patients start with the intranasal route but eventually inject it intravenously.6,7

For many addicts, heroin use has medical consequences such as hepatitis C virus (HCV) and human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) infection, psychiatric problems such as depression and anxiety, and illegal activities such as theft and sex work.8 People who use heroin appear to have more severe addiction and a lower socioeconomic status than prescription opioid users.9–11 But recently, a growing number of middle class individuals are becoming addicted to heroin.12

METHADONE

Methadone is a long-acting synthetic opioid that functions as a full agonist on the mu-opioid receptor. The drug binds, occupies, and stimulates the receptor, preventing withdrawal symptoms and reducing opioid cravings for at least 24 hours.13

Adverse effects of methadone

The most common adverse effects include lightheadedness, dizziness, sedation, nausea, vomiting, and sweating.14 Other adverse effects:

Unintentional overdose. The risk is serious, as a single 30-mg dose can be fatal in people who are opioid-naïve.13

QTc prolongation, which can lead to torsade de pointes. This risk, which is dose-related, must be taken into consideration in patients who have any cardiac symptoms (eg, syncope, arrhythmia), pathology (familial QT prolongation), or other risk factors for QTc prolongation (eg, hypokalemia, QTc-prolonging medications).15

Respiratory depression, which can be fatal. This dose-related risk is heightened during the first 4 weeks of treatment if titration is too rapid or if methadone is used in combination with other drugs that cause central nervous system or respiratory depression.13,14

Starting methadone

To prevent respiratory depression and death related to rapid induction, the general rule is to start methadone at a low daily dose (20–30 mg) depending on the patient’s withdrawal symptoms.14 During this period, patients need to be closely monitored and educated on the perils of concomitant use of central nervous system depressants.14

In most patients, the dose is titrated up until their withdrawal symptoms and cravings are eliminated, which generally requires 60 to 120 mg daily.14 Hepatic and renal impairment, pregnancy, and advanced age can alter methadone pharmacokinetics and may therefore necessitate dose adjustment.

BUPRENORPHINE

Buprenorphine is an alkaloid thebaine opioid derivative that acts as a partial mu-opioid agonist and a kappa antagonist.16 Like methadone, buprenorphine is used to manage cravings and withdrawal symptoms.16 Dosages of 4 to 16 mg (up to 32 mg) per day of buprenorphine are usually required to adequately control opioid cravings.16

Sublingual and subdermal products

Buprenorphine is currently available in the United States in sublingual and subdermal formulations.16,17

Sublingual buprenorphine is usually combined with naloxone in a 4:1 ratio to deter intravenous use. Intravenous injection of the combination product can precipitate withdrawal due to the antagonist action of naloxone. (Taken orally or sublingually, naloxone is poorly absorbed and has little or no clinical effect.) Buprenorphine-naloxone is available in tablets, a sublingual film strip, and a buccal film strip. Buprenorphine is also available by itself in a sublingual formulation.

The US Food and Drug Administration has approved a buprenorphine subdermal implant, Probuphine. Four rods, about 1 inch long, are placed under the skin in the inner aspect of the upper arm and provide the equivalent of 8 mg of buprenorphine daily for 6 months.17 However, this method is formulated only for maintenance treatment and cannot be used for induction. Additionally, it is recommended that the implants be surgically removed at the end of 6 months, after which another set of implants can be inserted in the other arm or the patient can switch to sublingual therapy, depending on the clinical situation and patient preference.17

Generally safer than methadone

Buprenorphine works on the same receptor as methadone and therefore has a similar side effect profile. However, buprenorphine has a ceiling effect, which greatly reduces the risk of fatal respiratory depression.18 It also does not cause clinically significant QTc prolongation and is preferable in patients who have cardiac risk factors.18

Another advantage is that buprenorphine has fewer identified medication interactions than methadone.18 Further, induction of buprenorphine in patients with opioid use disorder has been shown to be safer than methadone.19

Although buprenorphine has been found to be 6 times safer than methadone with regard to overdose among the general population,20 it can still cause fatal intoxication if used in combination with central nervous system depressants.21

Buprenorphine has been also associated with hepatotoxicity, though the risk of new-onset liver disease appears to be low.22

 

 

NALTREXONE IS LESS EFFECTIVE THAN METHADONE, BUPRENORPHINE

Besides methadone and buprenorphine, the only other approved option for treating opioid use disorder is the opioid antagonist naltrexone.

Naltrexone has significantly less abuse potential, as it provides no euphoria, but patients do not like it. Even with the long-acting formulation (Vivitrol), naltrexone treatment is significantly less effective than methadone or buprenorphine.23–25 Further, although naltrexone is not a controlled substance and so does not face the same scrutiny as the agonist therapies, there are other significant barriers. Additional information on naltrexone is presented in reviews by Modesto-Lowe and Van Kirk24 and Woody.25

OBSTACLES TO TREATMENT

People hold conflicting views about opioid agonist therapy. Some believe that “trading one drug for another” is not a legitimate therapeutic strategy, and they may feel ashamed of being on maintenance therapy.26 Similarly, some argue that the answer to establishing stable abstinence does not lie simply in prescribing medications.

The contrary argument is that these medications, if used appropriately, confer many benefits such as reducing the medical and psychosocial sequelae of opioid addiction.18 In fact, properly treated patients no longer meet the diagnostic criteria of opioid use disorder, and both methadone and buprenorphine are on the World Health Organization’s (WHO) list of essential medicines.27

Despite endorsement by the WHO, the stigma attached to the opioid agonists has been difficult to overcome. Patients with opioid use disorder may be viewed with distrust by healthcare providers and often do not feel welcome in healthcare settings or in self-help recovery groups.28

Barriers to methadone therapy

Federal regulations on methadone prescribing and use were established to promote patient safety and decrease diversion, but they may also complicate access to care.29 They stipulate that to qualify for methadone maintenance, patients need to demonstrate opioid addiction for 1 year, except for pregnant women and those who have been incarcerated in the past 6 months. Patients under the age of 18 must have 2 documented failed treatment episodes as well as approval by a guardian to receive treatment.

Inconvenience. Methadone can be prescribed for opioid dependence only by an accredited treatment program. Patients must therefore travel to the clinic and wait to be evaluated on a daily basis for a minimum of 90 days. Only after they demonstrate consistent responsible behavior and negative results on urine testing do they become eligible to take methadone home.29 If a patient is to travel out of the area during the initial 90 days of treatment, he or she must make arrangements in advance to find a clinic that will provide a “guest dose.”

The inconvenience arising from the regulations may deter some patients from seeking methadone therapy. In spite of this, once patients are started on methadone, more of them continue treatment than with buprenorphine.18 A proposed reason is that methadone is a potent full opioid agonist and therefore relieves withdrawal symptoms and craving more effectively than buprenorphine, which is a partial agonist.30 Another possible reason is the higher level of supervision afforded by methadone clinics, which require daily contact for at least 90 days. 

Safety concerns arise from methadone diversion, as illicit use may have lethal consequences. In the past decade, deaths from methadone overdose have risen significantly, most of them due to respiratory depression or torsade de pointes.13 However, most cases of diversion and overdose involve methadone that is prescribed for pain by individual practitioners and not from maintenance programs.13

Advantages of buprenorphine

Together, methadone’s lethality, stigma, and inconvenience may contribute to patients preferring buprenorphine.31

The regulations governing buprenorphine’s use are less restrictive than those with methadone. For example, patients must have a diagnosis of opioid addiction to be prescribed buprenorphine, but they are not required to carry the diagnosis for a year before treatment.31 Additionally, they do not need to travel to a federally approved opioid treatment center daily and can receive buprenorphine directly from a physician in an outpatient setting.

Under the Drug Abuse Treatment Act (DATA) of 2000, any physician can apply for a waiver to prescribe and dispense buprenorphine in his or her office. To qualify for an initial waiver, physicians must either obtain certification in the fields of addiction medicine or addiction psychiatry or complete an approved 8-hour training session.32 Each physician starts with a maximum of 30 patients, but can apply to treat up to 100 patients after 1 year and eventually up to 275 patients. Physicians must document every buprenorphine prescription they write and be able to refer patients for counseling.31

As of February 2017, nurse practitioners and physician assistants can also apply for a DATA 2000 waiver. All waivered providers are subject to unannounced visits from the Drug Enforcement Administration once every 5 years.32

While there are no federal restrictions on the amount of buprenorphine that can be dispensed, some states and some insurance companies have placed restrictions on dose or length of treatment.33 Buprenorphine patients can fill their prescriptions at any pharmacy and are permitted to bring their medication home, which improves access to care. However, office-based outpatient treatment is not without risk, and preventing buprenorphine diversion remains a challenge.34

‘Lending’ buprenorphine is a felony

Addicts have illegally used buprenorphine to self-treat opioid withdrawal, craving, and dependence.35 Its misuse has also been coupled with self-treatment of conditions that include depression and pain.36

A survey found that 83.7% of patients deem buprenorphine diversion to be appropriate; further, most patients said they consider it unethical to withhold prescribed buprenorphine from individuals showing symptoms of withdrawal.34 Physicians who prescribe buprenorphine must inform their patients that even “lending” or giving away their medication is a felony.

Prescribing physicians must also be diligent about monitoring for signs of diversion such as inconsistent urine toxicology screens, “lost” medication, and requests for early refills or escalating doses.37

 

 

EVALUATING PATIENTS FOR OPIOID REPLACEMENT THERAPY

In addition to federal regulations, we propose a 4-step approach to evaluate eligibility for opioid replacement therapy based on existing guidelines.37–39

Step 1: History and physical examination

The history should give particular attention to the patient’s cardiac, pulmonary, and hepatic status, with consideration of the risks of any medical comorbidities (eg, bacterial endocarditis, HIV and HCV infection) that might influence treatment.37

It is also essential to evaluate for any contraindications or drug interactions before prescribing methadone or buprenorphine.38

Contraindications to methadone maintenance include40:

  • Cor pulmonale
  • Methadone hypersensitivity
  • Pseudomembranous colitis
  • Selegiline use (due to risk of serotonin syndrome)
  • Ileum paralyticus.

Contraindications to buprenorphine use include:

  • Hypersensitivity to naloxone or buprenorphine
  • Impaired liver function (due to the risk of inadvertent overdose associated with slowed metabolism).

Concurrent use of alcohol or illicit benzodiazepines is a relative contraindication to both methadone and buprenorphine due to the risk of respiratory depression and overdose.37 Likewise, avoid coprescribing opioid agonists and benzodiazepines whenever possible. Obtain a complete list of current medications and query a prescription-monitoring database to determine whether any controlled substances are currently prescribed.37

During the physical examination, look for stigmata of intravenous drug use such as track marks or abscesses37 and document any physical findings consistent with intoxication or withdrawal. Patients must be completely detoxed or in withdrawal before beginning buprenorphine induction; premature induction can precipitate withdrawal.38

A discussion of pregnant patients with opioid use disorder is beyond the scope of this paper. However, it is incumbent on the prescriber to inquire whether the client is pregnant or intends to become pregnant and what birth control methods are in place.

Step 2: Assess psychiatric status

Assessment of the patient’s psychiatric status, including an assessment of alcohol and other drug use, will help determine his or her eligibility for opioid agonists.37 To prepare for the need to manage patients with psychiatrically complex issues, it is helpful to develop relationships with addiction specialists and psychiatrists who are familiar with opioid replacement therapy in your area. This will make it easier to collaborate on patients’ care.

Ask all patients directly about suicidal or homicidal ideation. Any patient with active suicidal or homicidal ideation should be assessed for need of immediate hospitalization by a psychiatrist or another qualified mental health professional. Patients with a history of suicidal ideation should be monitored closely by a mental health professional throughout treatment.37

Many if not most patients with opioid use disorder have concurrent psychiatric disorders, and the interplay between these disorders is complex.40,41 Depression, for example, can precede and even precipitate drug use (an observation supporting the “self-medication theory”).42 If the underlying depressive disorder is not addressed, relapse is nearly inevitable.

It has also been shown that both chronic opioid use and withdrawal can exacerbate aversive emotional states. This escalation of symptoms may result from the pharmacologic effects of opioids or from psychosocial sequelae that can arise from chronic opioid use.41 In this situation, maintaining abstinence can lead to resolution of depressive symptoms. As depression and opioid use can occur together, successful treatment requires equal attention to both illnesses.

Other common comorbidities in patients with opioid use disorder include posttraumatic stress disorder, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, antisocial personality disorder, and concurrent substance abuse disorders.43 The confluence of antisocial personality disorder is particularly important, as patients with antisocial personality disorder display disruptive and maladaptive behaviors.

Identify any psychotropic medication that is prescribed and check carefully for drug interactions. This applies especially to methadone, as many psychiatric medications also prolong the QT interval. Moreover, patients may not be forthcoming about the use of psychiatric medication.

Find out whether the patient is using any other addictive substances, particularly those that affect the central nervous system, as those who use fentanyl, benzodiazepines, or alcohol are at the highest risk of overdose.31 Often the best option for those with concurrent substance use disorders is inpatient detoxification followed by residential rehabilitation care. Either buprenorphine or methadone can then be initiated upon return to an outpatient setting.

Step 3: Assess psychosocial status

To what extent do the patient’s home environment and support systems promote a drug-free lifestyle? Unfortunately, the psychosocial status of many of these patients is fragile, and they may live in areas where illicit drugs are readily available (which can be urban, suburban, or rural), making it difficult to stay substance-free.38

Generally, lifestyle modifications are needed to transform maladaptive behaviors and promote an environment conducive to long-term recovery. Referrals to social services to address housing, vocational needs, and entitlements may be helpful.39

Step 4: Assess readiness to change

According to one model, people go through 5 stages when changing a behavior: precontemplation, contemplation, preparation for action, action, and maintenance.43 In general, the further along the stages a patient is, the more appropriate he or she is for office-based treatment with buprenorphine.39

The level of change can be assessed with tools such as Stages of Change Readiness and Treatment Eagerness Scale (SOCRATES). Use of stage-specific strategies may enhance a patient’s readiness to cease opioid use.43

Precontemplation. Those in the precontemplation stage are not ready to think about changing their behavior.43 They may be unaware of or unwilling to consider the risks associated with their opioid use and resistant to the idea of quitting. Engagement with opioid agonists for individuals in this stage is low and dropout rates are likely high.

Thus, the proper approach for “precontemplators” is to help them develop some ambivalence about their opioid use. One tactic is to involve the patient in a discussion of the personal benefits and risks of opioid use.

Contemplation. Individuals in the contemplation stage have begun to weigh the costs and benefits of opioid use and express ambivalence about it.44 Because the patient is willing to explore the risks of ongoing use and consider the benefits of treatment, the goal in this stage is to elicit a commitment from the individual to seek treatment.

Preparation. The person in this stage moves from thinking about treatment to planning what action to take.45 As the individual prepares to enter treatment, indecision tends to resurface, as well as self-doubt about his or her ability to change. During this stage, it is important for the provider to spell out goals (abstinence) and strategies (eg, counseling, medication) and enhance a sense of self-efficacy.

Action and maintenance. Patients in these stages engage in treatment and employ new strategies to abstain from opioid use. Maintaining these behaviors can be a daily struggle. Expressing confidence in the patient’s ability to abstain from use will support his or her progress. Behavioral interventions such as strategic avoidance of triggers and engagement in alternative activities (eg, support groups, exercise, faith-based practices) will help to maintain abstinence.

A CHRONIC CONDITION

Opioid use disorder, like many chronic illnesses, requires long-term attention to attain successful patient outcomes. The opioid agonists methadone and buprenorphine are the mainstay of treatment for it, conferring benefits such as reducing opioid use and preventing relapse.

Candidates for opioid agonist therapy should undergo a multidisciplinary assessment, including an evaluation on the patient’s readiness to change his or her opioid use.

Patient education should include a discussion of the risks of methadone (eg, respiratory depression, fatal overdose, and QTc prolongation) and buprenorphine (eg hepatotoxicity) and their benefits (eg, controlling craving, decreasing the risk of relapse). Patients should also be educated about overdose and diversion.

Despite the difficulties inherent in treating patients with opioid use disorder, when used appropriately, opioid agonist therapy can be lifesaving for patients struggling with long-term opioid addiction.

Acknowledgment: We thank Katelyn Colosi, BS, and Drs. Susan Wolfe, Dennis Bouffard, and Sinha Shirshendu for their helpful comments.

References
  1. Wakeman SE, Pham-Kanter G, Donelan K. Attitudes, practices, and preparedness to care for patients with substance use disorder: results from a survey of general internists. Subst Abus 2016; 37:635–641.
  2. Samuels EA, Dwyer K, Mello MJ, Baird J, Kellogg AR, Bernstein E. Emergency department-based opioid harm reduction: moving physicians from willing to doing. Acad Emerg Med 2016; 23:455–465.
  3. Mohlman MK, Tanzman B, Finison K, Pinette M, Jones C. Impact of medication-assisted treatment for opioid addiction on Medicaid expenditures and health services utilization rates in Vermont. J Subst Abuse Treat 2016; 67:9–14.
  4. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, Fifth Edition. Arlington, VA, American Psychiatric Association, 2013.
  5. Center for Behavioral Health Statistics and Quality. Behavioral health trends in the United States: results from the 2014 National Survey on Drug Use and Health. www.samhsa.gov/data. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  6. Compton WM, Jones CM, Baldwin GT. Relationship between nonmedical prescription-opioid use and heroin use. N Engl J Med 2016; 374:154–163.
  7. Ruan X, Wyche MQ, Kaye AD. Analyzing the relationship between nonmedical prescription-opioid use and heroin use. J Opioid Manage 2016; 12:11–14.
  8. Hser YI, Evans E, Grella C, Ling W, Anglin D. Long-term course of opioid addiction. Harv Rev Psychiatry 2015; 23:76–89.
  9. Nielsen S, Hillhouse M, Mooney L, Ang A, Ling W. Buprenorphine pharmacotherapy and behavioral treatment: comparison of outcomes among prescription opioid users, heroin users and combination users. J Subst Abuse Treat 2015; 48:70–76.
  10. Moore BA, Fiellin DA, Barry DT, et al. Primary care office-based buprenorphine treatment: comparison of heroin and prescription opioid dependent patients. J Gen Intern Med 2007; 22:527–530.
  11. Fischer B, Patra J, Cruz MF, Gittins J, Rehm J. Comparing heroin users and prescription opioid users in a Canadian multi-site population of illicit opioid users. Drug Alcohol Rev 2008; 27:625–632.
  12. Compton WM, Jones CM, Baldwin GT. Relationship between nonmedical prescription-opioid use and heroin use. N Engl J Med 2016; 374:154–163.
  13. Jones CM, Baldwin GT, Manocchio T, White JO, Mack KA. Trends in methadone distribution for pain treatment, methadone diversion, and overdose deaths—United States, 2002–2014. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2016; 65:667–671.
  14. Baxter LE Sr, Campbell A, Deshields M, et al. Safe methadone induction and stabilization: report of an expert panel. J Addict Med 2013; 7:377–386.
  15. Alinejad S, Kazemi T, Zamani N, Hoffman RS, Mehrpour O. A systematic review of the cardiotoxicity of methadone. EXCLI J 2015; 14:577–600.
  16. Johnson RE, Strain EC, Amass L. Buprenorphine: how to use it right. Drug Alcohol Depend 2003; 70(suppl 2):S59–S77.
  17. Ling W. Buprenorphine implant for opioid addiction. Pain Manage 2012; 2:345–350.
  18. Saxon AJ, Hser YI, Woody G, Ling W. Medication-assisted treatment for opioid addiction: methadone and buprenorphine. J Food Drug Anal 2013; 21:S69–S72.
  19. Kimber J, Larney S, Hickman M, Randall D, Degenhardt L. Mortality risk of opioid substitution therapy with methadone versus buprenorphine: a retrospective cohort study. Lancet Psychiatry 2015; 2:901–908.
  20. Marteau D, McDonald R, Patel K. The relative risk of fatal poisoning by methadone or buprenorphine within the wider population of England and Wales. BMJ Open 2015; 5: e007629.
  21. Kintz P. Deaths involving buprenorphine: a compendium of French cases. Forensic Sci Int 2001; 121:65–69.
  22. Zuin M, Giorgini A, Selmi C, et al. Acute liver and renal failure during treatment with buprenorphine at therapeutic dose. Dig Liver Dis 2009; 41:e8–e10.
  23. Klein JW. Pharmacotherapy for substance use disorders. Med Clin North Am 2016; 100:891–910.
  24. Modesto-Lowe V, Van Kirk J. Clinical uses of naltrexone: a review of the evidence. Exp Clin Psychopharmocol 2002; 10:213–227.
  25. Woody GE. Agonist models for treating persons with substance use disorders. Curr Psychiatry Rep 2014; 16:489.
  26. Sanders JJ, Roose RJ, Lubrano MC, Lucan SC. Meaning and methadone: patient perceptions of methadone dose and a model to promote adherence to maintenance treatment. J Addict Med 2013; 7:307–313.
  27. Herget G. Methadone and buprenorphine added to the WHO list of essential medicines. HIV/AIDS Policy Law Rev 2005; 10:23–24.
  28. Suzuki J, Dodds T. Clinical recommendation of 12-step meeting attendance and discussion regarding disclosure of buprenorphine use among patients in office-based opioid treatment. Subst Abus 2016; 37:31–34.
  29. Rettig RA, Yarmolinsky A. Federal Regulation of Methadone Treatment. Washington, DC: National Academies Press; 1995.
  30. Srivastava A, Kahan M, Nader M. Primary care management of opioid use disorders: abstinence, methadone, or buprenorphine-naloxone? Can Fam Physician 2017; 63:200–205.
  31. Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration. Federal Guidelines for Opioid Treatment Programs. Rockville, MD: Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration; 2015.
  32. Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration SAMSHA. Buprenorphine waiver management. www.samhsa.gov/medication-assisted-treatment/buprenorphine-waiver-management. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  33. Mark TL, Lubran R, McCance-Kats EF, Chalk M, Richardson J. Medicaid coverage of medications to treat alcohol and opioid dependence. J Subst Abuse Treat 2015; 55:1–5.
  34. Johnson B, Richert T. Diversion of methadone and buprenorphine from opioid substitution treatment: the importance of patients’ attitudes and norms. J Subst Abuse Treat 2015; 54:50–55.
  35. Yokell MA, Zaller ND, Green TC, Rich JD. Buprenorphine and buprenorphine/naloxone diversion, misuse, and illicit use: an international review. Curr Drug Abuse Rev 2011; 4:28–41.
  36. Schuman-Olivier Z, Albanese M, Nelson SE, et al. Self-treatment: illicit buprenorphine use by opioid-dependent treatment seekers. J Subst Abuse Treat 2010; 39:41–50.
  37. American Society of Addiction Medicine. National practice guidelines for the use of medications in the treatment of addiction involving opioid use. www.asam.org/docs/default-source/practice-support/guidelines-and-consensus-docs/asam-national-practice-guideline-supplement.pdf. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  38. McNicholas L. Clinical guidelines for the use of buprenorphine in the treatment of opioid addiction. Rockville, MD: US Department of Health and Human Services, Substance Abuse and Mental Health Service Administration; 2004.
  39. Center for Substance Abuse Treatment. Clinical guidelines for the use of buprenorphine in the treatment of opioid addiction. Rockville (MD): Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration (US); 2004. (Treatment Improvement Protocol (TIP) Series, No. 40.) www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK64245. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  40. Zippel-Schultz B, Specka M, Cimander K, et al. Outcomes of patients in long-term opioid maintenance treatment. Subst Use Misuse 2016; 51:1493–1503.
  41. Martins SS, Keyes KM, Storr CL, Zhu H, Chilcoat HD. Pathways between nonmedical opioid use/dependence and psychiatric disorders: results from the National Epidemiologic Survey on Alcohol and Related Conditions. Drug Alcohol Depend 2009; 103:16–24.
  42. Khantzian EJ. The self-medication hypothesis of addictive disorders: focus on heroin and cocaine dependence. Am J Psychiatry 1985; 142:1259–1264.
  43. Belding MA, Iguchi MY, Lamb RJ, Lakin M, Terry R. Stages and processes of change among polydrug users in methadone maintenance treatment. Drug Alcohol Depend 1995; 39:45–53.
  44. Peteet JR, Brenner S, Curtiss D, Ferrigno M, Kauffman J. A stage of change approach to addiction in the medical setting. Gen Hosp Psychiatry 1998; 20:267–273.
  45. Vijay A, Bazazi AR, Yee I, Kamarulzaman A, Altice FL. Treatment readiness, attitudes toward, and experiences with methadone and buprenorphine maintenance therapy among people who inject drugs in Malaysia. J Subst Abuse Treat 2015; 54:29–36.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Vania Modesto-Lowe, MD, MPH
Connecticut Valley Hospital, Middletown, CT; Quinnipiac University, Hamden, CT; University of Connecticut School of Medicine, Farmington, CT

Katie Swiezbin, BS
Quinnipiac University, Hamden, CT

Margaret Chaplin, MD
University of Connecticut School of Medicine, Farmington, CT; Community Mental Health Affiliates, New Britain, CT

Gabriela Hoefer
Samford University, Birmingham, AL

Address: Vania Modesto-Lowe, MD, MPH, Connecticut Valley Hospital, PO Box 351, Silver Street, Middletown, CT 06457; vania.modesto-lowe@ct.gov

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
377-384
Legacy Keywords
opioids, addiction, opioid use disorder, methadone, buprenorphine, naltrexone, Vania Modesto-Lowe, Katie Swiezbin, Margaret Chaplin, Gabriela Hoefer
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Vania Modesto-Lowe, MD, MPH
Connecticut Valley Hospital, Middletown, CT; Quinnipiac University, Hamden, CT; University of Connecticut School of Medicine, Farmington, CT

Katie Swiezbin, BS
Quinnipiac University, Hamden, CT

Margaret Chaplin, MD
University of Connecticut School of Medicine, Farmington, CT; Community Mental Health Affiliates, New Britain, CT

Gabriela Hoefer
Samford University, Birmingham, AL

Address: Vania Modesto-Lowe, MD, MPH, Connecticut Valley Hospital, PO Box 351, Silver Street, Middletown, CT 06457; vania.modesto-lowe@ct.gov

Author and Disclosure Information

Vania Modesto-Lowe, MD, MPH
Connecticut Valley Hospital, Middletown, CT; Quinnipiac University, Hamden, CT; University of Connecticut School of Medicine, Farmington, CT

Katie Swiezbin, BS
Quinnipiac University, Hamden, CT

Margaret Chaplin, MD
University of Connecticut School of Medicine, Farmington, CT; Community Mental Health Affiliates, New Britain, CT

Gabriela Hoefer
Samford University, Birmingham, AL

Address: Vania Modesto-Lowe, MD, MPH, Connecticut Valley Hospital, PO Box 351, Silver Street, Middletown, CT 06457; vania.modesto-lowe@ct.gov

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

For a patient struggling with opioid addiction, opioid agonist therapy with methadone or buprenorphine can reduce craving and opioid use and may even save his or her life. But many clinicians are unfamiliar with this evidence-based treatment,1,2 which is best started early in the course of addiction.3

See related editorial

This article outlines the pharmacology of these drugs, their clinical uses, and the challenges of using them to treat opioid addiction.

DIAGNOSTIC CRITERIA

Opioid addiction, formally known as opioid use disorder, is a pattern of opioid misuse leading to clinically significant impairment in multiple areas of life. The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, Fifth Edition, lists 11 diagnostic criteria, but only 2 need to be present within the past year to make the diagnosis4:

  • Taking opioids longer or in higher doses than was intended
  • A persistent desire or unsuccessful efforts to cut down or control opioid use
  • Spending a great deal of time obtaining, using, or recovering from using opioids
  • Craving opioids
  • Repeatedly failing to fulfill obligations at work, school, or home due to opioid use
  • Continuing to use opioids even though it causes or exacerbates social or interpersonal problems
  • Giving up or curtailing important social, occupational, or recreational activities because of opioid use
  • Repeatedly using opioids in situations in which it is physically hazardous
  • Continuing to use opioids despite knowledge of having a persistent or recurrent physical or psychological problem that is likely to have been caused or exacerbated by the substance
  • Tolerance
  • Withdrawal.

Recent estimates indicate that 2.23 million people in the United States have opioid use disorder (426,000 with heroin and 1.8 million with prescription opioids).5

Progression from prescription opioids to heroin

We have observed that many patients with opioid use disorder start by misusing prescription opioids. Over time, tolerance can develop, which drives patients to use higher and higher doses.6

As the addiction progresses, a subset of prescription opioid users advances to using heroin, which is typically less expensive and easier to obtain.7 Most patients start with the intranasal route but eventually inject it intravenously.6,7

For many addicts, heroin use has medical consequences such as hepatitis C virus (HCV) and human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) infection, psychiatric problems such as depression and anxiety, and illegal activities such as theft and sex work.8 People who use heroin appear to have more severe addiction and a lower socioeconomic status than prescription opioid users.9–11 But recently, a growing number of middle class individuals are becoming addicted to heroin.12

METHADONE

Methadone is a long-acting synthetic opioid that functions as a full agonist on the mu-opioid receptor. The drug binds, occupies, and stimulates the receptor, preventing withdrawal symptoms and reducing opioid cravings for at least 24 hours.13

Adverse effects of methadone

The most common adverse effects include lightheadedness, dizziness, sedation, nausea, vomiting, and sweating.14 Other adverse effects:

Unintentional overdose. The risk is serious, as a single 30-mg dose can be fatal in people who are opioid-naïve.13

QTc prolongation, which can lead to torsade de pointes. This risk, which is dose-related, must be taken into consideration in patients who have any cardiac symptoms (eg, syncope, arrhythmia), pathology (familial QT prolongation), or other risk factors for QTc prolongation (eg, hypokalemia, QTc-prolonging medications).15

Respiratory depression, which can be fatal. This dose-related risk is heightened during the first 4 weeks of treatment if titration is too rapid or if methadone is used in combination with other drugs that cause central nervous system or respiratory depression.13,14

Starting methadone

To prevent respiratory depression and death related to rapid induction, the general rule is to start methadone at a low daily dose (20–30 mg) depending on the patient’s withdrawal symptoms.14 During this period, patients need to be closely monitored and educated on the perils of concomitant use of central nervous system depressants.14

In most patients, the dose is titrated up until their withdrawal symptoms and cravings are eliminated, which generally requires 60 to 120 mg daily.14 Hepatic and renal impairment, pregnancy, and advanced age can alter methadone pharmacokinetics and may therefore necessitate dose adjustment.

BUPRENORPHINE

Buprenorphine is an alkaloid thebaine opioid derivative that acts as a partial mu-opioid agonist and a kappa antagonist.16 Like methadone, buprenorphine is used to manage cravings and withdrawal symptoms.16 Dosages of 4 to 16 mg (up to 32 mg) per day of buprenorphine are usually required to adequately control opioid cravings.16

Sublingual and subdermal products

Buprenorphine is currently available in the United States in sublingual and subdermal formulations.16,17

Sublingual buprenorphine is usually combined with naloxone in a 4:1 ratio to deter intravenous use. Intravenous injection of the combination product can precipitate withdrawal due to the antagonist action of naloxone. (Taken orally or sublingually, naloxone is poorly absorbed and has little or no clinical effect.) Buprenorphine-naloxone is available in tablets, a sublingual film strip, and a buccal film strip. Buprenorphine is also available by itself in a sublingual formulation.

The US Food and Drug Administration has approved a buprenorphine subdermal implant, Probuphine. Four rods, about 1 inch long, are placed under the skin in the inner aspect of the upper arm and provide the equivalent of 8 mg of buprenorphine daily for 6 months.17 However, this method is formulated only for maintenance treatment and cannot be used for induction. Additionally, it is recommended that the implants be surgically removed at the end of 6 months, after which another set of implants can be inserted in the other arm or the patient can switch to sublingual therapy, depending on the clinical situation and patient preference.17

Generally safer than methadone

Buprenorphine works on the same receptor as methadone and therefore has a similar side effect profile. However, buprenorphine has a ceiling effect, which greatly reduces the risk of fatal respiratory depression.18 It also does not cause clinically significant QTc prolongation and is preferable in patients who have cardiac risk factors.18

Another advantage is that buprenorphine has fewer identified medication interactions than methadone.18 Further, induction of buprenorphine in patients with opioid use disorder has been shown to be safer than methadone.19

Although buprenorphine has been found to be 6 times safer than methadone with regard to overdose among the general population,20 it can still cause fatal intoxication if used in combination with central nervous system depressants.21

Buprenorphine has been also associated with hepatotoxicity, though the risk of new-onset liver disease appears to be low.22

 

 

NALTREXONE IS LESS EFFECTIVE THAN METHADONE, BUPRENORPHINE

Besides methadone and buprenorphine, the only other approved option for treating opioid use disorder is the opioid antagonist naltrexone.

Naltrexone has significantly less abuse potential, as it provides no euphoria, but patients do not like it. Even with the long-acting formulation (Vivitrol), naltrexone treatment is significantly less effective than methadone or buprenorphine.23–25 Further, although naltrexone is not a controlled substance and so does not face the same scrutiny as the agonist therapies, there are other significant barriers. Additional information on naltrexone is presented in reviews by Modesto-Lowe and Van Kirk24 and Woody.25

OBSTACLES TO TREATMENT

People hold conflicting views about opioid agonist therapy. Some believe that “trading one drug for another” is not a legitimate therapeutic strategy, and they may feel ashamed of being on maintenance therapy.26 Similarly, some argue that the answer to establishing stable abstinence does not lie simply in prescribing medications.

The contrary argument is that these medications, if used appropriately, confer many benefits such as reducing the medical and psychosocial sequelae of opioid addiction.18 In fact, properly treated patients no longer meet the diagnostic criteria of opioid use disorder, and both methadone and buprenorphine are on the World Health Organization’s (WHO) list of essential medicines.27

Despite endorsement by the WHO, the stigma attached to the opioid agonists has been difficult to overcome. Patients with opioid use disorder may be viewed with distrust by healthcare providers and often do not feel welcome in healthcare settings or in self-help recovery groups.28

Barriers to methadone therapy

Federal regulations on methadone prescribing and use were established to promote patient safety and decrease diversion, but they may also complicate access to care.29 They stipulate that to qualify for methadone maintenance, patients need to demonstrate opioid addiction for 1 year, except for pregnant women and those who have been incarcerated in the past 6 months. Patients under the age of 18 must have 2 documented failed treatment episodes as well as approval by a guardian to receive treatment.

Inconvenience. Methadone can be prescribed for opioid dependence only by an accredited treatment program. Patients must therefore travel to the clinic and wait to be evaluated on a daily basis for a minimum of 90 days. Only after they demonstrate consistent responsible behavior and negative results on urine testing do they become eligible to take methadone home.29 If a patient is to travel out of the area during the initial 90 days of treatment, he or she must make arrangements in advance to find a clinic that will provide a “guest dose.”

The inconvenience arising from the regulations may deter some patients from seeking methadone therapy. In spite of this, once patients are started on methadone, more of them continue treatment than with buprenorphine.18 A proposed reason is that methadone is a potent full opioid agonist and therefore relieves withdrawal symptoms and craving more effectively than buprenorphine, which is a partial agonist.30 Another possible reason is the higher level of supervision afforded by methadone clinics, which require daily contact for at least 90 days. 

Safety concerns arise from methadone diversion, as illicit use may have lethal consequences. In the past decade, deaths from methadone overdose have risen significantly, most of them due to respiratory depression or torsade de pointes.13 However, most cases of diversion and overdose involve methadone that is prescribed for pain by individual practitioners and not from maintenance programs.13

Advantages of buprenorphine

Together, methadone’s lethality, stigma, and inconvenience may contribute to patients preferring buprenorphine.31

The regulations governing buprenorphine’s use are less restrictive than those with methadone. For example, patients must have a diagnosis of opioid addiction to be prescribed buprenorphine, but they are not required to carry the diagnosis for a year before treatment.31 Additionally, they do not need to travel to a federally approved opioid treatment center daily and can receive buprenorphine directly from a physician in an outpatient setting.

Under the Drug Abuse Treatment Act (DATA) of 2000, any physician can apply for a waiver to prescribe and dispense buprenorphine in his or her office. To qualify for an initial waiver, physicians must either obtain certification in the fields of addiction medicine or addiction psychiatry or complete an approved 8-hour training session.32 Each physician starts with a maximum of 30 patients, but can apply to treat up to 100 patients after 1 year and eventually up to 275 patients. Physicians must document every buprenorphine prescription they write and be able to refer patients for counseling.31

As of February 2017, nurse practitioners and physician assistants can also apply for a DATA 2000 waiver. All waivered providers are subject to unannounced visits from the Drug Enforcement Administration once every 5 years.32

While there are no federal restrictions on the amount of buprenorphine that can be dispensed, some states and some insurance companies have placed restrictions on dose or length of treatment.33 Buprenorphine patients can fill their prescriptions at any pharmacy and are permitted to bring their medication home, which improves access to care. However, office-based outpatient treatment is not without risk, and preventing buprenorphine diversion remains a challenge.34

‘Lending’ buprenorphine is a felony

Addicts have illegally used buprenorphine to self-treat opioid withdrawal, craving, and dependence.35 Its misuse has also been coupled with self-treatment of conditions that include depression and pain.36

A survey found that 83.7% of patients deem buprenorphine diversion to be appropriate; further, most patients said they consider it unethical to withhold prescribed buprenorphine from individuals showing symptoms of withdrawal.34 Physicians who prescribe buprenorphine must inform their patients that even “lending” or giving away their medication is a felony.

Prescribing physicians must also be diligent about monitoring for signs of diversion such as inconsistent urine toxicology screens, “lost” medication, and requests for early refills or escalating doses.37

 

 

EVALUATING PATIENTS FOR OPIOID REPLACEMENT THERAPY

In addition to federal regulations, we propose a 4-step approach to evaluate eligibility for opioid replacement therapy based on existing guidelines.37–39

Step 1: History and physical examination

The history should give particular attention to the patient’s cardiac, pulmonary, and hepatic status, with consideration of the risks of any medical comorbidities (eg, bacterial endocarditis, HIV and HCV infection) that might influence treatment.37

It is also essential to evaluate for any contraindications or drug interactions before prescribing methadone or buprenorphine.38

Contraindications to methadone maintenance include40:

  • Cor pulmonale
  • Methadone hypersensitivity
  • Pseudomembranous colitis
  • Selegiline use (due to risk of serotonin syndrome)
  • Ileum paralyticus.

Contraindications to buprenorphine use include:

  • Hypersensitivity to naloxone or buprenorphine
  • Impaired liver function (due to the risk of inadvertent overdose associated with slowed metabolism).

Concurrent use of alcohol or illicit benzodiazepines is a relative contraindication to both methadone and buprenorphine due to the risk of respiratory depression and overdose.37 Likewise, avoid coprescribing opioid agonists and benzodiazepines whenever possible. Obtain a complete list of current medications and query a prescription-monitoring database to determine whether any controlled substances are currently prescribed.37

During the physical examination, look for stigmata of intravenous drug use such as track marks or abscesses37 and document any physical findings consistent with intoxication or withdrawal. Patients must be completely detoxed or in withdrawal before beginning buprenorphine induction; premature induction can precipitate withdrawal.38

A discussion of pregnant patients with opioid use disorder is beyond the scope of this paper. However, it is incumbent on the prescriber to inquire whether the client is pregnant or intends to become pregnant and what birth control methods are in place.

Step 2: Assess psychiatric status

Assessment of the patient’s psychiatric status, including an assessment of alcohol and other drug use, will help determine his or her eligibility for opioid agonists.37 To prepare for the need to manage patients with psychiatrically complex issues, it is helpful to develop relationships with addiction specialists and psychiatrists who are familiar with opioid replacement therapy in your area. This will make it easier to collaborate on patients’ care.

Ask all patients directly about suicidal or homicidal ideation. Any patient with active suicidal or homicidal ideation should be assessed for need of immediate hospitalization by a psychiatrist or another qualified mental health professional. Patients with a history of suicidal ideation should be monitored closely by a mental health professional throughout treatment.37

Many if not most patients with opioid use disorder have concurrent psychiatric disorders, and the interplay between these disorders is complex.40,41 Depression, for example, can precede and even precipitate drug use (an observation supporting the “self-medication theory”).42 If the underlying depressive disorder is not addressed, relapse is nearly inevitable.

It has also been shown that both chronic opioid use and withdrawal can exacerbate aversive emotional states. This escalation of symptoms may result from the pharmacologic effects of opioids or from psychosocial sequelae that can arise from chronic opioid use.41 In this situation, maintaining abstinence can lead to resolution of depressive symptoms. As depression and opioid use can occur together, successful treatment requires equal attention to both illnesses.

Other common comorbidities in patients with opioid use disorder include posttraumatic stress disorder, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, antisocial personality disorder, and concurrent substance abuse disorders.43 The confluence of antisocial personality disorder is particularly important, as patients with antisocial personality disorder display disruptive and maladaptive behaviors.

Identify any psychotropic medication that is prescribed and check carefully for drug interactions. This applies especially to methadone, as many psychiatric medications also prolong the QT interval. Moreover, patients may not be forthcoming about the use of psychiatric medication.

Find out whether the patient is using any other addictive substances, particularly those that affect the central nervous system, as those who use fentanyl, benzodiazepines, or alcohol are at the highest risk of overdose.31 Often the best option for those with concurrent substance use disorders is inpatient detoxification followed by residential rehabilitation care. Either buprenorphine or methadone can then be initiated upon return to an outpatient setting.

Step 3: Assess psychosocial status

To what extent do the patient’s home environment and support systems promote a drug-free lifestyle? Unfortunately, the psychosocial status of many of these patients is fragile, and they may live in areas where illicit drugs are readily available (which can be urban, suburban, or rural), making it difficult to stay substance-free.38

Generally, lifestyle modifications are needed to transform maladaptive behaviors and promote an environment conducive to long-term recovery. Referrals to social services to address housing, vocational needs, and entitlements may be helpful.39

Step 4: Assess readiness to change

According to one model, people go through 5 stages when changing a behavior: precontemplation, contemplation, preparation for action, action, and maintenance.43 In general, the further along the stages a patient is, the more appropriate he or she is for office-based treatment with buprenorphine.39

The level of change can be assessed with tools such as Stages of Change Readiness and Treatment Eagerness Scale (SOCRATES). Use of stage-specific strategies may enhance a patient’s readiness to cease opioid use.43

Precontemplation. Those in the precontemplation stage are not ready to think about changing their behavior.43 They may be unaware of or unwilling to consider the risks associated with their opioid use and resistant to the idea of quitting. Engagement with opioid agonists for individuals in this stage is low and dropout rates are likely high.

Thus, the proper approach for “precontemplators” is to help them develop some ambivalence about their opioid use. One tactic is to involve the patient in a discussion of the personal benefits and risks of opioid use.

Contemplation. Individuals in the contemplation stage have begun to weigh the costs and benefits of opioid use and express ambivalence about it.44 Because the patient is willing to explore the risks of ongoing use and consider the benefits of treatment, the goal in this stage is to elicit a commitment from the individual to seek treatment.

Preparation. The person in this stage moves from thinking about treatment to planning what action to take.45 As the individual prepares to enter treatment, indecision tends to resurface, as well as self-doubt about his or her ability to change. During this stage, it is important for the provider to spell out goals (abstinence) and strategies (eg, counseling, medication) and enhance a sense of self-efficacy.

Action and maintenance. Patients in these stages engage in treatment and employ new strategies to abstain from opioid use. Maintaining these behaviors can be a daily struggle. Expressing confidence in the patient’s ability to abstain from use will support his or her progress. Behavioral interventions such as strategic avoidance of triggers and engagement in alternative activities (eg, support groups, exercise, faith-based practices) will help to maintain abstinence.

A CHRONIC CONDITION

Opioid use disorder, like many chronic illnesses, requires long-term attention to attain successful patient outcomes. The opioid agonists methadone and buprenorphine are the mainstay of treatment for it, conferring benefits such as reducing opioid use and preventing relapse.

Candidates for opioid agonist therapy should undergo a multidisciplinary assessment, including an evaluation on the patient’s readiness to change his or her opioid use.

Patient education should include a discussion of the risks of methadone (eg, respiratory depression, fatal overdose, and QTc prolongation) and buprenorphine (eg hepatotoxicity) and their benefits (eg, controlling craving, decreasing the risk of relapse). Patients should also be educated about overdose and diversion.

Despite the difficulties inherent in treating patients with opioid use disorder, when used appropriately, opioid agonist therapy can be lifesaving for patients struggling with long-term opioid addiction.

Acknowledgment: We thank Katelyn Colosi, BS, and Drs. Susan Wolfe, Dennis Bouffard, and Sinha Shirshendu for their helpful comments.

For a patient struggling with opioid addiction, opioid agonist therapy with methadone or buprenorphine can reduce craving and opioid use and may even save his or her life. But many clinicians are unfamiliar with this evidence-based treatment,1,2 which is best started early in the course of addiction.3

See related editorial

This article outlines the pharmacology of these drugs, their clinical uses, and the challenges of using them to treat opioid addiction.

DIAGNOSTIC CRITERIA

Opioid addiction, formally known as opioid use disorder, is a pattern of opioid misuse leading to clinically significant impairment in multiple areas of life. The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, Fifth Edition, lists 11 diagnostic criteria, but only 2 need to be present within the past year to make the diagnosis4:

  • Taking opioids longer or in higher doses than was intended
  • A persistent desire or unsuccessful efforts to cut down or control opioid use
  • Spending a great deal of time obtaining, using, or recovering from using opioids
  • Craving opioids
  • Repeatedly failing to fulfill obligations at work, school, or home due to opioid use
  • Continuing to use opioids even though it causes or exacerbates social or interpersonal problems
  • Giving up or curtailing important social, occupational, or recreational activities because of opioid use
  • Repeatedly using opioids in situations in which it is physically hazardous
  • Continuing to use opioids despite knowledge of having a persistent or recurrent physical or psychological problem that is likely to have been caused or exacerbated by the substance
  • Tolerance
  • Withdrawal.

Recent estimates indicate that 2.23 million people in the United States have opioid use disorder (426,000 with heroin and 1.8 million with prescription opioids).5

Progression from prescription opioids to heroin

We have observed that many patients with opioid use disorder start by misusing prescription opioids. Over time, tolerance can develop, which drives patients to use higher and higher doses.6

As the addiction progresses, a subset of prescription opioid users advances to using heroin, which is typically less expensive and easier to obtain.7 Most patients start with the intranasal route but eventually inject it intravenously.6,7

For many addicts, heroin use has medical consequences such as hepatitis C virus (HCV) and human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) infection, psychiatric problems such as depression and anxiety, and illegal activities such as theft and sex work.8 People who use heroin appear to have more severe addiction and a lower socioeconomic status than prescription opioid users.9–11 But recently, a growing number of middle class individuals are becoming addicted to heroin.12

METHADONE

Methadone is a long-acting synthetic opioid that functions as a full agonist on the mu-opioid receptor. The drug binds, occupies, and stimulates the receptor, preventing withdrawal symptoms and reducing opioid cravings for at least 24 hours.13

Adverse effects of methadone

The most common adverse effects include lightheadedness, dizziness, sedation, nausea, vomiting, and sweating.14 Other adverse effects:

Unintentional overdose. The risk is serious, as a single 30-mg dose can be fatal in people who are opioid-naïve.13

QTc prolongation, which can lead to torsade de pointes. This risk, which is dose-related, must be taken into consideration in patients who have any cardiac symptoms (eg, syncope, arrhythmia), pathology (familial QT prolongation), or other risk factors for QTc prolongation (eg, hypokalemia, QTc-prolonging medications).15

Respiratory depression, which can be fatal. This dose-related risk is heightened during the first 4 weeks of treatment if titration is too rapid or if methadone is used in combination with other drugs that cause central nervous system or respiratory depression.13,14

Starting methadone

To prevent respiratory depression and death related to rapid induction, the general rule is to start methadone at a low daily dose (20–30 mg) depending on the patient’s withdrawal symptoms.14 During this period, patients need to be closely monitored and educated on the perils of concomitant use of central nervous system depressants.14

In most patients, the dose is titrated up until their withdrawal symptoms and cravings are eliminated, which generally requires 60 to 120 mg daily.14 Hepatic and renal impairment, pregnancy, and advanced age can alter methadone pharmacokinetics and may therefore necessitate dose adjustment.

BUPRENORPHINE

Buprenorphine is an alkaloid thebaine opioid derivative that acts as a partial mu-opioid agonist and a kappa antagonist.16 Like methadone, buprenorphine is used to manage cravings and withdrawal symptoms.16 Dosages of 4 to 16 mg (up to 32 mg) per day of buprenorphine are usually required to adequately control opioid cravings.16

Sublingual and subdermal products

Buprenorphine is currently available in the United States in sublingual and subdermal formulations.16,17

Sublingual buprenorphine is usually combined with naloxone in a 4:1 ratio to deter intravenous use. Intravenous injection of the combination product can precipitate withdrawal due to the antagonist action of naloxone. (Taken orally or sublingually, naloxone is poorly absorbed and has little or no clinical effect.) Buprenorphine-naloxone is available in tablets, a sublingual film strip, and a buccal film strip. Buprenorphine is also available by itself in a sublingual formulation.

The US Food and Drug Administration has approved a buprenorphine subdermal implant, Probuphine. Four rods, about 1 inch long, are placed under the skin in the inner aspect of the upper arm and provide the equivalent of 8 mg of buprenorphine daily for 6 months.17 However, this method is formulated only for maintenance treatment and cannot be used for induction. Additionally, it is recommended that the implants be surgically removed at the end of 6 months, after which another set of implants can be inserted in the other arm or the patient can switch to sublingual therapy, depending on the clinical situation and patient preference.17

Generally safer than methadone

Buprenorphine works on the same receptor as methadone and therefore has a similar side effect profile. However, buprenorphine has a ceiling effect, which greatly reduces the risk of fatal respiratory depression.18 It also does not cause clinically significant QTc prolongation and is preferable in patients who have cardiac risk factors.18

Another advantage is that buprenorphine has fewer identified medication interactions than methadone.18 Further, induction of buprenorphine in patients with opioid use disorder has been shown to be safer than methadone.19

Although buprenorphine has been found to be 6 times safer than methadone with regard to overdose among the general population,20 it can still cause fatal intoxication if used in combination with central nervous system depressants.21

Buprenorphine has been also associated with hepatotoxicity, though the risk of new-onset liver disease appears to be low.22

 

 

NALTREXONE IS LESS EFFECTIVE THAN METHADONE, BUPRENORPHINE

Besides methadone and buprenorphine, the only other approved option for treating opioid use disorder is the opioid antagonist naltrexone.

Naltrexone has significantly less abuse potential, as it provides no euphoria, but patients do not like it. Even with the long-acting formulation (Vivitrol), naltrexone treatment is significantly less effective than methadone or buprenorphine.23–25 Further, although naltrexone is not a controlled substance and so does not face the same scrutiny as the agonist therapies, there are other significant barriers. Additional information on naltrexone is presented in reviews by Modesto-Lowe and Van Kirk24 and Woody.25

OBSTACLES TO TREATMENT

People hold conflicting views about opioid agonist therapy. Some believe that “trading one drug for another” is not a legitimate therapeutic strategy, and they may feel ashamed of being on maintenance therapy.26 Similarly, some argue that the answer to establishing stable abstinence does not lie simply in prescribing medications.

The contrary argument is that these medications, if used appropriately, confer many benefits such as reducing the medical and psychosocial sequelae of opioid addiction.18 In fact, properly treated patients no longer meet the diagnostic criteria of opioid use disorder, and both methadone and buprenorphine are on the World Health Organization’s (WHO) list of essential medicines.27

Despite endorsement by the WHO, the stigma attached to the opioid agonists has been difficult to overcome. Patients with opioid use disorder may be viewed with distrust by healthcare providers and often do not feel welcome in healthcare settings or in self-help recovery groups.28

Barriers to methadone therapy

Federal regulations on methadone prescribing and use were established to promote patient safety and decrease diversion, but they may also complicate access to care.29 They stipulate that to qualify for methadone maintenance, patients need to demonstrate opioid addiction for 1 year, except for pregnant women and those who have been incarcerated in the past 6 months. Patients under the age of 18 must have 2 documented failed treatment episodes as well as approval by a guardian to receive treatment.

Inconvenience. Methadone can be prescribed for opioid dependence only by an accredited treatment program. Patients must therefore travel to the clinic and wait to be evaluated on a daily basis for a minimum of 90 days. Only after they demonstrate consistent responsible behavior and negative results on urine testing do they become eligible to take methadone home.29 If a patient is to travel out of the area during the initial 90 days of treatment, he or she must make arrangements in advance to find a clinic that will provide a “guest dose.”

The inconvenience arising from the regulations may deter some patients from seeking methadone therapy. In spite of this, once patients are started on methadone, more of them continue treatment than with buprenorphine.18 A proposed reason is that methadone is a potent full opioid agonist and therefore relieves withdrawal symptoms and craving more effectively than buprenorphine, which is a partial agonist.30 Another possible reason is the higher level of supervision afforded by methadone clinics, which require daily contact for at least 90 days. 

Safety concerns arise from methadone diversion, as illicit use may have lethal consequences. In the past decade, deaths from methadone overdose have risen significantly, most of them due to respiratory depression or torsade de pointes.13 However, most cases of diversion and overdose involve methadone that is prescribed for pain by individual practitioners and not from maintenance programs.13

Advantages of buprenorphine

Together, methadone’s lethality, stigma, and inconvenience may contribute to patients preferring buprenorphine.31

The regulations governing buprenorphine’s use are less restrictive than those with methadone. For example, patients must have a diagnosis of opioid addiction to be prescribed buprenorphine, but they are not required to carry the diagnosis for a year before treatment.31 Additionally, they do not need to travel to a federally approved opioid treatment center daily and can receive buprenorphine directly from a physician in an outpatient setting.

Under the Drug Abuse Treatment Act (DATA) of 2000, any physician can apply for a waiver to prescribe and dispense buprenorphine in his or her office. To qualify for an initial waiver, physicians must either obtain certification in the fields of addiction medicine or addiction psychiatry or complete an approved 8-hour training session.32 Each physician starts with a maximum of 30 patients, but can apply to treat up to 100 patients after 1 year and eventually up to 275 patients. Physicians must document every buprenorphine prescription they write and be able to refer patients for counseling.31

As of February 2017, nurse practitioners and physician assistants can also apply for a DATA 2000 waiver. All waivered providers are subject to unannounced visits from the Drug Enforcement Administration once every 5 years.32

While there are no federal restrictions on the amount of buprenorphine that can be dispensed, some states and some insurance companies have placed restrictions on dose or length of treatment.33 Buprenorphine patients can fill their prescriptions at any pharmacy and are permitted to bring their medication home, which improves access to care. However, office-based outpatient treatment is not without risk, and preventing buprenorphine diversion remains a challenge.34

‘Lending’ buprenorphine is a felony

Addicts have illegally used buprenorphine to self-treat opioid withdrawal, craving, and dependence.35 Its misuse has also been coupled with self-treatment of conditions that include depression and pain.36

A survey found that 83.7% of patients deem buprenorphine diversion to be appropriate; further, most patients said they consider it unethical to withhold prescribed buprenorphine from individuals showing symptoms of withdrawal.34 Physicians who prescribe buprenorphine must inform their patients that even “lending” or giving away their medication is a felony.

Prescribing physicians must also be diligent about monitoring for signs of diversion such as inconsistent urine toxicology screens, “lost” medication, and requests for early refills or escalating doses.37

 

 

EVALUATING PATIENTS FOR OPIOID REPLACEMENT THERAPY

In addition to federal regulations, we propose a 4-step approach to evaluate eligibility for opioid replacement therapy based on existing guidelines.37–39

Step 1: History and physical examination

The history should give particular attention to the patient’s cardiac, pulmonary, and hepatic status, with consideration of the risks of any medical comorbidities (eg, bacterial endocarditis, HIV and HCV infection) that might influence treatment.37

It is also essential to evaluate for any contraindications or drug interactions before prescribing methadone or buprenorphine.38

Contraindications to methadone maintenance include40:

  • Cor pulmonale
  • Methadone hypersensitivity
  • Pseudomembranous colitis
  • Selegiline use (due to risk of serotonin syndrome)
  • Ileum paralyticus.

Contraindications to buprenorphine use include:

  • Hypersensitivity to naloxone or buprenorphine
  • Impaired liver function (due to the risk of inadvertent overdose associated with slowed metabolism).

Concurrent use of alcohol or illicit benzodiazepines is a relative contraindication to both methadone and buprenorphine due to the risk of respiratory depression and overdose.37 Likewise, avoid coprescribing opioid agonists and benzodiazepines whenever possible. Obtain a complete list of current medications and query a prescription-monitoring database to determine whether any controlled substances are currently prescribed.37

During the physical examination, look for stigmata of intravenous drug use such as track marks or abscesses37 and document any physical findings consistent with intoxication or withdrawal. Patients must be completely detoxed or in withdrawal before beginning buprenorphine induction; premature induction can precipitate withdrawal.38

A discussion of pregnant patients with opioid use disorder is beyond the scope of this paper. However, it is incumbent on the prescriber to inquire whether the client is pregnant or intends to become pregnant and what birth control methods are in place.

Step 2: Assess psychiatric status

Assessment of the patient’s psychiatric status, including an assessment of alcohol and other drug use, will help determine his or her eligibility for opioid agonists.37 To prepare for the need to manage patients with psychiatrically complex issues, it is helpful to develop relationships with addiction specialists and psychiatrists who are familiar with opioid replacement therapy in your area. This will make it easier to collaborate on patients’ care.

Ask all patients directly about suicidal or homicidal ideation. Any patient with active suicidal or homicidal ideation should be assessed for need of immediate hospitalization by a psychiatrist or another qualified mental health professional. Patients with a history of suicidal ideation should be monitored closely by a mental health professional throughout treatment.37

Many if not most patients with opioid use disorder have concurrent psychiatric disorders, and the interplay between these disorders is complex.40,41 Depression, for example, can precede and even precipitate drug use (an observation supporting the “self-medication theory”).42 If the underlying depressive disorder is not addressed, relapse is nearly inevitable.

It has also been shown that both chronic opioid use and withdrawal can exacerbate aversive emotional states. This escalation of symptoms may result from the pharmacologic effects of opioids or from psychosocial sequelae that can arise from chronic opioid use.41 In this situation, maintaining abstinence can lead to resolution of depressive symptoms. As depression and opioid use can occur together, successful treatment requires equal attention to both illnesses.

Other common comorbidities in patients with opioid use disorder include posttraumatic stress disorder, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, antisocial personality disorder, and concurrent substance abuse disorders.43 The confluence of antisocial personality disorder is particularly important, as patients with antisocial personality disorder display disruptive and maladaptive behaviors.

Identify any psychotropic medication that is prescribed and check carefully for drug interactions. This applies especially to methadone, as many psychiatric medications also prolong the QT interval. Moreover, patients may not be forthcoming about the use of psychiatric medication.

Find out whether the patient is using any other addictive substances, particularly those that affect the central nervous system, as those who use fentanyl, benzodiazepines, or alcohol are at the highest risk of overdose.31 Often the best option for those with concurrent substance use disorders is inpatient detoxification followed by residential rehabilitation care. Either buprenorphine or methadone can then be initiated upon return to an outpatient setting.

Step 3: Assess psychosocial status

To what extent do the patient’s home environment and support systems promote a drug-free lifestyle? Unfortunately, the psychosocial status of many of these patients is fragile, and they may live in areas where illicit drugs are readily available (which can be urban, suburban, or rural), making it difficult to stay substance-free.38

Generally, lifestyle modifications are needed to transform maladaptive behaviors and promote an environment conducive to long-term recovery. Referrals to social services to address housing, vocational needs, and entitlements may be helpful.39

Step 4: Assess readiness to change

According to one model, people go through 5 stages when changing a behavior: precontemplation, contemplation, preparation for action, action, and maintenance.43 In general, the further along the stages a patient is, the more appropriate he or she is for office-based treatment with buprenorphine.39

The level of change can be assessed with tools such as Stages of Change Readiness and Treatment Eagerness Scale (SOCRATES). Use of stage-specific strategies may enhance a patient’s readiness to cease opioid use.43

Precontemplation. Those in the precontemplation stage are not ready to think about changing their behavior.43 They may be unaware of or unwilling to consider the risks associated with their opioid use and resistant to the idea of quitting. Engagement with opioid agonists for individuals in this stage is low and dropout rates are likely high.

Thus, the proper approach for “precontemplators” is to help them develop some ambivalence about their opioid use. One tactic is to involve the patient in a discussion of the personal benefits and risks of opioid use.

Contemplation. Individuals in the contemplation stage have begun to weigh the costs and benefits of opioid use and express ambivalence about it.44 Because the patient is willing to explore the risks of ongoing use and consider the benefits of treatment, the goal in this stage is to elicit a commitment from the individual to seek treatment.

Preparation. The person in this stage moves from thinking about treatment to planning what action to take.45 As the individual prepares to enter treatment, indecision tends to resurface, as well as self-doubt about his or her ability to change. During this stage, it is important for the provider to spell out goals (abstinence) and strategies (eg, counseling, medication) and enhance a sense of self-efficacy.

Action and maintenance. Patients in these stages engage in treatment and employ new strategies to abstain from opioid use. Maintaining these behaviors can be a daily struggle. Expressing confidence in the patient’s ability to abstain from use will support his or her progress. Behavioral interventions such as strategic avoidance of triggers and engagement in alternative activities (eg, support groups, exercise, faith-based practices) will help to maintain abstinence.

A CHRONIC CONDITION

Opioid use disorder, like many chronic illnesses, requires long-term attention to attain successful patient outcomes. The opioid agonists methadone and buprenorphine are the mainstay of treatment for it, conferring benefits such as reducing opioid use and preventing relapse.

Candidates for opioid agonist therapy should undergo a multidisciplinary assessment, including an evaluation on the patient’s readiness to change his or her opioid use.

Patient education should include a discussion of the risks of methadone (eg, respiratory depression, fatal overdose, and QTc prolongation) and buprenorphine (eg hepatotoxicity) and their benefits (eg, controlling craving, decreasing the risk of relapse). Patients should also be educated about overdose and diversion.

Despite the difficulties inherent in treating patients with opioid use disorder, when used appropriately, opioid agonist therapy can be lifesaving for patients struggling with long-term opioid addiction.

Acknowledgment: We thank Katelyn Colosi, BS, and Drs. Susan Wolfe, Dennis Bouffard, and Sinha Shirshendu for their helpful comments.

References
  1. Wakeman SE, Pham-Kanter G, Donelan K. Attitudes, practices, and preparedness to care for patients with substance use disorder: results from a survey of general internists. Subst Abus 2016; 37:635–641.
  2. Samuels EA, Dwyer K, Mello MJ, Baird J, Kellogg AR, Bernstein E. Emergency department-based opioid harm reduction: moving physicians from willing to doing. Acad Emerg Med 2016; 23:455–465.
  3. Mohlman MK, Tanzman B, Finison K, Pinette M, Jones C. Impact of medication-assisted treatment for opioid addiction on Medicaid expenditures and health services utilization rates in Vermont. J Subst Abuse Treat 2016; 67:9–14.
  4. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, Fifth Edition. Arlington, VA, American Psychiatric Association, 2013.
  5. Center for Behavioral Health Statistics and Quality. Behavioral health trends in the United States: results from the 2014 National Survey on Drug Use and Health. www.samhsa.gov/data. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  6. Compton WM, Jones CM, Baldwin GT. Relationship between nonmedical prescription-opioid use and heroin use. N Engl J Med 2016; 374:154–163.
  7. Ruan X, Wyche MQ, Kaye AD. Analyzing the relationship between nonmedical prescription-opioid use and heroin use. J Opioid Manage 2016; 12:11–14.
  8. Hser YI, Evans E, Grella C, Ling W, Anglin D. Long-term course of opioid addiction. Harv Rev Psychiatry 2015; 23:76–89.
  9. Nielsen S, Hillhouse M, Mooney L, Ang A, Ling W. Buprenorphine pharmacotherapy and behavioral treatment: comparison of outcomes among prescription opioid users, heroin users and combination users. J Subst Abuse Treat 2015; 48:70–76.
  10. Moore BA, Fiellin DA, Barry DT, et al. Primary care office-based buprenorphine treatment: comparison of heroin and prescription opioid dependent patients. J Gen Intern Med 2007; 22:527–530.
  11. Fischer B, Patra J, Cruz MF, Gittins J, Rehm J. Comparing heroin users and prescription opioid users in a Canadian multi-site population of illicit opioid users. Drug Alcohol Rev 2008; 27:625–632.
  12. Compton WM, Jones CM, Baldwin GT. Relationship between nonmedical prescription-opioid use and heroin use. N Engl J Med 2016; 374:154–163.
  13. Jones CM, Baldwin GT, Manocchio T, White JO, Mack KA. Trends in methadone distribution for pain treatment, methadone diversion, and overdose deaths—United States, 2002–2014. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2016; 65:667–671.
  14. Baxter LE Sr, Campbell A, Deshields M, et al. Safe methadone induction and stabilization: report of an expert panel. J Addict Med 2013; 7:377–386.
  15. Alinejad S, Kazemi T, Zamani N, Hoffman RS, Mehrpour O. A systematic review of the cardiotoxicity of methadone. EXCLI J 2015; 14:577–600.
  16. Johnson RE, Strain EC, Amass L. Buprenorphine: how to use it right. Drug Alcohol Depend 2003; 70(suppl 2):S59–S77.
  17. Ling W. Buprenorphine implant for opioid addiction. Pain Manage 2012; 2:345–350.
  18. Saxon AJ, Hser YI, Woody G, Ling W. Medication-assisted treatment for opioid addiction: methadone and buprenorphine. J Food Drug Anal 2013; 21:S69–S72.
  19. Kimber J, Larney S, Hickman M, Randall D, Degenhardt L. Mortality risk of opioid substitution therapy with methadone versus buprenorphine: a retrospective cohort study. Lancet Psychiatry 2015; 2:901–908.
  20. Marteau D, McDonald R, Patel K. The relative risk of fatal poisoning by methadone or buprenorphine within the wider population of England and Wales. BMJ Open 2015; 5: e007629.
  21. Kintz P. Deaths involving buprenorphine: a compendium of French cases. Forensic Sci Int 2001; 121:65–69.
  22. Zuin M, Giorgini A, Selmi C, et al. Acute liver and renal failure during treatment with buprenorphine at therapeutic dose. Dig Liver Dis 2009; 41:e8–e10.
  23. Klein JW. Pharmacotherapy for substance use disorders. Med Clin North Am 2016; 100:891–910.
  24. Modesto-Lowe V, Van Kirk J. Clinical uses of naltrexone: a review of the evidence. Exp Clin Psychopharmocol 2002; 10:213–227.
  25. Woody GE. Agonist models for treating persons with substance use disorders. Curr Psychiatry Rep 2014; 16:489.
  26. Sanders JJ, Roose RJ, Lubrano MC, Lucan SC. Meaning and methadone: patient perceptions of methadone dose and a model to promote adherence to maintenance treatment. J Addict Med 2013; 7:307–313.
  27. Herget G. Methadone and buprenorphine added to the WHO list of essential medicines. HIV/AIDS Policy Law Rev 2005; 10:23–24.
  28. Suzuki J, Dodds T. Clinical recommendation of 12-step meeting attendance and discussion regarding disclosure of buprenorphine use among patients in office-based opioid treatment. Subst Abus 2016; 37:31–34.
  29. Rettig RA, Yarmolinsky A. Federal Regulation of Methadone Treatment. Washington, DC: National Academies Press; 1995.
  30. Srivastava A, Kahan M, Nader M. Primary care management of opioid use disorders: abstinence, methadone, or buprenorphine-naloxone? Can Fam Physician 2017; 63:200–205.
  31. Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration. Federal Guidelines for Opioid Treatment Programs. Rockville, MD: Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration; 2015.
  32. Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration SAMSHA. Buprenorphine waiver management. www.samhsa.gov/medication-assisted-treatment/buprenorphine-waiver-management. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  33. Mark TL, Lubran R, McCance-Kats EF, Chalk M, Richardson J. Medicaid coverage of medications to treat alcohol and opioid dependence. J Subst Abuse Treat 2015; 55:1–5.
  34. Johnson B, Richert T. Diversion of methadone and buprenorphine from opioid substitution treatment: the importance of patients’ attitudes and norms. J Subst Abuse Treat 2015; 54:50–55.
  35. Yokell MA, Zaller ND, Green TC, Rich JD. Buprenorphine and buprenorphine/naloxone diversion, misuse, and illicit use: an international review. Curr Drug Abuse Rev 2011; 4:28–41.
  36. Schuman-Olivier Z, Albanese M, Nelson SE, et al. Self-treatment: illicit buprenorphine use by opioid-dependent treatment seekers. J Subst Abuse Treat 2010; 39:41–50.
  37. American Society of Addiction Medicine. National practice guidelines for the use of medications in the treatment of addiction involving opioid use. www.asam.org/docs/default-source/practice-support/guidelines-and-consensus-docs/asam-national-practice-guideline-supplement.pdf. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  38. McNicholas L. Clinical guidelines for the use of buprenorphine in the treatment of opioid addiction. Rockville, MD: US Department of Health and Human Services, Substance Abuse and Mental Health Service Administration; 2004.
  39. Center for Substance Abuse Treatment. Clinical guidelines for the use of buprenorphine in the treatment of opioid addiction. Rockville (MD): Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration (US); 2004. (Treatment Improvement Protocol (TIP) Series, No. 40.) www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK64245. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  40. Zippel-Schultz B, Specka M, Cimander K, et al. Outcomes of patients in long-term opioid maintenance treatment. Subst Use Misuse 2016; 51:1493–1503.
  41. Martins SS, Keyes KM, Storr CL, Zhu H, Chilcoat HD. Pathways between nonmedical opioid use/dependence and psychiatric disorders: results from the National Epidemiologic Survey on Alcohol and Related Conditions. Drug Alcohol Depend 2009; 103:16–24.
  42. Khantzian EJ. The self-medication hypothesis of addictive disorders: focus on heroin and cocaine dependence. Am J Psychiatry 1985; 142:1259–1264.
  43. Belding MA, Iguchi MY, Lamb RJ, Lakin M, Terry R. Stages and processes of change among polydrug users in methadone maintenance treatment. Drug Alcohol Depend 1995; 39:45–53.
  44. Peteet JR, Brenner S, Curtiss D, Ferrigno M, Kauffman J. A stage of change approach to addiction in the medical setting. Gen Hosp Psychiatry 1998; 20:267–273.
  45. Vijay A, Bazazi AR, Yee I, Kamarulzaman A, Altice FL. Treatment readiness, attitudes toward, and experiences with methadone and buprenorphine maintenance therapy among people who inject drugs in Malaysia. J Subst Abuse Treat 2015; 54:29–36.
References
  1. Wakeman SE, Pham-Kanter G, Donelan K. Attitudes, practices, and preparedness to care for patients with substance use disorder: results from a survey of general internists. Subst Abus 2016; 37:635–641.
  2. Samuels EA, Dwyer K, Mello MJ, Baird J, Kellogg AR, Bernstein E. Emergency department-based opioid harm reduction: moving physicians from willing to doing. Acad Emerg Med 2016; 23:455–465.
  3. Mohlman MK, Tanzman B, Finison K, Pinette M, Jones C. Impact of medication-assisted treatment for opioid addiction on Medicaid expenditures and health services utilization rates in Vermont. J Subst Abuse Treat 2016; 67:9–14.
  4. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, Fifth Edition. Arlington, VA, American Psychiatric Association, 2013.
  5. Center for Behavioral Health Statistics and Quality. Behavioral health trends in the United States: results from the 2014 National Survey on Drug Use and Health. www.samhsa.gov/data. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  6. Compton WM, Jones CM, Baldwin GT. Relationship between nonmedical prescription-opioid use and heroin use. N Engl J Med 2016; 374:154–163.
  7. Ruan X, Wyche MQ, Kaye AD. Analyzing the relationship between nonmedical prescription-opioid use and heroin use. J Opioid Manage 2016; 12:11–14.
  8. Hser YI, Evans E, Grella C, Ling W, Anglin D. Long-term course of opioid addiction. Harv Rev Psychiatry 2015; 23:76–89.
  9. Nielsen S, Hillhouse M, Mooney L, Ang A, Ling W. Buprenorphine pharmacotherapy and behavioral treatment: comparison of outcomes among prescription opioid users, heroin users and combination users. J Subst Abuse Treat 2015; 48:70–76.
  10. Moore BA, Fiellin DA, Barry DT, et al. Primary care office-based buprenorphine treatment: comparison of heroin and prescription opioid dependent patients. J Gen Intern Med 2007; 22:527–530.
  11. Fischer B, Patra J, Cruz MF, Gittins J, Rehm J. Comparing heroin users and prescription opioid users in a Canadian multi-site population of illicit opioid users. Drug Alcohol Rev 2008; 27:625–632.
  12. Compton WM, Jones CM, Baldwin GT. Relationship between nonmedical prescription-opioid use and heroin use. N Engl J Med 2016; 374:154–163.
  13. Jones CM, Baldwin GT, Manocchio T, White JO, Mack KA. Trends in methadone distribution for pain treatment, methadone diversion, and overdose deaths—United States, 2002–2014. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2016; 65:667–671.
  14. Baxter LE Sr, Campbell A, Deshields M, et al. Safe methadone induction and stabilization: report of an expert panel. J Addict Med 2013; 7:377–386.
  15. Alinejad S, Kazemi T, Zamani N, Hoffman RS, Mehrpour O. A systematic review of the cardiotoxicity of methadone. EXCLI J 2015; 14:577–600.
  16. Johnson RE, Strain EC, Amass L. Buprenorphine: how to use it right. Drug Alcohol Depend 2003; 70(suppl 2):S59–S77.
  17. Ling W. Buprenorphine implant for opioid addiction. Pain Manage 2012; 2:345–350.
  18. Saxon AJ, Hser YI, Woody G, Ling W. Medication-assisted treatment for opioid addiction: methadone and buprenorphine. J Food Drug Anal 2013; 21:S69–S72.
  19. Kimber J, Larney S, Hickman M, Randall D, Degenhardt L. Mortality risk of opioid substitution therapy with methadone versus buprenorphine: a retrospective cohort study. Lancet Psychiatry 2015; 2:901–908.
  20. Marteau D, McDonald R, Patel K. The relative risk of fatal poisoning by methadone or buprenorphine within the wider population of England and Wales. BMJ Open 2015; 5: e007629.
  21. Kintz P. Deaths involving buprenorphine: a compendium of French cases. Forensic Sci Int 2001; 121:65–69.
  22. Zuin M, Giorgini A, Selmi C, et al. Acute liver and renal failure during treatment with buprenorphine at therapeutic dose. Dig Liver Dis 2009; 41:e8–e10.
  23. Klein JW. Pharmacotherapy for substance use disorders. Med Clin North Am 2016; 100:891–910.
  24. Modesto-Lowe V, Van Kirk J. Clinical uses of naltrexone: a review of the evidence. Exp Clin Psychopharmocol 2002; 10:213–227.
  25. Woody GE. Agonist models for treating persons with substance use disorders. Curr Psychiatry Rep 2014; 16:489.
  26. Sanders JJ, Roose RJ, Lubrano MC, Lucan SC. Meaning and methadone: patient perceptions of methadone dose and a model to promote adherence to maintenance treatment. J Addict Med 2013; 7:307–313.
  27. Herget G. Methadone and buprenorphine added to the WHO list of essential medicines. HIV/AIDS Policy Law Rev 2005; 10:23–24.
  28. Suzuki J, Dodds T. Clinical recommendation of 12-step meeting attendance and discussion regarding disclosure of buprenorphine use among patients in office-based opioid treatment. Subst Abus 2016; 37:31–34.
  29. Rettig RA, Yarmolinsky A. Federal Regulation of Methadone Treatment. Washington, DC: National Academies Press; 1995.
  30. Srivastava A, Kahan M, Nader M. Primary care management of opioid use disorders: abstinence, methadone, or buprenorphine-naloxone? Can Fam Physician 2017; 63:200–205.
  31. Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration. Federal Guidelines for Opioid Treatment Programs. Rockville, MD: Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration; 2015.
  32. Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration SAMSHA. Buprenorphine waiver management. www.samhsa.gov/medication-assisted-treatment/buprenorphine-waiver-management. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  33. Mark TL, Lubran R, McCance-Kats EF, Chalk M, Richardson J. Medicaid coverage of medications to treat alcohol and opioid dependence. J Subst Abuse Treat 2015; 55:1–5.
  34. Johnson B, Richert T. Diversion of methadone and buprenorphine from opioid substitution treatment: the importance of patients’ attitudes and norms. J Subst Abuse Treat 2015; 54:50–55.
  35. Yokell MA, Zaller ND, Green TC, Rich JD. Buprenorphine and buprenorphine/naloxone diversion, misuse, and illicit use: an international review. Curr Drug Abuse Rev 2011; 4:28–41.
  36. Schuman-Olivier Z, Albanese M, Nelson SE, et al. Self-treatment: illicit buprenorphine use by opioid-dependent treatment seekers. J Subst Abuse Treat 2010; 39:41–50.
  37. American Society of Addiction Medicine. National practice guidelines for the use of medications in the treatment of addiction involving opioid use. www.asam.org/docs/default-source/practice-support/guidelines-and-consensus-docs/asam-national-practice-guideline-supplement.pdf. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  38. McNicholas L. Clinical guidelines for the use of buprenorphine in the treatment of opioid addiction. Rockville, MD: US Department of Health and Human Services, Substance Abuse and Mental Health Service Administration; 2004.
  39. Center for Substance Abuse Treatment. Clinical guidelines for the use of buprenorphine in the treatment of opioid addiction. Rockville (MD): Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration (US); 2004. (Treatment Improvement Protocol (TIP) Series, No. 40.) www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK64245. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  40. Zippel-Schultz B, Specka M, Cimander K, et al. Outcomes of patients in long-term opioid maintenance treatment. Subst Use Misuse 2016; 51:1493–1503.
  41. Martins SS, Keyes KM, Storr CL, Zhu H, Chilcoat HD. Pathways between nonmedical opioid use/dependence and psychiatric disorders: results from the National Epidemiologic Survey on Alcohol and Related Conditions. Drug Alcohol Depend 2009; 103:16–24.
  42. Khantzian EJ. The self-medication hypothesis of addictive disorders: focus on heroin and cocaine dependence. Am J Psychiatry 1985; 142:1259–1264.
  43. Belding MA, Iguchi MY, Lamb RJ, Lakin M, Terry R. Stages and processes of change among polydrug users in methadone maintenance treatment. Drug Alcohol Depend 1995; 39:45–53.
  44. Peteet JR, Brenner S, Curtiss D, Ferrigno M, Kauffman J. A stage of change approach to addiction in the medical setting. Gen Hosp Psychiatry 1998; 20:267–273.
  45. Vijay A, Bazazi AR, Yee I, Kamarulzaman A, Altice FL. Treatment readiness, attitudes toward, and experiences with methadone and buprenorphine maintenance therapy among people who inject drugs in Malaysia. J Subst Abuse Treat 2015; 54:29–36.
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Page Number
377-384
Page Number
377-384
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Use and misuse of opioid agonists in opioid addiction
Display Headline
Use and misuse of opioid agonists in opioid addiction
Legacy Keywords
opioids, addiction, opioid use disorder, methadone, buprenorphine, naltrexone, Vania Modesto-Lowe, Katie Swiezbin, Margaret Chaplin, Gabriela Hoefer
Legacy Keywords
opioids, addiction, opioid use disorder, methadone, buprenorphine, naltrexone, Vania Modesto-Lowe, Katie Swiezbin, Margaret Chaplin, Gabriela Hoefer
Sections
Inside the Article

KEY POINTS

  • Opioid use disorder is potentially lethal and has become more prevalent in the United States over the past few decades.
  • The opioid agonist methadone and the partial agonist buprenorphine are the currently recommended treatments for patients who need opioid maintenance therapy. However, they carry the risk of adverse effects (eg, respiratory depression, QTc interval prolongation, hepatotoxicity), diversion, and overdose.
  • Patients being considered for opioid agonist therapy need a comprehensive assessment including a thorough medical history and physical examination, psychiatric evaluation, psychosocial appraisal, and determination of readiness to change.
  • When methadone and buprenorphine are properly prescribed they confer significant benefits, including reduction or elimination of opioid use, reductions in overdose risk, and positive changes in behavior and lifestyle.
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Use ProPublica
Article PDF Media

A rational approach to opioid use disorder in primary care

Article Type
Changed
Display Headline
A rational approach to opioid use disorder in primary care

As a medical student, I understood that dealing with death was part of the practice of medicine. I was prepared to help my patients face the end of life from disease and old age and had steeled myself against the inevitable losses I would see from trauma and infection. However, I had no sense of the incredible burden that opioid addiction and death from unintentional overdose would one day cause.

See related article

MORE DEATHS FROM OVERDOSE THAN FROM MOTOR VEHICLE ACCIDENTS

To highlight the point, unintentional overdose deaths in 2008 exceeded motor vehicle accidents as the leading cause of accidental death in the United States.1 Since then, the problem has only worsened; by 2014 the US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention reported that 78 Americans were dying each day from unintentional opioid overdose.2

Yet the scourge of deaths from opioid overdose is only the most obvious way that opioid use disorder destroys the lives of patients suffering from addiction, as well as their friends and family. Among many other heartaches, opioid use disorder is associated with severely impaired social function, increased rates of hepatitis C and human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) infection, and serious legal consequences and incarceration.3 Sadly, opioid use disorder has torn apart countless families. Addiction may be a brain disease, but its scope of morbidity extends far beyond the individual with the affliction.

PLENTY OF BLAME TO GO AROUND

To some extent, physicians are culpable in propagating this epidemic, and not just in their obvious role as opioid suppliers. To be certain, opioid overprescribing is a tremendous problem; in 2014, more than 240 million prescriptions for opioids were issued, enough for every American adult to have his or her own bottle of pills.4

However, there is plenty of blame to go around in the medical system for the problems of overprescribing and inappropriate opioid use. Among other factors, medical schools have historically failed to teach young physicians how to treat pain or prescribe opioids safely,5 and pain specialists are often inaccessible to primary care providers.6 Additionally, pharmaceutical companies have been found guilty of marketing opioids to prescribers in misleading ways,7 and well-intentioned but misguided campaigns such as the “pain as a fifth vital sign” movement may have inadvertently contributed to opioid overprescribing as well.8

TACKLING THE CHALLENGE

Prescribers need to tackle these challenges by educating themselves about when and how to prescribe opioids for chronic pain. Breaking the cycle of overprescribing can be achieved by learning to prescribe opioids rationally, cautiously, and as part of a comprehensive multimodal pain management plan with a commitment to risk assessment and harm reduction. It also means having an exit strategy at the start of opioid therapy. This must include recognizing problematic opioid use when it occurs and having options to offer patients when opioid use disorder becomes the primary problem.

Recognizing the problem

Physicians are notoriously poor at predicting and detecting the presence of aberrant drug use behaviors and opioid use disorder. For example, in a study of patients clinicians thought were not at risk for misuse of medications, 60% had urine drug tests showing either the presence of illicit drugs or no evidence of the prescribed drug.9

The prevalence of problematic opioid use in patients on chronic opioid therapy for pain has been variably reported in the literature, but one systematic review found that misuse rates ranged from 21% to 29% (95% confidence interval 13%–38%) and addiction rates averaged 8% to 12% (3%–17%).10 These numbers are alarming, and prescribers need to know how to screen for and diagnose opioid addiction when they see it.

Importantly, there is a wide spectrum of opioid misuse behaviors, and the wise prescriber will thoughtfully consider each circumstance before assuming a patient has a substance use disorder. For example, one patient may skip doses and “hoard” unused pills for fear that he or she will run out of medication during a pain flare, while another may use opioids for nonmedical reasons such as to get high. Both examples represent aberrant drug use, but in the first case patient education may sufficiently address the problem, while the second may herald a more dangerous and less correctable problem.

 

 

Responding with empathy

Simply recognizing that a problem exists is not enough. Once we identify problematic opioid use, we also need to know how to address it.

Managing opioid misuse behaviors requires empathy, and prescribers should consider a patient’s motivation and emotive response to counsel. For instance, the patient who skips doses and hoards pills may fear that their well-controlled pain will suddenly worsen if their doctor’s opioid prescribing becomes more restrictive as new guidelines are released.

The lesson is that safe opioid prescribing may require a more restrictive approach than was understood in prior years, but rational prescribing also means careful consideration before arbitrarily tapering or discontinuing opioids in a patient who has demonstrated benefit without evidence of harm, even if new guidelines now recommend against starting opioid therapy for similar pain syndromes. For example, the American College of Physicians released a guideline earlier this year that recommended against opioids to treat low back pain, but it did not recommend stopping opioids if patients were already taking them and benefiting from their use.11

Sometimes the best course of action is to discontinue opioid therapy. This decision may trigger a grief-like reaction in some patients and there can be distinct communication challenges during each coping phase.12 The prescriber should frame opioid prescribing discussions on the changing balance of perceived benefits, risks, and harms; in some cases, the treatment may have “failed” or no longer be appropriate, but the patient may still be suffering from pain. Further, the patient may now need help with a newly recognized substance use disorder and may be particularly vulnerable during this time.

The wrong approach, in my opinion, is to discharge the patient from care because of addiction. This approach may seem justified to the provider who feels betrayed by a patient who has used a prescription differently than intended and has thus placed everyone at risk. However, providers should not take it personally; by definition, a patient with addiction has lost control over use of a drug and may have a stronger relationship with the drug than with you. Instead, we should attempt to intervene to protect a patient’s health and chances of survival. It is critical that physicians learn to leverage treatment resources to provide the support patients need to start the long process of recovery. This may involve detoxification and rehabilitation programs, but in many cases opioid agonist therapy also has a role.

Medication-assisted therapy

Medication-assisted therapy with methadone or buprenorphine can be an extremely important part of this process and is a strategy that Modesto-Lowe et al explore in this issue of the Journal.13 As they point out, patients and providers often misunderstand the use of opioid agonists to treat opioid use disorder; many perceive this as merely substituting one form of addiction for another. However, compelling data support this approach. Studies have shown that opioid agonist therapy is associated with decreased illicit opioid use, better retention in substance use treatment programs, reduced hepatitis C and HIV seroconversion, reduced rates of criminal activity and incarceration, decreased overdose risk, and improved survival.14

Opioid agonists are not a cure-all and come with their own challenges, but for many patients they can “create the space” needed to do the real work of recovery—healing their damaged relationships with themselves, their family, and their society.

Providers need to educate themselves regarding the options available and when and how to use them. They should familiarize themselves with methadone and buprenorphine treatment programs in their community. Better yet, with only 8 hours of additional training, primary care physicians can become waivered to prescribe buprenorphine to treat opioid addiction right in the office. Treating addiction is quickly becoming part of primary care, and clinicians in practice can no longer turn a blind eye toward this problem.

References
  1. Miniño AM, Murphy SL, Xu J, Kochanek KD. Deaths: final data for 2008. Natl Vital Stat Rep 2011; 59:1–126.
  2. Rudd RA, Aleshire N, Zibbell JE, Gladden RM. Increases in drug and opioid overdose deaths—United States, 2000–2014. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2016; 64(50–51):1378–1382.
  3. Hser YI, Evans E, Grella C, Ling W, Anglin D. Long-term course of opioid addiction. Harv Rev Psychiatry 2015; 23:76–89.
  4. The opioid epidemic: by the numbers. Department of Health and Human Services; 2016 [updated June 2016.] www.hhs.gov/sites/default/files/Factsheet-opioids-061516.pdf. Accessed April 18, 2017.
  5. Roehr B. US needs new strategy to help 116 million patients in chronic pain. BMJ 2011; 343:d4206.
  6. Breuer B, Pappagallo M, Tai JY, Portenoy RK. U.S. board-certified pain physician practices: uniformity and census data of their locations. J Pain 2007; 8:244–250.
  7. Morreale M. Why is the pendulum swinging? The opiate epidemic in the USA. Acad Psychiatry 2016; 40:839–840.
  8. Hirsch R. The opioid epidemic: It’s time to place blame where it belongs. KevinMD.com. April 6, 2016. http://www.kevinmd.com/blog/2016/04/the-opioid-epidemic-its-time-to-place-blame-where-it-belongs.html. Accessed April 8, 2017.
  9. Bronstein K, Passik S, Munitz L, Leider H. Can clinicians accurately predict which patients are misusing their medications? J Pain 2011; 12(suppl):P3. Abstract 111.
  10. Vowles KE, McEntee ML, Julnes PS, Frohe T, Ney JP, van der Goes DN. Rates of opioid misuse, abuse, and addiction in chronic pain: a systematic review and data synthesis. Pain 2015; 156:569–576.
  11. Qaseem A, Wilt T, McClean R, Forciea MA. Noninvasive treatments for acute, subacute, and chronic low back pain: a clinical practice guideline from the American College of Physicians. Ann Intern Med 2017; 166:514–530.
  12. Tobin D, Andrews R, Becker W. Prescribing opioids in primary care: safely starting, monitoring, and stopping. Cleve Clin J Med 2016; 83:207–215.
  13. Modesto-Lowe V, Sweizbin B, Cheplin M, Hoefer G. Use and misuse of opioid agonists in opioid addiction. Cleve Clin J Med 2017; 84:377–384.
  14. Nielsen S, Larance B, Degenhardt L, Gowing L, Kehler C, Lintzeris N. Opioid agonist treatment for pharmaceutical opioid dependent people. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2016(5):CD011117.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Daniel G. Tobin, MD, FACP
Assistant Professor, Department of Internal Medicine, Yale University School of Medicine, Yale-New Haven Hospital, Saint Raphael Campus, New Haven, CT

Address: Daniel G. Tobin, MD, FACP, Yale-New Haven Hospital, Saint Raphael Campus, 1450 Chapel Street, Private 308, New Haven, CT 06511; daniel.tobin@yale.edu

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
385-387
Legacy Keywords
opioids, addiction, opioid use disorder, methadone, buprenorphine, Daniel Tobin
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Daniel G. Tobin, MD, FACP
Assistant Professor, Department of Internal Medicine, Yale University School of Medicine, Yale-New Haven Hospital, Saint Raphael Campus, New Haven, CT

Address: Daniel G. Tobin, MD, FACP, Yale-New Haven Hospital, Saint Raphael Campus, 1450 Chapel Street, Private 308, New Haven, CT 06511; daniel.tobin@yale.edu

Author and Disclosure Information

Daniel G. Tobin, MD, FACP
Assistant Professor, Department of Internal Medicine, Yale University School of Medicine, Yale-New Haven Hospital, Saint Raphael Campus, New Haven, CT

Address: Daniel G. Tobin, MD, FACP, Yale-New Haven Hospital, Saint Raphael Campus, 1450 Chapel Street, Private 308, New Haven, CT 06511; daniel.tobin@yale.edu

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

As a medical student, I understood that dealing with death was part of the practice of medicine. I was prepared to help my patients face the end of life from disease and old age and had steeled myself against the inevitable losses I would see from trauma and infection. However, I had no sense of the incredible burden that opioid addiction and death from unintentional overdose would one day cause.

See related article

MORE DEATHS FROM OVERDOSE THAN FROM MOTOR VEHICLE ACCIDENTS

To highlight the point, unintentional overdose deaths in 2008 exceeded motor vehicle accidents as the leading cause of accidental death in the United States.1 Since then, the problem has only worsened; by 2014 the US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention reported that 78 Americans were dying each day from unintentional opioid overdose.2

Yet the scourge of deaths from opioid overdose is only the most obvious way that opioid use disorder destroys the lives of patients suffering from addiction, as well as their friends and family. Among many other heartaches, opioid use disorder is associated with severely impaired social function, increased rates of hepatitis C and human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) infection, and serious legal consequences and incarceration.3 Sadly, opioid use disorder has torn apart countless families. Addiction may be a brain disease, but its scope of morbidity extends far beyond the individual with the affliction.

PLENTY OF BLAME TO GO AROUND

To some extent, physicians are culpable in propagating this epidemic, and not just in their obvious role as opioid suppliers. To be certain, opioid overprescribing is a tremendous problem; in 2014, more than 240 million prescriptions for opioids were issued, enough for every American adult to have his or her own bottle of pills.4

However, there is plenty of blame to go around in the medical system for the problems of overprescribing and inappropriate opioid use. Among other factors, medical schools have historically failed to teach young physicians how to treat pain or prescribe opioids safely,5 and pain specialists are often inaccessible to primary care providers.6 Additionally, pharmaceutical companies have been found guilty of marketing opioids to prescribers in misleading ways,7 and well-intentioned but misguided campaigns such as the “pain as a fifth vital sign” movement may have inadvertently contributed to opioid overprescribing as well.8

TACKLING THE CHALLENGE

Prescribers need to tackle these challenges by educating themselves about when and how to prescribe opioids for chronic pain. Breaking the cycle of overprescribing can be achieved by learning to prescribe opioids rationally, cautiously, and as part of a comprehensive multimodal pain management plan with a commitment to risk assessment and harm reduction. It also means having an exit strategy at the start of opioid therapy. This must include recognizing problematic opioid use when it occurs and having options to offer patients when opioid use disorder becomes the primary problem.

Recognizing the problem

Physicians are notoriously poor at predicting and detecting the presence of aberrant drug use behaviors and opioid use disorder. For example, in a study of patients clinicians thought were not at risk for misuse of medications, 60% had urine drug tests showing either the presence of illicit drugs or no evidence of the prescribed drug.9

The prevalence of problematic opioid use in patients on chronic opioid therapy for pain has been variably reported in the literature, but one systematic review found that misuse rates ranged from 21% to 29% (95% confidence interval 13%–38%) and addiction rates averaged 8% to 12% (3%–17%).10 These numbers are alarming, and prescribers need to know how to screen for and diagnose opioid addiction when they see it.

Importantly, there is a wide spectrum of opioid misuse behaviors, and the wise prescriber will thoughtfully consider each circumstance before assuming a patient has a substance use disorder. For example, one patient may skip doses and “hoard” unused pills for fear that he or she will run out of medication during a pain flare, while another may use opioids for nonmedical reasons such as to get high. Both examples represent aberrant drug use, but in the first case patient education may sufficiently address the problem, while the second may herald a more dangerous and less correctable problem.

 

 

Responding with empathy

Simply recognizing that a problem exists is not enough. Once we identify problematic opioid use, we also need to know how to address it.

Managing opioid misuse behaviors requires empathy, and prescribers should consider a patient’s motivation and emotive response to counsel. For instance, the patient who skips doses and hoards pills may fear that their well-controlled pain will suddenly worsen if their doctor’s opioid prescribing becomes more restrictive as new guidelines are released.

The lesson is that safe opioid prescribing may require a more restrictive approach than was understood in prior years, but rational prescribing also means careful consideration before arbitrarily tapering or discontinuing opioids in a patient who has demonstrated benefit without evidence of harm, even if new guidelines now recommend against starting opioid therapy for similar pain syndromes. For example, the American College of Physicians released a guideline earlier this year that recommended against opioids to treat low back pain, but it did not recommend stopping opioids if patients were already taking them and benefiting from their use.11

Sometimes the best course of action is to discontinue opioid therapy. This decision may trigger a grief-like reaction in some patients and there can be distinct communication challenges during each coping phase.12 The prescriber should frame opioid prescribing discussions on the changing balance of perceived benefits, risks, and harms; in some cases, the treatment may have “failed” or no longer be appropriate, but the patient may still be suffering from pain. Further, the patient may now need help with a newly recognized substance use disorder and may be particularly vulnerable during this time.

The wrong approach, in my opinion, is to discharge the patient from care because of addiction. This approach may seem justified to the provider who feels betrayed by a patient who has used a prescription differently than intended and has thus placed everyone at risk. However, providers should not take it personally; by definition, a patient with addiction has lost control over use of a drug and may have a stronger relationship with the drug than with you. Instead, we should attempt to intervene to protect a patient’s health and chances of survival. It is critical that physicians learn to leverage treatment resources to provide the support patients need to start the long process of recovery. This may involve detoxification and rehabilitation programs, but in many cases opioid agonist therapy also has a role.

Medication-assisted therapy

Medication-assisted therapy with methadone or buprenorphine can be an extremely important part of this process and is a strategy that Modesto-Lowe et al explore in this issue of the Journal.13 As they point out, patients and providers often misunderstand the use of opioid agonists to treat opioid use disorder; many perceive this as merely substituting one form of addiction for another. However, compelling data support this approach. Studies have shown that opioid agonist therapy is associated with decreased illicit opioid use, better retention in substance use treatment programs, reduced hepatitis C and HIV seroconversion, reduced rates of criminal activity and incarceration, decreased overdose risk, and improved survival.14

Opioid agonists are not a cure-all and come with their own challenges, but for many patients they can “create the space” needed to do the real work of recovery—healing their damaged relationships with themselves, their family, and their society.

Providers need to educate themselves regarding the options available and when and how to use them. They should familiarize themselves with methadone and buprenorphine treatment programs in their community. Better yet, with only 8 hours of additional training, primary care physicians can become waivered to prescribe buprenorphine to treat opioid addiction right in the office. Treating addiction is quickly becoming part of primary care, and clinicians in practice can no longer turn a blind eye toward this problem.

As a medical student, I understood that dealing with death was part of the practice of medicine. I was prepared to help my patients face the end of life from disease and old age and had steeled myself against the inevitable losses I would see from trauma and infection. However, I had no sense of the incredible burden that opioid addiction and death from unintentional overdose would one day cause.

See related article

MORE DEATHS FROM OVERDOSE THAN FROM MOTOR VEHICLE ACCIDENTS

To highlight the point, unintentional overdose deaths in 2008 exceeded motor vehicle accidents as the leading cause of accidental death in the United States.1 Since then, the problem has only worsened; by 2014 the US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention reported that 78 Americans were dying each day from unintentional opioid overdose.2

Yet the scourge of deaths from opioid overdose is only the most obvious way that opioid use disorder destroys the lives of patients suffering from addiction, as well as their friends and family. Among many other heartaches, opioid use disorder is associated with severely impaired social function, increased rates of hepatitis C and human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) infection, and serious legal consequences and incarceration.3 Sadly, opioid use disorder has torn apart countless families. Addiction may be a brain disease, but its scope of morbidity extends far beyond the individual with the affliction.

PLENTY OF BLAME TO GO AROUND

To some extent, physicians are culpable in propagating this epidemic, and not just in their obvious role as opioid suppliers. To be certain, opioid overprescribing is a tremendous problem; in 2014, more than 240 million prescriptions for opioids were issued, enough for every American adult to have his or her own bottle of pills.4

However, there is plenty of blame to go around in the medical system for the problems of overprescribing and inappropriate opioid use. Among other factors, medical schools have historically failed to teach young physicians how to treat pain or prescribe opioids safely,5 and pain specialists are often inaccessible to primary care providers.6 Additionally, pharmaceutical companies have been found guilty of marketing opioids to prescribers in misleading ways,7 and well-intentioned but misguided campaigns such as the “pain as a fifth vital sign” movement may have inadvertently contributed to opioid overprescribing as well.8

TACKLING THE CHALLENGE

Prescribers need to tackle these challenges by educating themselves about when and how to prescribe opioids for chronic pain. Breaking the cycle of overprescribing can be achieved by learning to prescribe opioids rationally, cautiously, and as part of a comprehensive multimodal pain management plan with a commitment to risk assessment and harm reduction. It also means having an exit strategy at the start of opioid therapy. This must include recognizing problematic opioid use when it occurs and having options to offer patients when opioid use disorder becomes the primary problem.

Recognizing the problem

Physicians are notoriously poor at predicting and detecting the presence of aberrant drug use behaviors and opioid use disorder. For example, in a study of patients clinicians thought were not at risk for misuse of medications, 60% had urine drug tests showing either the presence of illicit drugs or no evidence of the prescribed drug.9

The prevalence of problematic opioid use in patients on chronic opioid therapy for pain has been variably reported in the literature, but one systematic review found that misuse rates ranged from 21% to 29% (95% confidence interval 13%–38%) and addiction rates averaged 8% to 12% (3%–17%).10 These numbers are alarming, and prescribers need to know how to screen for and diagnose opioid addiction when they see it.

Importantly, there is a wide spectrum of opioid misuse behaviors, and the wise prescriber will thoughtfully consider each circumstance before assuming a patient has a substance use disorder. For example, one patient may skip doses and “hoard” unused pills for fear that he or she will run out of medication during a pain flare, while another may use opioids for nonmedical reasons such as to get high. Both examples represent aberrant drug use, but in the first case patient education may sufficiently address the problem, while the second may herald a more dangerous and less correctable problem.

 

 

Responding with empathy

Simply recognizing that a problem exists is not enough. Once we identify problematic opioid use, we also need to know how to address it.

Managing opioid misuse behaviors requires empathy, and prescribers should consider a patient’s motivation and emotive response to counsel. For instance, the patient who skips doses and hoards pills may fear that their well-controlled pain will suddenly worsen if their doctor’s opioid prescribing becomes more restrictive as new guidelines are released.

The lesson is that safe opioid prescribing may require a more restrictive approach than was understood in prior years, but rational prescribing also means careful consideration before arbitrarily tapering or discontinuing opioids in a patient who has demonstrated benefit without evidence of harm, even if new guidelines now recommend against starting opioid therapy for similar pain syndromes. For example, the American College of Physicians released a guideline earlier this year that recommended against opioids to treat low back pain, but it did not recommend stopping opioids if patients were already taking them and benefiting from their use.11

Sometimes the best course of action is to discontinue opioid therapy. This decision may trigger a grief-like reaction in some patients and there can be distinct communication challenges during each coping phase.12 The prescriber should frame opioid prescribing discussions on the changing balance of perceived benefits, risks, and harms; in some cases, the treatment may have “failed” or no longer be appropriate, but the patient may still be suffering from pain. Further, the patient may now need help with a newly recognized substance use disorder and may be particularly vulnerable during this time.

The wrong approach, in my opinion, is to discharge the patient from care because of addiction. This approach may seem justified to the provider who feels betrayed by a patient who has used a prescription differently than intended and has thus placed everyone at risk. However, providers should not take it personally; by definition, a patient with addiction has lost control over use of a drug and may have a stronger relationship with the drug than with you. Instead, we should attempt to intervene to protect a patient’s health and chances of survival. It is critical that physicians learn to leverage treatment resources to provide the support patients need to start the long process of recovery. This may involve detoxification and rehabilitation programs, but in many cases opioid agonist therapy also has a role.

Medication-assisted therapy

Medication-assisted therapy with methadone or buprenorphine can be an extremely important part of this process and is a strategy that Modesto-Lowe et al explore in this issue of the Journal.13 As they point out, patients and providers often misunderstand the use of opioid agonists to treat opioid use disorder; many perceive this as merely substituting one form of addiction for another. However, compelling data support this approach. Studies have shown that opioid agonist therapy is associated with decreased illicit opioid use, better retention in substance use treatment programs, reduced hepatitis C and HIV seroconversion, reduced rates of criminal activity and incarceration, decreased overdose risk, and improved survival.14

Opioid agonists are not a cure-all and come with their own challenges, but for many patients they can “create the space” needed to do the real work of recovery—healing their damaged relationships with themselves, their family, and their society.

Providers need to educate themselves regarding the options available and when and how to use them. They should familiarize themselves with methadone and buprenorphine treatment programs in their community. Better yet, with only 8 hours of additional training, primary care physicians can become waivered to prescribe buprenorphine to treat opioid addiction right in the office. Treating addiction is quickly becoming part of primary care, and clinicians in practice can no longer turn a blind eye toward this problem.

References
  1. Miniño AM, Murphy SL, Xu J, Kochanek KD. Deaths: final data for 2008. Natl Vital Stat Rep 2011; 59:1–126.
  2. Rudd RA, Aleshire N, Zibbell JE, Gladden RM. Increases in drug and opioid overdose deaths—United States, 2000–2014. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2016; 64(50–51):1378–1382.
  3. Hser YI, Evans E, Grella C, Ling W, Anglin D. Long-term course of opioid addiction. Harv Rev Psychiatry 2015; 23:76–89.
  4. The opioid epidemic: by the numbers. Department of Health and Human Services; 2016 [updated June 2016.] www.hhs.gov/sites/default/files/Factsheet-opioids-061516.pdf. Accessed April 18, 2017.
  5. Roehr B. US needs new strategy to help 116 million patients in chronic pain. BMJ 2011; 343:d4206.
  6. Breuer B, Pappagallo M, Tai JY, Portenoy RK. U.S. board-certified pain physician practices: uniformity and census data of their locations. J Pain 2007; 8:244–250.
  7. Morreale M. Why is the pendulum swinging? The opiate epidemic in the USA. Acad Psychiatry 2016; 40:839–840.
  8. Hirsch R. The opioid epidemic: It’s time to place blame where it belongs. KevinMD.com. April 6, 2016. http://www.kevinmd.com/blog/2016/04/the-opioid-epidemic-its-time-to-place-blame-where-it-belongs.html. Accessed April 8, 2017.
  9. Bronstein K, Passik S, Munitz L, Leider H. Can clinicians accurately predict which patients are misusing their medications? J Pain 2011; 12(suppl):P3. Abstract 111.
  10. Vowles KE, McEntee ML, Julnes PS, Frohe T, Ney JP, van der Goes DN. Rates of opioid misuse, abuse, and addiction in chronic pain: a systematic review and data synthesis. Pain 2015; 156:569–576.
  11. Qaseem A, Wilt T, McClean R, Forciea MA. Noninvasive treatments for acute, subacute, and chronic low back pain: a clinical practice guideline from the American College of Physicians. Ann Intern Med 2017; 166:514–530.
  12. Tobin D, Andrews R, Becker W. Prescribing opioids in primary care: safely starting, monitoring, and stopping. Cleve Clin J Med 2016; 83:207–215.
  13. Modesto-Lowe V, Sweizbin B, Cheplin M, Hoefer G. Use and misuse of opioid agonists in opioid addiction. Cleve Clin J Med 2017; 84:377–384.
  14. Nielsen S, Larance B, Degenhardt L, Gowing L, Kehler C, Lintzeris N. Opioid agonist treatment for pharmaceutical opioid dependent people. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2016(5):CD011117.
References
  1. Miniño AM, Murphy SL, Xu J, Kochanek KD. Deaths: final data for 2008. Natl Vital Stat Rep 2011; 59:1–126.
  2. Rudd RA, Aleshire N, Zibbell JE, Gladden RM. Increases in drug and opioid overdose deaths—United States, 2000–2014. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2016; 64(50–51):1378–1382.
  3. Hser YI, Evans E, Grella C, Ling W, Anglin D. Long-term course of opioid addiction. Harv Rev Psychiatry 2015; 23:76–89.
  4. The opioid epidemic: by the numbers. Department of Health and Human Services; 2016 [updated June 2016.] www.hhs.gov/sites/default/files/Factsheet-opioids-061516.pdf. Accessed April 18, 2017.
  5. Roehr B. US needs new strategy to help 116 million patients in chronic pain. BMJ 2011; 343:d4206.
  6. Breuer B, Pappagallo M, Tai JY, Portenoy RK. U.S. board-certified pain physician practices: uniformity and census data of their locations. J Pain 2007; 8:244–250.
  7. Morreale M. Why is the pendulum swinging? The opiate epidemic in the USA. Acad Psychiatry 2016; 40:839–840.
  8. Hirsch R. The opioid epidemic: It’s time to place blame where it belongs. KevinMD.com. April 6, 2016. http://www.kevinmd.com/blog/2016/04/the-opioid-epidemic-its-time-to-place-blame-where-it-belongs.html. Accessed April 8, 2017.
  9. Bronstein K, Passik S, Munitz L, Leider H. Can clinicians accurately predict which patients are misusing their medications? J Pain 2011; 12(suppl):P3. Abstract 111.
  10. Vowles KE, McEntee ML, Julnes PS, Frohe T, Ney JP, van der Goes DN. Rates of opioid misuse, abuse, and addiction in chronic pain: a systematic review and data synthesis. Pain 2015; 156:569–576.
  11. Qaseem A, Wilt T, McClean R, Forciea MA. Noninvasive treatments for acute, subacute, and chronic low back pain: a clinical practice guideline from the American College of Physicians. Ann Intern Med 2017; 166:514–530.
  12. Tobin D, Andrews R, Becker W. Prescribing opioids in primary care: safely starting, monitoring, and stopping. Cleve Clin J Med 2016; 83:207–215.
  13. Modesto-Lowe V, Sweizbin B, Cheplin M, Hoefer G. Use and misuse of opioid agonists in opioid addiction. Cleve Clin J Med 2017; 84:377–384.
  14. Nielsen S, Larance B, Degenhardt L, Gowing L, Kehler C, Lintzeris N. Opioid agonist treatment for pharmaceutical opioid dependent people. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2016(5):CD011117.
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Page Number
385-387
Page Number
385-387
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
A rational approach to opioid use disorder in primary care
Display Headline
A rational approach to opioid use disorder in primary care
Legacy Keywords
opioids, addiction, opioid use disorder, methadone, buprenorphine, Daniel Tobin
Legacy Keywords
opioids, addiction, opioid use disorder, methadone, buprenorphine, Daniel Tobin
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Article PDF Media

A broken pacemaker lead in a 69-year-old woman

Article Type
Changed
Display Headline
A broken pacemaker lead in a 69-year-old woman

A 69-year-old woman presented with fatigue, cough, and lightheadedness. She had a history of atrial fibrillation and complete heart block, for which she had a pacemaker (dual-pacing, dual-sensing, dual-response, and rate-adaptive mode) inserted in 2005. Her heart rate was 30 beats per minute.

Figure 1. Posterior-anterior chest radiograph showed discontinuity of a lead wire, consistent with complete lead fracture.

A chest radiograph showed a fractured right ventricular pacemaker lead (Figure 1). Electrocardiography showed sinus rhythm with a high-grade atrioventricular block (Figure 2). Pacemaker interrogation confirmed the diagnosis of lead fracture. A new lead was placed, and the old lead was abandoned.

HOW LEADS BREAK

Figure 2. The patient’s electrocardiogram showed sinus rhythm, high-grade atrioventricular block, reflected by the atrioventricular dissociation with intermittent conduction (asterisk), and pacemaker spikes (arrows) with loss of capture, reflected by the absence of QRS waves following the pacemaker spikes.

The rate of lead fracture ranges from 0.1% to 4.2% per patient-year, and the annual failure rate increases progressively with time after implantation.1,2

Extrinsic pressure on the lead can eventually break it. This can happen between the first rib and clavicle, in “subclavian crush” injury, or with any anatomical abnormality that narrows the thoracic outlet. Typically, classic subclavian crush results from entrapment of the pacemaker leads by the subclavius muscle or the costoclavicular ligament as the lead follows the needle course of the antecedent access puncture of the subclavian vein. This results in intermittent flexing of the lead and potential lead fracture3 and was likely the cause of lead fracture in our patient.

The risk of fracture is higher in patients under the age of 50, those who perform intense physical activity, women, and patients with greater left ventricular ejection fraction.4,5 Certain leads are prone to fracture due to design flaws. One of these was the Medtronic Sprint Fidelis cardioverter defibrillator lead, which was recalled in 2007.5

DETECTING LEAD FRACTURE

Symptoms of lead fracture vary, depending on the patient’s pacemaker-dependency and on the degree of loss of capture (ie, the degree to which the heart fails to respond to the pacemaker’s signals), and may include lightheadedness, syncope, and extracardiac stimulation.

The electrical integrity of a lead can be tested by measuring the circuit impedance, which normally ranges from 300 to 1,000 ohms.6 An insulation failure results in very low impedance, while a disrupted circuit due to lead fracture commonly causes a sudden rather than gradual increase in impedance.6

Simple imaging studies such as chest radiography or fluoroscopy may establish the diagnosis of lead fracture. One should carefully trace every lead along its entire course and look for any conductor discontinuity, kinks, or sharp bends.6

REMOVE THE OLD LEAD, OR LEAVE IT IN PLACE?

The treatment for lead fracture is usually to put in a new lead, with or without extracting the old one.

In view of the potential complications of lead removal such as cardiac perforation or vascular tear, lead abandonment with placement of a new lead may be performed.7 There are no controlled clinical studies comparing lead abandonment vs lead extraction.8 However, extraction is currently recommended only in patients in whom the old lead causes life-threatening arrhythmias, interferes with the operation of implanted cardiac devices, interferes with radiation therapy or needed surgery, or, due to its design or failure, poses an immediate threat to the patient if left in place.7 Lead removal is reasonable in patients who require specific imaging studies such as magnetic resonance imaging with no available imaging alternative for the diagnosis.7

In our patient, a new lead was placed without removing the fractured lead, with no complications. Afterward, the patient’s heart rhythm was observed to be appropriately paced, and she was discharged home the following day.

References
  1. Alt E, Völker R, Blömer H. Lead fracture in pacemaker patients. Thorac Cardiovasc Surg 1987; 35:101–104.
  2. Kleemann T, Becker T, Doenges K, et al. Annual rate of transvenous defibrillation lead defects in implantable cardioverter-defibrillators over a period of > 10 years. Circulation 2007; 115:2474–2480.
  3. Magney JE, Flynn DM, Parsons JA, et al. Anatomical mechanisms explaining damage to pacemaker leads, defibrillator leads, and failure of central venous catheters adjacent to the sternoclavicular joint. Pacing Clin Electrophysiol 1993; 16:445–457.
  4. Farwell D, Green MS, Lemery R, Gollob MH, Birnie DH. Accelerating risk of Fidelis lead fracture. Heart Rhythm 2008; 5:1375–1379.
  5. Morrison TB, Rea RF, Hodge DO, et al. Risk factors for implantable defibrillator lead fracture in a recalled and a nonrecalled lead. J Cardiovasc Electrophysiol 2010; 21:671–677.
  6. Swerdlow CD, Ellenbogen KA. Implantable cardioverter-defibrillator leads: design, diagnostics, and management. Circulation 2013; 128:2062–2071.
  7. Wilkoff BL, Love CJ, Byrd CL, et al; Heart Rhythm Society; American Heart Association. Transvenous lead extraction: Heart Rhythm Society expert consensus on facilities, training, indications, and patient management: this document was endorsed by the American Heart Association (AHA). Heart Rhythm 2009; 6:1085–1104.
  8. Maytin M, Epstein LM, Henrikson CA. Lead extraction is preferred for lead revisions and system upgrades: when less is more. Circ Arrhythm Electrophysiol 2010; 3:413–424.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Belal Kaseer, MD
Dnipropetrovsk Medical Academy, Dnipropetrovsk, Ukraine

Mhd Yassin Al Mouslmani, MD
Lincoln Medical and Mental Health Center, New York, NY

David S. Hirsh, MD
Assistant Professor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA

Muhammad Hammadah, MD
Department of Medicine, Division of Cardiology, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA

Address: Muhammad Hammadah, MD, Department of Cardiology, Emory University School of Medicine, 1462 Clifton Road NE, Suite 507, Atlanta, GA 30322; mhamma2@emory.edu

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
346-347
Legacy Keywords
pacemaker, leads, cardiac implantable electronic device, CIED, broken lead, Belal Kaseer, Mhd Yassin Al Mouslmani, David Hirsh, Muhammad Hammadah
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Belal Kaseer, MD
Dnipropetrovsk Medical Academy, Dnipropetrovsk, Ukraine

Mhd Yassin Al Mouslmani, MD
Lincoln Medical and Mental Health Center, New York, NY

David S. Hirsh, MD
Assistant Professor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA

Muhammad Hammadah, MD
Department of Medicine, Division of Cardiology, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA

Address: Muhammad Hammadah, MD, Department of Cardiology, Emory University School of Medicine, 1462 Clifton Road NE, Suite 507, Atlanta, GA 30322; mhamma2@emory.edu

Author and Disclosure Information

Belal Kaseer, MD
Dnipropetrovsk Medical Academy, Dnipropetrovsk, Ukraine

Mhd Yassin Al Mouslmani, MD
Lincoln Medical and Mental Health Center, New York, NY

David S. Hirsh, MD
Assistant Professor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA

Muhammad Hammadah, MD
Department of Medicine, Division of Cardiology, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA

Address: Muhammad Hammadah, MD, Department of Cardiology, Emory University School of Medicine, 1462 Clifton Road NE, Suite 507, Atlanta, GA 30322; mhamma2@emory.edu

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

A 69-year-old woman presented with fatigue, cough, and lightheadedness. She had a history of atrial fibrillation and complete heart block, for which she had a pacemaker (dual-pacing, dual-sensing, dual-response, and rate-adaptive mode) inserted in 2005. Her heart rate was 30 beats per minute.

Figure 1. Posterior-anterior chest radiograph showed discontinuity of a lead wire, consistent with complete lead fracture.

A chest radiograph showed a fractured right ventricular pacemaker lead (Figure 1). Electrocardiography showed sinus rhythm with a high-grade atrioventricular block (Figure 2). Pacemaker interrogation confirmed the diagnosis of lead fracture. A new lead was placed, and the old lead was abandoned.

HOW LEADS BREAK

Figure 2. The patient’s electrocardiogram showed sinus rhythm, high-grade atrioventricular block, reflected by the atrioventricular dissociation with intermittent conduction (asterisk), and pacemaker spikes (arrows) with loss of capture, reflected by the absence of QRS waves following the pacemaker spikes.

The rate of lead fracture ranges from 0.1% to 4.2% per patient-year, and the annual failure rate increases progressively with time after implantation.1,2

Extrinsic pressure on the lead can eventually break it. This can happen between the first rib and clavicle, in “subclavian crush” injury, or with any anatomical abnormality that narrows the thoracic outlet. Typically, classic subclavian crush results from entrapment of the pacemaker leads by the subclavius muscle or the costoclavicular ligament as the lead follows the needle course of the antecedent access puncture of the subclavian vein. This results in intermittent flexing of the lead and potential lead fracture3 and was likely the cause of lead fracture in our patient.

The risk of fracture is higher in patients under the age of 50, those who perform intense physical activity, women, and patients with greater left ventricular ejection fraction.4,5 Certain leads are prone to fracture due to design flaws. One of these was the Medtronic Sprint Fidelis cardioverter defibrillator lead, which was recalled in 2007.5

DETECTING LEAD FRACTURE

Symptoms of lead fracture vary, depending on the patient’s pacemaker-dependency and on the degree of loss of capture (ie, the degree to which the heart fails to respond to the pacemaker’s signals), and may include lightheadedness, syncope, and extracardiac stimulation.

The electrical integrity of a lead can be tested by measuring the circuit impedance, which normally ranges from 300 to 1,000 ohms.6 An insulation failure results in very low impedance, while a disrupted circuit due to lead fracture commonly causes a sudden rather than gradual increase in impedance.6

Simple imaging studies such as chest radiography or fluoroscopy may establish the diagnosis of lead fracture. One should carefully trace every lead along its entire course and look for any conductor discontinuity, kinks, or sharp bends.6

REMOVE THE OLD LEAD, OR LEAVE IT IN PLACE?

The treatment for lead fracture is usually to put in a new lead, with or without extracting the old one.

In view of the potential complications of lead removal such as cardiac perforation or vascular tear, lead abandonment with placement of a new lead may be performed.7 There are no controlled clinical studies comparing lead abandonment vs lead extraction.8 However, extraction is currently recommended only in patients in whom the old lead causes life-threatening arrhythmias, interferes with the operation of implanted cardiac devices, interferes with radiation therapy or needed surgery, or, due to its design or failure, poses an immediate threat to the patient if left in place.7 Lead removal is reasonable in patients who require specific imaging studies such as magnetic resonance imaging with no available imaging alternative for the diagnosis.7

In our patient, a new lead was placed without removing the fractured lead, with no complications. Afterward, the patient’s heart rhythm was observed to be appropriately paced, and she was discharged home the following day.

A 69-year-old woman presented with fatigue, cough, and lightheadedness. She had a history of atrial fibrillation and complete heart block, for which she had a pacemaker (dual-pacing, dual-sensing, dual-response, and rate-adaptive mode) inserted in 2005. Her heart rate was 30 beats per minute.

Figure 1. Posterior-anterior chest radiograph showed discontinuity of a lead wire, consistent with complete lead fracture.

A chest radiograph showed a fractured right ventricular pacemaker lead (Figure 1). Electrocardiography showed sinus rhythm with a high-grade atrioventricular block (Figure 2). Pacemaker interrogation confirmed the diagnosis of lead fracture. A new lead was placed, and the old lead was abandoned.

HOW LEADS BREAK

Figure 2. The patient’s electrocardiogram showed sinus rhythm, high-grade atrioventricular block, reflected by the atrioventricular dissociation with intermittent conduction (asterisk), and pacemaker spikes (arrows) with loss of capture, reflected by the absence of QRS waves following the pacemaker spikes.

The rate of lead fracture ranges from 0.1% to 4.2% per patient-year, and the annual failure rate increases progressively with time after implantation.1,2

Extrinsic pressure on the lead can eventually break it. This can happen between the first rib and clavicle, in “subclavian crush” injury, or with any anatomical abnormality that narrows the thoracic outlet. Typically, classic subclavian crush results from entrapment of the pacemaker leads by the subclavius muscle or the costoclavicular ligament as the lead follows the needle course of the antecedent access puncture of the subclavian vein. This results in intermittent flexing of the lead and potential lead fracture3 and was likely the cause of lead fracture in our patient.

The risk of fracture is higher in patients under the age of 50, those who perform intense physical activity, women, and patients with greater left ventricular ejection fraction.4,5 Certain leads are prone to fracture due to design flaws. One of these was the Medtronic Sprint Fidelis cardioverter defibrillator lead, which was recalled in 2007.5

DETECTING LEAD FRACTURE

Symptoms of lead fracture vary, depending on the patient’s pacemaker-dependency and on the degree of loss of capture (ie, the degree to which the heart fails to respond to the pacemaker’s signals), and may include lightheadedness, syncope, and extracardiac stimulation.

The electrical integrity of a lead can be tested by measuring the circuit impedance, which normally ranges from 300 to 1,000 ohms.6 An insulation failure results in very low impedance, while a disrupted circuit due to lead fracture commonly causes a sudden rather than gradual increase in impedance.6

Simple imaging studies such as chest radiography or fluoroscopy may establish the diagnosis of lead fracture. One should carefully trace every lead along its entire course and look for any conductor discontinuity, kinks, or sharp bends.6

REMOVE THE OLD LEAD, OR LEAVE IT IN PLACE?

The treatment for lead fracture is usually to put in a new lead, with or without extracting the old one.

In view of the potential complications of lead removal such as cardiac perforation or vascular tear, lead abandonment with placement of a new lead may be performed.7 There are no controlled clinical studies comparing lead abandonment vs lead extraction.8 However, extraction is currently recommended only in patients in whom the old lead causes life-threatening arrhythmias, interferes with the operation of implanted cardiac devices, interferes with radiation therapy or needed surgery, or, due to its design or failure, poses an immediate threat to the patient if left in place.7 Lead removal is reasonable in patients who require specific imaging studies such as magnetic resonance imaging with no available imaging alternative for the diagnosis.7

In our patient, a new lead was placed without removing the fractured lead, with no complications. Afterward, the patient’s heart rhythm was observed to be appropriately paced, and she was discharged home the following day.

References
  1. Alt E, Völker R, Blömer H. Lead fracture in pacemaker patients. Thorac Cardiovasc Surg 1987; 35:101–104.
  2. Kleemann T, Becker T, Doenges K, et al. Annual rate of transvenous defibrillation lead defects in implantable cardioverter-defibrillators over a period of > 10 years. Circulation 2007; 115:2474–2480.
  3. Magney JE, Flynn DM, Parsons JA, et al. Anatomical mechanisms explaining damage to pacemaker leads, defibrillator leads, and failure of central venous catheters adjacent to the sternoclavicular joint. Pacing Clin Electrophysiol 1993; 16:445–457.
  4. Farwell D, Green MS, Lemery R, Gollob MH, Birnie DH. Accelerating risk of Fidelis lead fracture. Heart Rhythm 2008; 5:1375–1379.
  5. Morrison TB, Rea RF, Hodge DO, et al. Risk factors for implantable defibrillator lead fracture in a recalled and a nonrecalled lead. J Cardiovasc Electrophysiol 2010; 21:671–677.
  6. Swerdlow CD, Ellenbogen KA. Implantable cardioverter-defibrillator leads: design, diagnostics, and management. Circulation 2013; 128:2062–2071.
  7. Wilkoff BL, Love CJ, Byrd CL, et al; Heart Rhythm Society; American Heart Association. Transvenous lead extraction: Heart Rhythm Society expert consensus on facilities, training, indications, and patient management: this document was endorsed by the American Heart Association (AHA). Heart Rhythm 2009; 6:1085–1104.
  8. Maytin M, Epstein LM, Henrikson CA. Lead extraction is preferred for lead revisions and system upgrades: when less is more. Circ Arrhythm Electrophysiol 2010; 3:413–424.
References
  1. Alt E, Völker R, Blömer H. Lead fracture in pacemaker patients. Thorac Cardiovasc Surg 1987; 35:101–104.
  2. Kleemann T, Becker T, Doenges K, et al. Annual rate of transvenous defibrillation lead defects in implantable cardioverter-defibrillators over a period of > 10 years. Circulation 2007; 115:2474–2480.
  3. Magney JE, Flynn DM, Parsons JA, et al. Anatomical mechanisms explaining damage to pacemaker leads, defibrillator leads, and failure of central venous catheters adjacent to the sternoclavicular joint. Pacing Clin Electrophysiol 1993; 16:445–457.
  4. Farwell D, Green MS, Lemery R, Gollob MH, Birnie DH. Accelerating risk of Fidelis lead fracture. Heart Rhythm 2008; 5:1375–1379.
  5. Morrison TB, Rea RF, Hodge DO, et al. Risk factors for implantable defibrillator lead fracture in a recalled and a nonrecalled lead. J Cardiovasc Electrophysiol 2010; 21:671–677.
  6. Swerdlow CD, Ellenbogen KA. Implantable cardioverter-defibrillator leads: design, diagnostics, and management. Circulation 2013; 128:2062–2071.
  7. Wilkoff BL, Love CJ, Byrd CL, et al; Heart Rhythm Society; American Heart Association. Transvenous lead extraction: Heart Rhythm Society expert consensus on facilities, training, indications, and patient management: this document was endorsed by the American Heart Association (AHA). Heart Rhythm 2009; 6:1085–1104.
  8. Maytin M, Epstein LM, Henrikson CA. Lead extraction is preferred for lead revisions and system upgrades: when less is more. Circ Arrhythm Electrophysiol 2010; 3:413–424.
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Page Number
346-347
Page Number
346-347
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
A broken pacemaker lead in a 69-year-old woman
Display Headline
A broken pacemaker lead in a 69-year-old woman
Legacy Keywords
pacemaker, leads, cardiac implantable electronic device, CIED, broken lead, Belal Kaseer, Mhd Yassin Al Mouslmani, David Hirsh, Muhammad Hammadah
Legacy Keywords
pacemaker, leads, cardiac implantable electronic device, CIED, broken lead, Belal Kaseer, Mhd Yassin Al Mouslmani, David Hirsh, Muhammad Hammadah
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Article PDF Media

Preventing herpes zoster through vaccination: New developments

Article Type
Changed
Display Headline
Preventing herpes zoster through vaccination: New developments

Herpes zoster (HZ), or shingles, represents a reactivation of the varicella-zoster virus (VZV). Following primary infection, usually in childhood, the virus typically lies dormant in the dorsal root and sensory nerve ganglia for decades. The precise mechanism of reactivation is not well understood, but it is associated with a decline in cell-mediated immunity that occurs with advancing age, immune-compromising conditions such as HIV infection and cancer, or immunosuppressive therapies, including corticosteroids.1 HZ is usually a self-limited disease characterized by unilateral dermatomal rash and pain, but can cause disseminated infection in immunocompromised individuals.2

Treatment with antiviral medications within 72 hours of rash onset can reduce acute HZ symptoms.1 However, antiviral agents are only minimally effective in preventing postherpetic neuralgia, the most common complication of HZ.3 Therefore, efforts to reduce the burden of HZ morbidity have focused on prevention through vaccination.

Currently, the only shingles vaccine approved by the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) is Zostavax (Merck), which contains the live-attenuated Oka strain of VZV at a concentration 14 times greater than that of the varicella vaccine (Varivax, Merck). The live-attenuated vaccine boosts VZV-specific cell-mediated immunity, preventing reactivation of the latent virus.

In this article, we describe the burden of disease and review recent developments in the literature on HZ vaccine, including duration of efficacy, uptake and barriers to vaccination, cost-effectiveness, and the outlook for future vaccines.

INCIDENCE INCREASES WITH AGE

The incidence of herpes zoster in the general population is between 3 and 5 per 1,000 person-years4 and increases with age, especially after age 60 when the incidence can approach 13 to 15 per 1,000 person-years.5,6 An estimated 1 million new cases occur each year in the United States, and about 6% of patients experience a second episode of HZ within 8 years.7,8 In immunocompromised patients, the incidence of HZ is 2 to 10 times higher than in the general population.9

The incidence of HZ has been increasing for reasons that are unclear. After varicella vaccine was introduced into the routine childhood immunization schedule in 1995, it was hypothesized that the resultant decrease in primary varicella infections would remove a natural source of immune boosting and cause an increase in HZ incidence for up to 20 years.10 However, recent studies demonstrate that the observed increase in HZ incidence actually predates the introduction of varicella vaccine,11–13 and the widespread use of varicella vaccine has not resulted in an increase in the incidence of HZ.14

Other potential explanations for the rise in reported incidence include increasing awareness among patients, who might previously not have sought care and among physicians, who may be more likely to make the diagnosis. Advertisement of new treatments for HZ, including gabapentin and capsaicin, probably began to increase awareness in the 1990s, as did promotion of the HZ vaccine after its licensure in 2006.

HZ can occur in people who have been vaccinated against varicella due to reactivation of the vaccine-strain virus, but the risk is lower than after infection with wild-type varicella.15 Given that the varicella vaccine has been routinely used in children for only 20 years, the long-term effect of varicella vaccination on the incidence of HZ in elderly people is unknown.

Serious complications

HZ can cause rare but serious complications including encephalitis, herpes ophthalmicus, herpes oticus, myelitis, and retinitis.1 These can lead to long-term disability including unilateral blindness and deafness.

The most common and debilitating complication is postherpetic neuralgia, a persistent pain lasting at least 3 months, with a mean duration of 3.3 years and sometimes as long as 10 years.16 Postherpetic neuralgia occurs in 8% to 32% of patients after acute HZ,4 and the incidence increases with age, being most common after age 70. The chronic pain of postherpetic neuralgia has a significant adverse impact on patients’ quality of life, including physical disability and emotional distress.17 Some pain is intense, and anecdotal reports of patients committing suicide were included in the Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices (ACIP) recommendations regarding herpes zoster vaccine.18

HZ and its complications also impose a substantial economic burden on society.19 In a population-based study, the mean direct medical costs of HZ ranged from $620 to $1,160 (2015 dollars) depending on age,20 and the mean costs of postherpetic neuralgia were 2 to 5 times higher than that.20–22 Immunocompromised patients had costs 2 to 3 times higher than those of immunocompetent adults.23 In addition, for employed patients, HZ resulted in an average loss of 32 hours of work due to absenteeism and 84 hours due to presenteeism (ie, working while sick and therefore suboptimally).24

Assuming there are 1 million cases of HZ each year, if 8% to 32% of patients go on to develop postherpetic neuralgia, that would translate into approximately $1 to $2 billion in direct medical costs. With 60% of adult patients working,25 at an average wage of $23.23 per hour,26 HZ illness could be responsible for another $1.6 billion in lost productivity.

EFFICACY AND SAFETY OF HZ VACCINE

In 2006, the FDA approved the live-attenuated Oka strain VZV vaccine for prevention of HZ and postherpetic neuralgia in adults age 60 and older based on findings from the Shingles Prevention Study (SPS).27

The Shingles Prevention Study

This multicenter randomized placebo-controlled trial27 enrolled 38,546 immunocompetent persons age 60 and older. Subjects in the intervention group received a single dose of live-attenuated vaccine, and all participants were followed for up to 4.9 years after vaccination.

HZ occurred in 315 (1.636%) of the 19,254 participants in the vaccine group and in 642 (3.336%) of the 19,247 participants in the placebo group, an absolute risk reduction of 1.7%, number needed to treat 59, relative risk reduction 51%, P < .001. Similarly, postherpetic neuralgia occurred in 27 (0.140%) of the 19,254 vaccine recipients and in 80 (0.416%) of the placebo recipients (an absolute risk reduction of 0.276%, number needed to treat 362, relative risk reduction 66%, P < .001). The investigators calculated that vaccination reduced the  overall burden of illness by 61% (Table 1).

The efficacy against HZ incidence decreased with age,28 but the efficacy against postherpetic neuralgia did not. In addition, vaccine recipients who developed HZ generally had less severe manifestations.

The safety of the vaccine was assessed for all participants in the SPS. In addition, one-sixth of SPS participants were enrolled in a safety substudy. These participants completed a detailed report card regarding all medically important events within the first 42 days. Forty-eight percent of the vaccine group and 17% of the placebo group (P < .05) experienced adverse events, primarily at the injection site. Less than 1% of all local reactions were severe.29 Serious adverse events were rare (< 2%), but occurred significantly more often in the vaccinated group.

Short-Term Persistence Substudy

Short-term efficacy of the live-attenuated vaccine (up to 7 years) was assessed in the Short-Term Persistence Substudy (STPS), which involved 14,270 of the initial participants and reported yearly and overall vaccine efficacy.30 After 5 years, the yearly efficacy against postherpetic neuralgia incidence declined to 32% and was no longer statistically significant. Efficacy against HZ incidence and burden of illness displayed the same pattern. After the end of the STPS, all subjects in the placebo group received vaccination.

Long-Term Persistence Substudy

Those in the intervention group were followed for an additional 4 years in the Long-Term Persistence Substudy (LTPS).31 Due to the lack of concurrent controls in the LTPS, the authors used regression models based on historical controls to estimate contemporary population incidence of HZ and postherpetic neuralgia  for comparison.

Efficacy continued to decline over time, and by 10 years after vaccination there was no difference between vaccinated patients and historical controls in the rate of any end point (ie, efficacy declined to zero).

A trial of booster vaccination

Because many patients are vaccinated at age 60, waning immunity could leave them vulnerable to HZ and postherpetic neuralgia by age 70. A potential solution would be to give a booster dose after 10 years.

A recent phase 3 clinical trial of adults age 70 years and older found that a booster dose of live-attenuated vaccine was as safe and immunogenic as an initial dose.32 While antibody responses were similar in the boosted group and the newly vaccinated group, cell-mediated immunity was higher in the boosted group.

Because prevention of HZ is generally via cell-mediated immunity, the booster might be more effective than the initial vaccination, but clinical trials measuring actual cases prevented will be required to prove it. A booster dose is not currently recommended.

A trial of vaccination in adults 50 to 59

In 2011, the FDA extended its approval of HZ vaccine for use in adults ages 50 to 59.33

In a randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial in this age group,33 the vaccine reduced HZ incidence by almost 70% (absolute risk reduction 0.614%, number needed to treat 156; Table 1), but the severity of HZ cases was not affected. There were too few cases of postherpetic neuralgia to assess the efficacy for this end point. The study followed patients for only 1.5 years after vaccination, so the duration of efficacy is unknown.

As in the older recipients, the vaccine was well tolerated; injection-site reactions and headache were the major adverse effects reported among vaccine recipients.33

INDICATIONS AND CONTRAINDICATIONS

Although HZ vaccine is licensed for use in adults age 50 and older, the ACIP recommends it only for immunocompetent adults age 60 and older. At this time, the ACIP does not recommend HZ vaccine in those younger than 60 because of the low risk of HZ in this age group.34

Any person age 60 or older should receive a single dose of the live-attenuated HZ vaccine subcutaneously, regardless of past history of HZ.

The vaccine is contraindicated in patients who have a history of allergic reaction to any vaccine component, immunosuppression or immunodeficiency conditions, and pregnancy. Specifically, people who will receive immunosuppressive therapies should have the vaccine at least 14 days before beginning treatment. Antiviral medications such as acyclovir, famciclovir, and valacyclovir should be discontinued at least 24 hours before vaccination and not resumed until 14 days later. Patients taking high-dose corticosteroids for more than 2 weeks should not be vaccinated until at least 1 month after therapy is completed.

In contrast, HZ vaccine is not contraindicated for leukemia patients who are in remission and who have not received chemotherapy or radiation for at least 3 months, or for patients receiving short-term, low-to-moderate dose, topical, intra-articular, bursal, or tendon injections of corticosteroids. Patients on low-dose methotrexate, azathioprine, or 6-mercaptopurine can also receive the vaccine.18

 

 

VACCINATION RATES ARE LOW

FIGURE 1. Rates of vaccination against herpes zoster in adults age 60 and older between 2007 and 2013.

Although the vaccine has been recommended since 2008, uptake has been slow. Figure 1 shows the rate of HZ vaccination in adults age 60 and older surveyed in the National Health Interview Survey from 2007 to 2013.35 Eight years after the vaccine was licensed, only 28% of eligible patients had been vaccinated. Assuming the current rate of increase remains constant, it will take 7 more years to reach a 60% coverage rate—the same as for pneumococcal vaccine36—and 18 years to reach universal coverage.

Barriers to vaccination

Several barriers to HZ vaccination might account for the slow uptake.

For the first few years the vaccine was available, the requirement to store it frozen presented an obstacle for some physicians.37 Physicians may also have been discouraged by the cumbersome Medicare reimbursement process because while the administration fee is covered through Medicare Part B, the live­-attenuated vaccine is reimbursed only through Medicare Part D, a benefit that varies by plans. Other barriers to physicians are supply shortages, high up-front costs, and uncertainties regarding the duration of vaccine protection, its safety, and side effects.38–40

Patient barriers include lack of physician recommendation, lack of familiarity with the vaccine, high out-of-pocket costs, the perception that they are at low risk for HZ, underestimation of the pain associated with HZ and postherpetic neuralgia, and fear of vaccine adverse effects.39,41,42

Interventions to increase vaccination rates

Certain interventions have been shown to increase vaccination adherence in general and HZ vaccination in particular. In randomized trials involving other vaccines, electronic medical record reminders supporting panel management or nurse-initiated protocols have been proven to increase vaccination rates, but these methods have not been tested for HZ vaccine specifically.43,44

In an observational study, Chaudhry et al found that the number of HZ vaccinations administered at the Mayo Clinic increased 43% in one practice and 54% in another after the implementation of an electronic alert.45 A randomized controlled trial showed that an informational package discussing HZ and the vaccine sent to patients via either their electronic personal health record or traditional mail increased HZ vaccination by almost 3 times.46

Pharmacists can also influence vaccination rates. States that provide full immunization privileges to pharmacists have vaccination rates significantly higher than states with restricted or no authorization.47

COST-EFFECTIVENESS CONSIDERATIONS

Unlike the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services, the ACIP does consider cost-effectiveness in their vaccine recommendations. Because of the morbidity associated with HZ and postherpetic neuralgia as well as the economic impact, vaccination is generally considered cost-effective for adults age 60 and older.48,49

Analyses have demonstrated that cost-effectiveness hinges on 4 factors: initial vaccine efficacy, the duration of efficacy, the age-specific incidence of HZ, and the cost of the vaccine.

For patients ages 50 to 59, the incidence of HZ is low, and because the duration of vaccine efficacy is short even though initial vaccine efficacy is high, vaccination in this age group offers poor value.50 At older ages, the incidence of HZ and postherpetic neuralgia rises, making vaccination more cost-effective. After age 60, the vaccine is cost-effective at all ages, although age 70 appears to offer the optimal trade-off between increasing incidence and declining vaccine efficacy.48,49

For patients who plan to be vaccinated only once, waiting until age 70 would appear to offer the best value.51 For those who are willing to receive a booster dose, the optimal age for vaccination is unknown, but will likely depend on the effectiveness, cost, and duration of the booster.

A NEW HZ VACCINE

In 2015, GlaxoSmithKline tested a new HZ vaccine containing a single VZV glycoprotein in an AS01B adjuvant system (HZ/su vaccine).52 In a phase 3 randomized trial involving 15,411 immunocompetent persons age 50  and older, a 2-dose schedule of HZ/su vaccine was 97% effective in preventing HZ (Table 1).53 Importantly, the vaccine was equally effective in older patients.

This vaccine also had a high rate of adverse reactions, with 17% of vaccine recipients vs 3% of placebo recipients reporting events that prevented normal everyday activities for at least 1 day. However, the rate of serious adverse reactions was the same in both groups (9%). The company announced that they intended to submit a regulatory application for HZ/su vaccine in the second half of 2016.54

Because of its high efficacy, HZ/su vaccine has the potential to change practice, but several issues must be resolved before it can supplant the current vaccine.

First, the AS01B adjuvant is not currently licensed in the United States, so it is unclear if the HZ/su vaccine can get FDA approval.52,55

Second, there are several questions about the efficacy of the vaccine, including long-term efficacy, efficacy in the elderly, and efficacy in the case of a patient receiving only 1 of the 2 required doses.

Third, the impact of HZ/su vaccine on complications such as postherpetic neuralgia has not been established. The clinical trial (NCT01165229) examining vaccine efficacy against postherpetic neuralgia incidence and other complications in adults age 70 and older has recently been completed and data should be available soon. Given the extremely high efficacy against HZ, it is likely that it will be close to 100% effective against this complication.

Fourth, there is uncertainty as to how the HZ/su vaccine should be used in patients who have already received the live-attenuated vaccine, if it is determined that a booster is necessary.

Finally, the vaccine is not yet priced. Given its superior effectiveness, particularly in older individuals, competitive pricing could dramatically affect the market. How Medicare or other insurers cover the new vaccine will likely influence its acceptance.

HZ VACCINATION OF IMMUNOCOMPROMISED PATIENTS

Immunocompromised patients are at highest risk for developing HZ. Unfortunately, there are currently no HZ vaccines approved for use in this population. The current live-attenuated vaccine has been demonstrated to be safe, well tolerated, and immunogenic in patients age 60 and older who are receiving chronic or maintenance low to moderate doses of corticosteroids.56

A clinical trial is being conducted to assess the immunogenicity, clinical effectiveness, and safety of the vaccine in rheumatoid arthritis patients receiving antitumor necrosis factor therapy (NCT01967316). Other trials are examining vaccine efficacy and safety in patients with solid organ tumors prior to chemotherapy (NCT02444936) and in patients who will be undergoing living donor kidney transplantation (NCT00940940). Researchers are also investigating the possibility of vaccinating allogeneic stem cell donors before donation in order to protect transplant recipients against HZ (NCT01573182).

ZVHT and HZ/su vaccination in immunocompromised patients

Heat-treated varicella-zoster vaccine (ZVHT) is a potential alternative for immunocompromised patients. A 4-dose regimen has been proven to reduce the risk of HZ in patients receiving autologous hematopoietic-cell transplants for non-Hodgkin or Hodgkin lymphoma.57

In another trial, the 4-dose ZVHT was safe and elicited significant VZV-specific T-cell response through 28 days in immunosuppressed patients with solid tumor malignancy, hematologic malignancy, human immunodeficiency virus infection with CD4 counts of 200 cells/mm3 or less, and autologous hematopoietic-cell transplants. The T-cell response was poor in allogeneic hematopoietic-cell transplant recipients, however.58

Because the HZ/su vaccine does not contain live virus, it seems particularly promising for immunocompromised patients. In phase 1 and 2 studies, a 3-dose regimen has been shown to be safe and immunogenic in hematopoietic-cell transplant recipients and HIV-infected adults with CD4 count higher than 200 cells/mm3.59,60 A phase 3 trial assessing the efficacy of HZ/su vaccine in autologous hematopoietic-cell transplant recipients is under way (NCT01610414). Changes in recommendations for HZ vaccine in these most vulnerable populations await the results of these studies.

 

References
  1. Dworkin RH, Johnson RW, Breuer J, et al. Recommendations for the management of herpes zoster. Clin Infect Dis 2007; 44(suppl 1):S1–S26.
  2. Johnson RW. Herpes zoster and postherpetic neuralgia. Expert Rev Vaccines 2010; 9(suppl):21–26.
  3. Chen N, Li Q, Yang J, Zhou M, Zhou D, He L. Antiviral treatment for preventing postherpetic neuralgia. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2014; 2:CD006866.
  4. Kawai K, Gebremeskel BG, Acosta CJ. Systematic review of incidence and complications of herpes zoster: towards a global perspective. BMJ Open 2014; 4:e004833.
  5. Tseng HF, Smith N, Harpaz R, Bialek SR, Sy LS, Jacobsen SJ. Herpes zoster vaccine in older adults and the risk of subsequent herpes zoster disease. JAMA 2011; 305:160–166.
  6. Langan SM, Smeeth L, Margolis DJ, Thomas SL. Herpes zoster vaccine effectiveness against incident herpes zoster and post-herpetic neuralgia in an older US population: a cohort study. PLoS Med 2013; 10:e1001420.
  7. Yawn BP, Saddier P, Wollan PC, St. Sauver JL, Kurland MJ, Sy LS. A population-based study of the incidence and complication rates of herpes zoster before zoster vaccine introduction. Mayo Clin Proc 2007; 82:1341–1349.
  8. Yawn BP, Wollan PC, Kurland MJ, St. Sauver JL, Saddier P. Herpes zoster recurrences more frequent than previously reported. Mayo Clin Proc 2011; 86:88–93.
  9. Chen SY, Suaya JA, Li Q, et al. Incidence of herpes zoster in patients with altered immune function. Infection 2014; 42:325–334.
  10. Edmunds WJ, Brisson M. The effect of vaccination on the epidemiology of varicella zoster virus. J Infect 2002; 44:211–219.
  11. Hales CM, Harpaz R, Joesoef MR, Bialek SR. Examination of links between herpes zoster incidence and childhood varicella vaccination. Ann Intern Med 2013; 159:739–745.
  12. Leung J, Harpaz R, Molinari NA, Jumaan A, Zhou F. Herpes zoster incidence among insured persons in the United States, 1993-2006: evaluation of impact of varicella vaccination. Clin Infect Dis 2011; 52:332–340.
  13. Rimland D, Moanna A. Increasing incidence of herpes zoster among veterans. Clin Infect Dis 2010; 50:1000–1005.
  14. Jumaan AO, Yu O, Jackson LA, Bohlke K, Galil K, Seward JF. Incidence of herpes zoster, before and after varicella-vaccination-associated decreases in the incidence of varicella, 1992-2002. J Infect Dis 2005; 191:2002–2007.
  15. Plotkin SA, Starr SE, Connor K, Morton D. Zoster in normal children after varicella vaccine. J Infect Dis 1989; 159:1000–1001.
  16. Oster G, Harding G, Dukes E, Edelsberg J, Cleary PD. Pain, medication use, and health-related quality of life in older persons with postherpetic neuralgia: results from a population-based survey. J Pain 2005; 6:356–363.
  17. Johnson RW, Bouhassira D, Kassianos G, Leplege A, Schmader KE, Weinke T. The impact of herpes zoster and post-herpetic neuralgia on quality-of-life. BMC Med 2010; 8:37.
  18. Harpaz R, Ortega-Sanchez IR, Seward JF; Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices (ACIP) Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). Prevention of herpes zoster: recommendations of the Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices (ACIP). MMWR Recomm Rep 2008; 57:1–30.
  19. Panatto D, Bragazzi NL, Rizzitelli E, et al. Evaluation of the economic burden of herpes zoster (HZ) infection. Hum Vaccin Immunother 2015; 11:245–262.
  20. Yawn BP, Itzler RF, Wollan PC, Pellissier JM, Sy LS, Saddier P. Health care utilization and cost burden of herpes zoster in a community population. Mayo Clin Proc 2009; 84:787–794.
  21. Dworkin RH, White R, O’Connor AB, Hawkins K. Health care expenditure burden of persisting herpes zoster pain. Pain Med 2008; 9:348–353.
  22. White RR, Lenhart G, Singhal PK, et al. Incremental 1-year medical resource utilization and costs for patients with herpes zoster from a set of US health plans. Pharmacoeconomics 2009; 27:781–792.
  23. Insinga RP, Itzler RF, Pellissier JM. Acute/subacute herpes zoster: healthcare resource utilisation and costs in a group of US health plans. Pharmacoeconomics 2007; 25:155–169.
  24. Singhal PK, Makin C, Pellissier J, Sy L, White R, Saddier P. Work and productivity loss related to herpes zoster. J Med Econ 2011; 14:639–645.
  25. US Bureau of Labor Statistics. Labor force statistics from the current population survey. www.bls.gov/web/empsit/cpseea13.htm. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  26. US Bureau of Labor Statistic. Occupational employment statistics. www.bls.gov/oes/current/oes_nat.htm. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  27. Oxman MN, Levin MJ, Johnson GR, et al; Shingles Prevention Study Group. A vaccine to prevent herpes zoster and postherpetic neuralgia in older adults. N Engl J Med 2005; 352:2271–2284.
  28. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). FDA clinical briefing document for Merck & Co., Inc. Zoster vaccine live (Oka/Merck) Zostavax. www.fda.gov/ohrms/dockets/ac/05/briefing/5-4198b2_1.pdf. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  29. Simberkoff MS, Arbeit RD, Johnson GR, et al; Shingles Prevention Study Group. Safety of herpes zoster vaccine in the shingles prevention study: a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2010; 152:545–554.
  30. Schmader KE, Oxman MN, Levin MJ, et al; Shingles Prevention Study Group. Persistence of the efficacy of zoster vaccine in the shingles prevention study and the short-term persistence substudy. Clin Infect Dis 2012; 55:1320–1328.
  31. Morrison VA, Johnson GR, Schmader KE, et al; Shingles Prevention Study Group. Long-term persistence of zoster vaccine efficacy. Clin Infect Dis 2015; 60:900–909.
  32. Levin MJ, Schmader KE, Pang L, et al. Cellular and humoral responses to a second dose of herpes zoster vaccine administered 10 years after the first dose among older adults. J Infect Dis 2016; 213:14–22.
  33. Schmader KE, Levin MJ, Gnann JW Jr, et al. Efficacy, safety, and tolerability of herpes zoster vaccine in persons aged 50-59 years. Clin Infect Dis 2012; 54:922–928.
  34. Hales CM, Harpaz R, Ortega-Sanchez I, Bialek SR; Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). Update on recommendations for use of herpes zoster vaccine. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2014; 63:729–731.
  35. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). Surveillance of vaccination coverage among adult populations—United States, 2014. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2016; 65(1):1–36. Accessed April 12, 2017.
  36. Williams WW, Lu PJ, O’Halloran A, et al; Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). Vaccination coverage among adults, excluding influenza vaccination—United States, 2013. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2015; 64:95–102.
  37. Oxman MN. Zoster vaccine: current status and future prospects. Clin Infect Dis 2010; 51:197–213.
  38. Hurley LP, Lindley MC, Harpaz R, et al. Barriers to the use of herpes zoster vaccine. Ann Intern Med 2010; 152:555–560.
  39. Lu PJ, Euler GL, Jumaan AO, Harpaz R. Herpes zoster vaccination among adults aged 60 years or older in the United States, 2007: uptake of the first new vaccine to target seniors. Vaccine 2009; 27:882–887.
  40. Hurley LP, Harpaz R, Daley MF, et al. National survey of primary care physicians regarding herpes zoster and the herpes zoster vaccine. J Infect Dis 2008; 197(suppl 2):S216–S223.
  41. Joon Lee T, Hayes S, Cummings DM, et al. Herpes zoster knowledge, prevalence, and vaccination rate by race. J Am Board Fam Med 2013; 26:45–51.
  42. Opstelten W, van Essen GA, Hak E. Determinants of non-compliance with herpes zoster vaccination in the community-dwelling elderly. Vaccine 2009; 27:192–196.
  43. Loo TS, Davis RB, Lipsitz LA, et al. Electronic medical record reminders and panel management to improve primary care of elderly patients. Arch Intern Med 2011; 171:1552–1558.
  44. Rhew DC, Glassman PA, Goetz MB. Improving pneumococcal vaccine rates. Nurse protocols versus clinical reminders. J Gen Intern Med 1999; 14:351–356.
  45. Chaudhry R, Schietel SM, North F, Dejesus R, Kesman RL, Stroebel RJ. Improving rates of herpes zoster vaccination with a clinical decision support system in a primary care practice. J Eval Clin Pract 2013; 19:263–266.
  46. Otsuka SH, Tayal NH, Porter K, Embi PJ, Beatty SJ. Improving herpes zoster vaccination rates through use of a clinical pharmacist and a personal health record. Am J Med 2013; 126:832.e1–832.e6.
  47. Taitel MS, Fensterheim LE, Cannon AE, Cohen ES. Improving pneumococcal and herpes zoster vaccination uptake: expanding pharmacist privileges. Am J Manag Care 2013; 19:e309–e313.
  48. Kawai K, Preaud E, Baron-Papillon F, Largeron N, Acosta CJ. Cost-effectiveness of vaccination against herpes zoster and postherpetic neuralgia: a critical review. Vaccine 2014; 32:1645–1653.
  49. Szucs TD, Pfeil AM. A systematic review of the cost effectiveness of herpes zoster vaccination. Pharmacoeconomics 2013; 31:125–136.
  50. Le P, Rothberg MB. Cost-effectiveness of herpes zoster vaccine for persons aged 50 years. Ann Intern Med 2015; 163:489–497.
  51. Le P, Rothberg MB. Determining the optimal age to vaccinate against herpes zoster: a cost-effectiveness analysis. Society for Medical Decision Making 37th Annual North American Meeting. St. Louis, MO; October 18-21, 2015.
  52. Cohen JI. Clinical practice: herpes zoster. N Engl J Med 2013; 369:255–263.
  53. Lal H, Cunningham AL, Godeaux O, et al; ZOE-50 Study Group. Efficacy of an adjuvanted herpes zoster subunit vaccine in older adults. N Engl J Med 2015; 372:2087–2096.
  54. GlaxoSmithKline plc. GSK’s candidate shingles vaccine demonstrates 90% efficacy against shingles in people 70 years of age and over. www.gsk.com/en-gb/media/press-releases/gsk-s-candidate-shingles-vaccine-demonstrates-90-efficacy-against-shingles-in-people-70-years-of-age-and-over/. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  55. Reed SG, Orr MT, Fox CB. Key roles of adjuvants in modern vaccines. Nat Med 2013; 19:1597–1608.
  56. Russell AF, Parrino J, Fisher CL Jr, et al. Safety, tolerability, and immunogenicity of zoster vaccine in subjects on chronic/maintenance corticosteroids. Vaccine 2015; 33:3129–3134.
  57. Hata A, Asanuma H, Rinki M, et al. Use of an inactivated varicella vaccine in recipients of hematopoietic-cell transplants. N Engl J Med 2002; 347:26–34.
  58. Mullane KM, Winston DJ, Wertheim MS, et al. Safety and immunogenicity of heat-treated zoster vaccine (ZVHT) in immunocompromised adults. J Infect Dis 2013; 208:1375–1385.
  59. Stadtmauer EA, Sullivan KM, Marty FM, et al. A phase 1/2 study of an adjuvanted varicella-zoster virus subunit vaccine in autologous hematopoietic cell transplant recipients. Blood 2014; 124:2921–2929.
  60. Berkowitz EM, Moyle G, Stellbrink HJ, et al. Safety and immunogenicity of an adjuvanted herpes zoster subunit candidate vaccine in HIV-infected adults: a phase 1/2a randomized, placebo-controlled study. J Infect Dis 2015; 211:1279–1287.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Phuc Le, PhD, MPH
Associate Staff, Center for Value-Based Care Research, Medicine Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Adjunct Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Camille Sabella, MD
Director, Center for Pediatric Infectious Diseases, Cleveland Clinic Children’s Hospital, and Vice Chair, Education, Pediatric Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Associate Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University

Michael B. Rothberg, MD, MPH
Director, Center for Value-Based Care Research, and Vice-Chair, Research, Medicine Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Address: Phuc Le, PhD, MPH, Center for Value-Based Care Research, Medicine Institute, G10, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; lep@ccf.org

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
359-366
Legacy Keywords
herpes zoster, HZ, postherpetic neuralgia, PHN, vaccination, shingles, varicella-zoster virus, VZV, Zostavax, Phuc Le, Camille Sabella, Michael Rothberg
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Phuc Le, PhD, MPH
Associate Staff, Center for Value-Based Care Research, Medicine Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Adjunct Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Camille Sabella, MD
Director, Center for Pediatric Infectious Diseases, Cleveland Clinic Children’s Hospital, and Vice Chair, Education, Pediatric Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Associate Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University

Michael B. Rothberg, MD, MPH
Director, Center for Value-Based Care Research, and Vice-Chair, Research, Medicine Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Address: Phuc Le, PhD, MPH, Center for Value-Based Care Research, Medicine Institute, G10, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; lep@ccf.org

Author and Disclosure Information

Phuc Le, PhD, MPH
Associate Staff, Center for Value-Based Care Research, Medicine Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Adjunct Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Camille Sabella, MD
Director, Center for Pediatric Infectious Diseases, Cleveland Clinic Children’s Hospital, and Vice Chair, Education, Pediatric Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Associate Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University

Michael B. Rothberg, MD, MPH
Director, Center for Value-Based Care Research, and Vice-Chair, Research, Medicine Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Address: Phuc Le, PhD, MPH, Center for Value-Based Care Research, Medicine Institute, G10, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; lep@ccf.org

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

Herpes zoster (HZ), or shingles, represents a reactivation of the varicella-zoster virus (VZV). Following primary infection, usually in childhood, the virus typically lies dormant in the dorsal root and sensory nerve ganglia for decades. The precise mechanism of reactivation is not well understood, but it is associated with a decline in cell-mediated immunity that occurs with advancing age, immune-compromising conditions such as HIV infection and cancer, or immunosuppressive therapies, including corticosteroids.1 HZ is usually a self-limited disease characterized by unilateral dermatomal rash and pain, but can cause disseminated infection in immunocompromised individuals.2

Treatment with antiviral medications within 72 hours of rash onset can reduce acute HZ symptoms.1 However, antiviral agents are only minimally effective in preventing postherpetic neuralgia, the most common complication of HZ.3 Therefore, efforts to reduce the burden of HZ morbidity have focused on prevention through vaccination.

Currently, the only shingles vaccine approved by the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) is Zostavax (Merck), which contains the live-attenuated Oka strain of VZV at a concentration 14 times greater than that of the varicella vaccine (Varivax, Merck). The live-attenuated vaccine boosts VZV-specific cell-mediated immunity, preventing reactivation of the latent virus.

In this article, we describe the burden of disease and review recent developments in the literature on HZ vaccine, including duration of efficacy, uptake and barriers to vaccination, cost-effectiveness, and the outlook for future vaccines.

INCIDENCE INCREASES WITH AGE

The incidence of herpes zoster in the general population is between 3 and 5 per 1,000 person-years4 and increases with age, especially after age 60 when the incidence can approach 13 to 15 per 1,000 person-years.5,6 An estimated 1 million new cases occur each year in the United States, and about 6% of patients experience a second episode of HZ within 8 years.7,8 In immunocompromised patients, the incidence of HZ is 2 to 10 times higher than in the general population.9

The incidence of HZ has been increasing for reasons that are unclear. After varicella vaccine was introduced into the routine childhood immunization schedule in 1995, it was hypothesized that the resultant decrease in primary varicella infections would remove a natural source of immune boosting and cause an increase in HZ incidence for up to 20 years.10 However, recent studies demonstrate that the observed increase in HZ incidence actually predates the introduction of varicella vaccine,11–13 and the widespread use of varicella vaccine has not resulted in an increase in the incidence of HZ.14

Other potential explanations for the rise in reported incidence include increasing awareness among patients, who might previously not have sought care and among physicians, who may be more likely to make the diagnosis. Advertisement of new treatments for HZ, including gabapentin and capsaicin, probably began to increase awareness in the 1990s, as did promotion of the HZ vaccine after its licensure in 2006.

HZ can occur in people who have been vaccinated against varicella due to reactivation of the vaccine-strain virus, but the risk is lower than after infection with wild-type varicella.15 Given that the varicella vaccine has been routinely used in children for only 20 years, the long-term effect of varicella vaccination on the incidence of HZ in elderly people is unknown.

Serious complications

HZ can cause rare but serious complications including encephalitis, herpes ophthalmicus, herpes oticus, myelitis, and retinitis.1 These can lead to long-term disability including unilateral blindness and deafness.

The most common and debilitating complication is postherpetic neuralgia, a persistent pain lasting at least 3 months, with a mean duration of 3.3 years and sometimes as long as 10 years.16 Postherpetic neuralgia occurs in 8% to 32% of patients after acute HZ,4 and the incidence increases with age, being most common after age 70. The chronic pain of postherpetic neuralgia has a significant adverse impact on patients’ quality of life, including physical disability and emotional distress.17 Some pain is intense, and anecdotal reports of patients committing suicide were included in the Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices (ACIP) recommendations regarding herpes zoster vaccine.18

HZ and its complications also impose a substantial economic burden on society.19 In a population-based study, the mean direct medical costs of HZ ranged from $620 to $1,160 (2015 dollars) depending on age,20 and the mean costs of postherpetic neuralgia were 2 to 5 times higher than that.20–22 Immunocompromised patients had costs 2 to 3 times higher than those of immunocompetent adults.23 In addition, for employed patients, HZ resulted in an average loss of 32 hours of work due to absenteeism and 84 hours due to presenteeism (ie, working while sick and therefore suboptimally).24

Assuming there are 1 million cases of HZ each year, if 8% to 32% of patients go on to develop postherpetic neuralgia, that would translate into approximately $1 to $2 billion in direct medical costs. With 60% of adult patients working,25 at an average wage of $23.23 per hour,26 HZ illness could be responsible for another $1.6 billion in lost productivity.

EFFICACY AND SAFETY OF HZ VACCINE

In 2006, the FDA approved the live-attenuated Oka strain VZV vaccine for prevention of HZ and postherpetic neuralgia in adults age 60 and older based on findings from the Shingles Prevention Study (SPS).27

The Shingles Prevention Study

This multicenter randomized placebo-controlled trial27 enrolled 38,546 immunocompetent persons age 60 and older. Subjects in the intervention group received a single dose of live-attenuated vaccine, and all participants were followed for up to 4.9 years after vaccination.

HZ occurred in 315 (1.636%) of the 19,254 participants in the vaccine group and in 642 (3.336%) of the 19,247 participants in the placebo group, an absolute risk reduction of 1.7%, number needed to treat 59, relative risk reduction 51%, P < .001. Similarly, postherpetic neuralgia occurred in 27 (0.140%) of the 19,254 vaccine recipients and in 80 (0.416%) of the placebo recipients (an absolute risk reduction of 0.276%, number needed to treat 362, relative risk reduction 66%, P < .001). The investigators calculated that vaccination reduced the  overall burden of illness by 61% (Table 1).

The efficacy against HZ incidence decreased with age,28 but the efficacy against postherpetic neuralgia did not. In addition, vaccine recipients who developed HZ generally had less severe manifestations.

The safety of the vaccine was assessed for all participants in the SPS. In addition, one-sixth of SPS participants were enrolled in a safety substudy. These participants completed a detailed report card regarding all medically important events within the first 42 days. Forty-eight percent of the vaccine group and 17% of the placebo group (P < .05) experienced adverse events, primarily at the injection site. Less than 1% of all local reactions were severe.29 Serious adverse events were rare (< 2%), but occurred significantly more often in the vaccinated group.

Short-Term Persistence Substudy

Short-term efficacy of the live-attenuated vaccine (up to 7 years) was assessed in the Short-Term Persistence Substudy (STPS), which involved 14,270 of the initial participants and reported yearly and overall vaccine efficacy.30 After 5 years, the yearly efficacy against postherpetic neuralgia incidence declined to 32% and was no longer statistically significant. Efficacy against HZ incidence and burden of illness displayed the same pattern. After the end of the STPS, all subjects in the placebo group received vaccination.

Long-Term Persistence Substudy

Those in the intervention group were followed for an additional 4 years in the Long-Term Persistence Substudy (LTPS).31 Due to the lack of concurrent controls in the LTPS, the authors used regression models based on historical controls to estimate contemporary population incidence of HZ and postherpetic neuralgia  for comparison.

Efficacy continued to decline over time, and by 10 years after vaccination there was no difference between vaccinated patients and historical controls in the rate of any end point (ie, efficacy declined to zero).

A trial of booster vaccination

Because many patients are vaccinated at age 60, waning immunity could leave them vulnerable to HZ and postherpetic neuralgia by age 70. A potential solution would be to give a booster dose after 10 years.

A recent phase 3 clinical trial of adults age 70 years and older found that a booster dose of live-attenuated vaccine was as safe and immunogenic as an initial dose.32 While antibody responses were similar in the boosted group and the newly vaccinated group, cell-mediated immunity was higher in the boosted group.

Because prevention of HZ is generally via cell-mediated immunity, the booster might be more effective than the initial vaccination, but clinical trials measuring actual cases prevented will be required to prove it. A booster dose is not currently recommended.

A trial of vaccination in adults 50 to 59

In 2011, the FDA extended its approval of HZ vaccine for use in adults ages 50 to 59.33

In a randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial in this age group,33 the vaccine reduced HZ incidence by almost 70% (absolute risk reduction 0.614%, number needed to treat 156; Table 1), but the severity of HZ cases was not affected. There were too few cases of postherpetic neuralgia to assess the efficacy for this end point. The study followed patients for only 1.5 years after vaccination, so the duration of efficacy is unknown.

As in the older recipients, the vaccine was well tolerated; injection-site reactions and headache were the major adverse effects reported among vaccine recipients.33

INDICATIONS AND CONTRAINDICATIONS

Although HZ vaccine is licensed for use in adults age 50 and older, the ACIP recommends it only for immunocompetent adults age 60 and older. At this time, the ACIP does not recommend HZ vaccine in those younger than 60 because of the low risk of HZ in this age group.34

Any person age 60 or older should receive a single dose of the live-attenuated HZ vaccine subcutaneously, regardless of past history of HZ.

The vaccine is contraindicated in patients who have a history of allergic reaction to any vaccine component, immunosuppression or immunodeficiency conditions, and pregnancy. Specifically, people who will receive immunosuppressive therapies should have the vaccine at least 14 days before beginning treatment. Antiviral medications such as acyclovir, famciclovir, and valacyclovir should be discontinued at least 24 hours before vaccination and not resumed until 14 days later. Patients taking high-dose corticosteroids for more than 2 weeks should not be vaccinated until at least 1 month after therapy is completed.

In contrast, HZ vaccine is not contraindicated for leukemia patients who are in remission and who have not received chemotherapy or radiation for at least 3 months, or for patients receiving short-term, low-to-moderate dose, topical, intra-articular, bursal, or tendon injections of corticosteroids. Patients on low-dose methotrexate, azathioprine, or 6-mercaptopurine can also receive the vaccine.18

 

 

VACCINATION RATES ARE LOW

FIGURE 1. Rates of vaccination against herpes zoster in adults age 60 and older between 2007 and 2013.

Although the vaccine has been recommended since 2008, uptake has been slow. Figure 1 shows the rate of HZ vaccination in adults age 60 and older surveyed in the National Health Interview Survey from 2007 to 2013.35 Eight years after the vaccine was licensed, only 28% of eligible patients had been vaccinated. Assuming the current rate of increase remains constant, it will take 7 more years to reach a 60% coverage rate—the same as for pneumococcal vaccine36—and 18 years to reach universal coverage.

Barriers to vaccination

Several barriers to HZ vaccination might account for the slow uptake.

For the first few years the vaccine was available, the requirement to store it frozen presented an obstacle for some physicians.37 Physicians may also have been discouraged by the cumbersome Medicare reimbursement process because while the administration fee is covered through Medicare Part B, the live­-attenuated vaccine is reimbursed only through Medicare Part D, a benefit that varies by plans. Other barriers to physicians are supply shortages, high up-front costs, and uncertainties regarding the duration of vaccine protection, its safety, and side effects.38–40

Patient barriers include lack of physician recommendation, lack of familiarity with the vaccine, high out-of-pocket costs, the perception that they are at low risk for HZ, underestimation of the pain associated with HZ and postherpetic neuralgia, and fear of vaccine adverse effects.39,41,42

Interventions to increase vaccination rates

Certain interventions have been shown to increase vaccination adherence in general and HZ vaccination in particular. In randomized trials involving other vaccines, electronic medical record reminders supporting panel management or nurse-initiated protocols have been proven to increase vaccination rates, but these methods have not been tested for HZ vaccine specifically.43,44

In an observational study, Chaudhry et al found that the number of HZ vaccinations administered at the Mayo Clinic increased 43% in one practice and 54% in another after the implementation of an electronic alert.45 A randomized controlled trial showed that an informational package discussing HZ and the vaccine sent to patients via either their electronic personal health record or traditional mail increased HZ vaccination by almost 3 times.46

Pharmacists can also influence vaccination rates. States that provide full immunization privileges to pharmacists have vaccination rates significantly higher than states with restricted or no authorization.47

COST-EFFECTIVENESS CONSIDERATIONS

Unlike the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services, the ACIP does consider cost-effectiveness in their vaccine recommendations. Because of the morbidity associated with HZ and postherpetic neuralgia as well as the economic impact, vaccination is generally considered cost-effective for adults age 60 and older.48,49

Analyses have demonstrated that cost-effectiveness hinges on 4 factors: initial vaccine efficacy, the duration of efficacy, the age-specific incidence of HZ, and the cost of the vaccine.

For patients ages 50 to 59, the incidence of HZ is low, and because the duration of vaccine efficacy is short even though initial vaccine efficacy is high, vaccination in this age group offers poor value.50 At older ages, the incidence of HZ and postherpetic neuralgia rises, making vaccination more cost-effective. After age 60, the vaccine is cost-effective at all ages, although age 70 appears to offer the optimal trade-off between increasing incidence and declining vaccine efficacy.48,49

For patients who plan to be vaccinated only once, waiting until age 70 would appear to offer the best value.51 For those who are willing to receive a booster dose, the optimal age for vaccination is unknown, but will likely depend on the effectiveness, cost, and duration of the booster.

A NEW HZ VACCINE

In 2015, GlaxoSmithKline tested a new HZ vaccine containing a single VZV glycoprotein in an AS01B adjuvant system (HZ/su vaccine).52 In a phase 3 randomized trial involving 15,411 immunocompetent persons age 50  and older, a 2-dose schedule of HZ/su vaccine was 97% effective in preventing HZ (Table 1).53 Importantly, the vaccine was equally effective in older patients.

This vaccine also had a high rate of adverse reactions, with 17% of vaccine recipients vs 3% of placebo recipients reporting events that prevented normal everyday activities for at least 1 day. However, the rate of serious adverse reactions was the same in both groups (9%). The company announced that they intended to submit a regulatory application for HZ/su vaccine in the second half of 2016.54

Because of its high efficacy, HZ/su vaccine has the potential to change practice, but several issues must be resolved before it can supplant the current vaccine.

First, the AS01B adjuvant is not currently licensed in the United States, so it is unclear if the HZ/su vaccine can get FDA approval.52,55

Second, there are several questions about the efficacy of the vaccine, including long-term efficacy, efficacy in the elderly, and efficacy in the case of a patient receiving only 1 of the 2 required doses.

Third, the impact of HZ/su vaccine on complications such as postherpetic neuralgia has not been established. The clinical trial (NCT01165229) examining vaccine efficacy against postherpetic neuralgia incidence and other complications in adults age 70 and older has recently been completed and data should be available soon. Given the extremely high efficacy against HZ, it is likely that it will be close to 100% effective against this complication.

Fourth, there is uncertainty as to how the HZ/su vaccine should be used in patients who have already received the live-attenuated vaccine, if it is determined that a booster is necessary.

Finally, the vaccine is not yet priced. Given its superior effectiveness, particularly in older individuals, competitive pricing could dramatically affect the market. How Medicare or other insurers cover the new vaccine will likely influence its acceptance.

HZ VACCINATION OF IMMUNOCOMPROMISED PATIENTS

Immunocompromised patients are at highest risk for developing HZ. Unfortunately, there are currently no HZ vaccines approved for use in this population. The current live-attenuated vaccine has been demonstrated to be safe, well tolerated, and immunogenic in patients age 60 and older who are receiving chronic or maintenance low to moderate doses of corticosteroids.56

A clinical trial is being conducted to assess the immunogenicity, clinical effectiveness, and safety of the vaccine in rheumatoid arthritis patients receiving antitumor necrosis factor therapy (NCT01967316). Other trials are examining vaccine efficacy and safety in patients with solid organ tumors prior to chemotherapy (NCT02444936) and in patients who will be undergoing living donor kidney transplantation (NCT00940940). Researchers are also investigating the possibility of vaccinating allogeneic stem cell donors before donation in order to protect transplant recipients against HZ (NCT01573182).

ZVHT and HZ/su vaccination in immunocompromised patients

Heat-treated varicella-zoster vaccine (ZVHT) is a potential alternative for immunocompromised patients. A 4-dose regimen has been proven to reduce the risk of HZ in patients receiving autologous hematopoietic-cell transplants for non-Hodgkin or Hodgkin lymphoma.57

In another trial, the 4-dose ZVHT was safe and elicited significant VZV-specific T-cell response through 28 days in immunosuppressed patients with solid tumor malignancy, hematologic malignancy, human immunodeficiency virus infection with CD4 counts of 200 cells/mm3 or less, and autologous hematopoietic-cell transplants. The T-cell response was poor in allogeneic hematopoietic-cell transplant recipients, however.58

Because the HZ/su vaccine does not contain live virus, it seems particularly promising for immunocompromised patients. In phase 1 and 2 studies, a 3-dose regimen has been shown to be safe and immunogenic in hematopoietic-cell transplant recipients and HIV-infected adults with CD4 count higher than 200 cells/mm3.59,60 A phase 3 trial assessing the efficacy of HZ/su vaccine in autologous hematopoietic-cell transplant recipients is under way (NCT01610414). Changes in recommendations for HZ vaccine in these most vulnerable populations await the results of these studies.

 

Herpes zoster (HZ), or shingles, represents a reactivation of the varicella-zoster virus (VZV). Following primary infection, usually in childhood, the virus typically lies dormant in the dorsal root and sensory nerve ganglia for decades. The precise mechanism of reactivation is not well understood, but it is associated with a decline in cell-mediated immunity that occurs with advancing age, immune-compromising conditions such as HIV infection and cancer, or immunosuppressive therapies, including corticosteroids.1 HZ is usually a self-limited disease characterized by unilateral dermatomal rash and pain, but can cause disseminated infection in immunocompromised individuals.2

Treatment with antiviral medications within 72 hours of rash onset can reduce acute HZ symptoms.1 However, antiviral agents are only minimally effective in preventing postherpetic neuralgia, the most common complication of HZ.3 Therefore, efforts to reduce the burden of HZ morbidity have focused on prevention through vaccination.

Currently, the only shingles vaccine approved by the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) is Zostavax (Merck), which contains the live-attenuated Oka strain of VZV at a concentration 14 times greater than that of the varicella vaccine (Varivax, Merck). The live-attenuated vaccine boosts VZV-specific cell-mediated immunity, preventing reactivation of the latent virus.

In this article, we describe the burden of disease and review recent developments in the literature on HZ vaccine, including duration of efficacy, uptake and barriers to vaccination, cost-effectiveness, and the outlook for future vaccines.

INCIDENCE INCREASES WITH AGE

The incidence of herpes zoster in the general population is between 3 and 5 per 1,000 person-years4 and increases with age, especially after age 60 when the incidence can approach 13 to 15 per 1,000 person-years.5,6 An estimated 1 million new cases occur each year in the United States, and about 6% of patients experience a second episode of HZ within 8 years.7,8 In immunocompromised patients, the incidence of HZ is 2 to 10 times higher than in the general population.9

The incidence of HZ has been increasing for reasons that are unclear. After varicella vaccine was introduced into the routine childhood immunization schedule in 1995, it was hypothesized that the resultant decrease in primary varicella infections would remove a natural source of immune boosting and cause an increase in HZ incidence for up to 20 years.10 However, recent studies demonstrate that the observed increase in HZ incidence actually predates the introduction of varicella vaccine,11–13 and the widespread use of varicella vaccine has not resulted in an increase in the incidence of HZ.14

Other potential explanations for the rise in reported incidence include increasing awareness among patients, who might previously not have sought care and among physicians, who may be more likely to make the diagnosis. Advertisement of new treatments for HZ, including gabapentin and capsaicin, probably began to increase awareness in the 1990s, as did promotion of the HZ vaccine after its licensure in 2006.

HZ can occur in people who have been vaccinated against varicella due to reactivation of the vaccine-strain virus, but the risk is lower than after infection with wild-type varicella.15 Given that the varicella vaccine has been routinely used in children for only 20 years, the long-term effect of varicella vaccination on the incidence of HZ in elderly people is unknown.

Serious complications

HZ can cause rare but serious complications including encephalitis, herpes ophthalmicus, herpes oticus, myelitis, and retinitis.1 These can lead to long-term disability including unilateral blindness and deafness.

The most common and debilitating complication is postherpetic neuralgia, a persistent pain lasting at least 3 months, with a mean duration of 3.3 years and sometimes as long as 10 years.16 Postherpetic neuralgia occurs in 8% to 32% of patients after acute HZ,4 and the incidence increases with age, being most common after age 70. The chronic pain of postherpetic neuralgia has a significant adverse impact on patients’ quality of life, including physical disability and emotional distress.17 Some pain is intense, and anecdotal reports of patients committing suicide were included in the Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices (ACIP) recommendations regarding herpes zoster vaccine.18

HZ and its complications also impose a substantial economic burden on society.19 In a population-based study, the mean direct medical costs of HZ ranged from $620 to $1,160 (2015 dollars) depending on age,20 and the mean costs of postherpetic neuralgia were 2 to 5 times higher than that.20–22 Immunocompromised patients had costs 2 to 3 times higher than those of immunocompetent adults.23 In addition, for employed patients, HZ resulted in an average loss of 32 hours of work due to absenteeism and 84 hours due to presenteeism (ie, working while sick and therefore suboptimally).24

Assuming there are 1 million cases of HZ each year, if 8% to 32% of patients go on to develop postherpetic neuralgia, that would translate into approximately $1 to $2 billion in direct medical costs. With 60% of adult patients working,25 at an average wage of $23.23 per hour,26 HZ illness could be responsible for another $1.6 billion in lost productivity.

EFFICACY AND SAFETY OF HZ VACCINE

In 2006, the FDA approved the live-attenuated Oka strain VZV vaccine for prevention of HZ and postherpetic neuralgia in adults age 60 and older based on findings from the Shingles Prevention Study (SPS).27

The Shingles Prevention Study

This multicenter randomized placebo-controlled trial27 enrolled 38,546 immunocompetent persons age 60 and older. Subjects in the intervention group received a single dose of live-attenuated vaccine, and all participants were followed for up to 4.9 years after vaccination.

HZ occurred in 315 (1.636%) of the 19,254 participants in the vaccine group and in 642 (3.336%) of the 19,247 participants in the placebo group, an absolute risk reduction of 1.7%, number needed to treat 59, relative risk reduction 51%, P < .001. Similarly, postherpetic neuralgia occurred in 27 (0.140%) of the 19,254 vaccine recipients and in 80 (0.416%) of the placebo recipients (an absolute risk reduction of 0.276%, number needed to treat 362, relative risk reduction 66%, P < .001). The investigators calculated that vaccination reduced the  overall burden of illness by 61% (Table 1).

The efficacy against HZ incidence decreased with age,28 but the efficacy against postherpetic neuralgia did not. In addition, vaccine recipients who developed HZ generally had less severe manifestations.

The safety of the vaccine was assessed for all participants in the SPS. In addition, one-sixth of SPS participants were enrolled in a safety substudy. These participants completed a detailed report card regarding all medically important events within the first 42 days. Forty-eight percent of the vaccine group and 17% of the placebo group (P < .05) experienced adverse events, primarily at the injection site. Less than 1% of all local reactions were severe.29 Serious adverse events were rare (< 2%), but occurred significantly more often in the vaccinated group.

Short-Term Persistence Substudy

Short-term efficacy of the live-attenuated vaccine (up to 7 years) was assessed in the Short-Term Persistence Substudy (STPS), which involved 14,270 of the initial participants and reported yearly and overall vaccine efficacy.30 After 5 years, the yearly efficacy against postherpetic neuralgia incidence declined to 32% and was no longer statistically significant. Efficacy against HZ incidence and burden of illness displayed the same pattern. After the end of the STPS, all subjects in the placebo group received vaccination.

Long-Term Persistence Substudy

Those in the intervention group were followed for an additional 4 years in the Long-Term Persistence Substudy (LTPS).31 Due to the lack of concurrent controls in the LTPS, the authors used regression models based on historical controls to estimate contemporary population incidence of HZ and postherpetic neuralgia  for comparison.

Efficacy continued to decline over time, and by 10 years after vaccination there was no difference between vaccinated patients and historical controls in the rate of any end point (ie, efficacy declined to zero).

A trial of booster vaccination

Because many patients are vaccinated at age 60, waning immunity could leave them vulnerable to HZ and postherpetic neuralgia by age 70. A potential solution would be to give a booster dose after 10 years.

A recent phase 3 clinical trial of adults age 70 years and older found that a booster dose of live-attenuated vaccine was as safe and immunogenic as an initial dose.32 While antibody responses were similar in the boosted group and the newly vaccinated group, cell-mediated immunity was higher in the boosted group.

Because prevention of HZ is generally via cell-mediated immunity, the booster might be more effective than the initial vaccination, but clinical trials measuring actual cases prevented will be required to prove it. A booster dose is not currently recommended.

A trial of vaccination in adults 50 to 59

In 2011, the FDA extended its approval of HZ vaccine for use in adults ages 50 to 59.33

In a randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial in this age group,33 the vaccine reduced HZ incidence by almost 70% (absolute risk reduction 0.614%, number needed to treat 156; Table 1), but the severity of HZ cases was not affected. There were too few cases of postherpetic neuralgia to assess the efficacy for this end point. The study followed patients for only 1.5 years after vaccination, so the duration of efficacy is unknown.

As in the older recipients, the vaccine was well tolerated; injection-site reactions and headache were the major adverse effects reported among vaccine recipients.33

INDICATIONS AND CONTRAINDICATIONS

Although HZ vaccine is licensed for use in adults age 50 and older, the ACIP recommends it only for immunocompetent adults age 60 and older. At this time, the ACIP does not recommend HZ vaccine in those younger than 60 because of the low risk of HZ in this age group.34

Any person age 60 or older should receive a single dose of the live-attenuated HZ vaccine subcutaneously, regardless of past history of HZ.

The vaccine is contraindicated in patients who have a history of allergic reaction to any vaccine component, immunosuppression or immunodeficiency conditions, and pregnancy. Specifically, people who will receive immunosuppressive therapies should have the vaccine at least 14 days before beginning treatment. Antiviral medications such as acyclovir, famciclovir, and valacyclovir should be discontinued at least 24 hours before vaccination and not resumed until 14 days later. Patients taking high-dose corticosteroids for more than 2 weeks should not be vaccinated until at least 1 month after therapy is completed.

In contrast, HZ vaccine is not contraindicated for leukemia patients who are in remission and who have not received chemotherapy or radiation for at least 3 months, or for patients receiving short-term, low-to-moderate dose, topical, intra-articular, bursal, or tendon injections of corticosteroids. Patients on low-dose methotrexate, azathioprine, or 6-mercaptopurine can also receive the vaccine.18

 

 

VACCINATION RATES ARE LOW

FIGURE 1. Rates of vaccination against herpes zoster in adults age 60 and older between 2007 and 2013.

Although the vaccine has been recommended since 2008, uptake has been slow. Figure 1 shows the rate of HZ vaccination in adults age 60 and older surveyed in the National Health Interview Survey from 2007 to 2013.35 Eight years after the vaccine was licensed, only 28% of eligible patients had been vaccinated. Assuming the current rate of increase remains constant, it will take 7 more years to reach a 60% coverage rate—the same as for pneumococcal vaccine36—and 18 years to reach universal coverage.

Barriers to vaccination

Several barriers to HZ vaccination might account for the slow uptake.

For the first few years the vaccine was available, the requirement to store it frozen presented an obstacle for some physicians.37 Physicians may also have been discouraged by the cumbersome Medicare reimbursement process because while the administration fee is covered through Medicare Part B, the live­-attenuated vaccine is reimbursed only through Medicare Part D, a benefit that varies by plans. Other barriers to physicians are supply shortages, high up-front costs, and uncertainties regarding the duration of vaccine protection, its safety, and side effects.38–40

Patient barriers include lack of physician recommendation, lack of familiarity with the vaccine, high out-of-pocket costs, the perception that they are at low risk for HZ, underestimation of the pain associated with HZ and postherpetic neuralgia, and fear of vaccine adverse effects.39,41,42

Interventions to increase vaccination rates

Certain interventions have been shown to increase vaccination adherence in general and HZ vaccination in particular. In randomized trials involving other vaccines, electronic medical record reminders supporting panel management or nurse-initiated protocols have been proven to increase vaccination rates, but these methods have not been tested for HZ vaccine specifically.43,44

In an observational study, Chaudhry et al found that the number of HZ vaccinations administered at the Mayo Clinic increased 43% in one practice and 54% in another after the implementation of an electronic alert.45 A randomized controlled trial showed that an informational package discussing HZ and the vaccine sent to patients via either their electronic personal health record or traditional mail increased HZ vaccination by almost 3 times.46

Pharmacists can also influence vaccination rates. States that provide full immunization privileges to pharmacists have vaccination rates significantly higher than states with restricted or no authorization.47

COST-EFFECTIVENESS CONSIDERATIONS

Unlike the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services, the ACIP does consider cost-effectiveness in their vaccine recommendations. Because of the morbidity associated with HZ and postherpetic neuralgia as well as the economic impact, vaccination is generally considered cost-effective for adults age 60 and older.48,49

Analyses have demonstrated that cost-effectiveness hinges on 4 factors: initial vaccine efficacy, the duration of efficacy, the age-specific incidence of HZ, and the cost of the vaccine.

For patients ages 50 to 59, the incidence of HZ is low, and because the duration of vaccine efficacy is short even though initial vaccine efficacy is high, vaccination in this age group offers poor value.50 At older ages, the incidence of HZ and postherpetic neuralgia rises, making vaccination more cost-effective. After age 60, the vaccine is cost-effective at all ages, although age 70 appears to offer the optimal trade-off between increasing incidence and declining vaccine efficacy.48,49

For patients who plan to be vaccinated only once, waiting until age 70 would appear to offer the best value.51 For those who are willing to receive a booster dose, the optimal age for vaccination is unknown, but will likely depend on the effectiveness, cost, and duration of the booster.

A NEW HZ VACCINE

In 2015, GlaxoSmithKline tested a new HZ vaccine containing a single VZV glycoprotein in an AS01B adjuvant system (HZ/su vaccine).52 In a phase 3 randomized trial involving 15,411 immunocompetent persons age 50  and older, a 2-dose schedule of HZ/su vaccine was 97% effective in preventing HZ (Table 1).53 Importantly, the vaccine was equally effective in older patients.

This vaccine also had a high rate of adverse reactions, with 17% of vaccine recipients vs 3% of placebo recipients reporting events that prevented normal everyday activities for at least 1 day. However, the rate of serious adverse reactions was the same in both groups (9%). The company announced that they intended to submit a regulatory application for HZ/su vaccine in the second half of 2016.54

Because of its high efficacy, HZ/su vaccine has the potential to change practice, but several issues must be resolved before it can supplant the current vaccine.

First, the AS01B adjuvant is not currently licensed in the United States, so it is unclear if the HZ/su vaccine can get FDA approval.52,55

Second, there are several questions about the efficacy of the vaccine, including long-term efficacy, efficacy in the elderly, and efficacy in the case of a patient receiving only 1 of the 2 required doses.

Third, the impact of HZ/su vaccine on complications such as postherpetic neuralgia has not been established. The clinical trial (NCT01165229) examining vaccine efficacy against postherpetic neuralgia incidence and other complications in adults age 70 and older has recently been completed and data should be available soon. Given the extremely high efficacy against HZ, it is likely that it will be close to 100% effective against this complication.

Fourth, there is uncertainty as to how the HZ/su vaccine should be used in patients who have already received the live-attenuated vaccine, if it is determined that a booster is necessary.

Finally, the vaccine is not yet priced. Given its superior effectiveness, particularly in older individuals, competitive pricing could dramatically affect the market. How Medicare or other insurers cover the new vaccine will likely influence its acceptance.

HZ VACCINATION OF IMMUNOCOMPROMISED PATIENTS

Immunocompromised patients are at highest risk for developing HZ. Unfortunately, there are currently no HZ vaccines approved for use in this population. The current live-attenuated vaccine has been demonstrated to be safe, well tolerated, and immunogenic in patients age 60 and older who are receiving chronic or maintenance low to moderate doses of corticosteroids.56

A clinical trial is being conducted to assess the immunogenicity, clinical effectiveness, and safety of the vaccine in rheumatoid arthritis patients receiving antitumor necrosis factor therapy (NCT01967316). Other trials are examining vaccine efficacy and safety in patients with solid organ tumors prior to chemotherapy (NCT02444936) and in patients who will be undergoing living donor kidney transplantation (NCT00940940). Researchers are also investigating the possibility of vaccinating allogeneic stem cell donors before donation in order to protect transplant recipients against HZ (NCT01573182).

ZVHT and HZ/su vaccination in immunocompromised patients

Heat-treated varicella-zoster vaccine (ZVHT) is a potential alternative for immunocompromised patients. A 4-dose regimen has been proven to reduce the risk of HZ in patients receiving autologous hematopoietic-cell transplants for non-Hodgkin or Hodgkin lymphoma.57

In another trial, the 4-dose ZVHT was safe and elicited significant VZV-specific T-cell response through 28 days in immunosuppressed patients with solid tumor malignancy, hematologic malignancy, human immunodeficiency virus infection with CD4 counts of 200 cells/mm3 or less, and autologous hematopoietic-cell transplants. The T-cell response was poor in allogeneic hematopoietic-cell transplant recipients, however.58

Because the HZ/su vaccine does not contain live virus, it seems particularly promising for immunocompromised patients. In phase 1 and 2 studies, a 3-dose regimen has been shown to be safe and immunogenic in hematopoietic-cell transplant recipients and HIV-infected adults with CD4 count higher than 200 cells/mm3.59,60 A phase 3 trial assessing the efficacy of HZ/su vaccine in autologous hematopoietic-cell transplant recipients is under way (NCT01610414). Changes in recommendations for HZ vaccine in these most vulnerable populations await the results of these studies.

 

References
  1. Dworkin RH, Johnson RW, Breuer J, et al. Recommendations for the management of herpes zoster. Clin Infect Dis 2007; 44(suppl 1):S1–S26.
  2. Johnson RW. Herpes zoster and postherpetic neuralgia. Expert Rev Vaccines 2010; 9(suppl):21–26.
  3. Chen N, Li Q, Yang J, Zhou M, Zhou D, He L. Antiviral treatment for preventing postherpetic neuralgia. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2014; 2:CD006866.
  4. Kawai K, Gebremeskel BG, Acosta CJ. Systematic review of incidence and complications of herpes zoster: towards a global perspective. BMJ Open 2014; 4:e004833.
  5. Tseng HF, Smith N, Harpaz R, Bialek SR, Sy LS, Jacobsen SJ. Herpes zoster vaccine in older adults and the risk of subsequent herpes zoster disease. JAMA 2011; 305:160–166.
  6. Langan SM, Smeeth L, Margolis DJ, Thomas SL. Herpes zoster vaccine effectiveness against incident herpes zoster and post-herpetic neuralgia in an older US population: a cohort study. PLoS Med 2013; 10:e1001420.
  7. Yawn BP, Saddier P, Wollan PC, St. Sauver JL, Kurland MJ, Sy LS. A population-based study of the incidence and complication rates of herpes zoster before zoster vaccine introduction. Mayo Clin Proc 2007; 82:1341–1349.
  8. Yawn BP, Wollan PC, Kurland MJ, St. Sauver JL, Saddier P. Herpes zoster recurrences more frequent than previously reported. Mayo Clin Proc 2011; 86:88–93.
  9. Chen SY, Suaya JA, Li Q, et al. Incidence of herpes zoster in patients with altered immune function. Infection 2014; 42:325–334.
  10. Edmunds WJ, Brisson M. The effect of vaccination on the epidemiology of varicella zoster virus. J Infect 2002; 44:211–219.
  11. Hales CM, Harpaz R, Joesoef MR, Bialek SR. Examination of links between herpes zoster incidence and childhood varicella vaccination. Ann Intern Med 2013; 159:739–745.
  12. Leung J, Harpaz R, Molinari NA, Jumaan A, Zhou F. Herpes zoster incidence among insured persons in the United States, 1993-2006: evaluation of impact of varicella vaccination. Clin Infect Dis 2011; 52:332–340.
  13. Rimland D, Moanna A. Increasing incidence of herpes zoster among veterans. Clin Infect Dis 2010; 50:1000–1005.
  14. Jumaan AO, Yu O, Jackson LA, Bohlke K, Galil K, Seward JF. Incidence of herpes zoster, before and after varicella-vaccination-associated decreases in the incidence of varicella, 1992-2002. J Infect Dis 2005; 191:2002–2007.
  15. Plotkin SA, Starr SE, Connor K, Morton D. Zoster in normal children after varicella vaccine. J Infect Dis 1989; 159:1000–1001.
  16. Oster G, Harding G, Dukes E, Edelsberg J, Cleary PD. Pain, medication use, and health-related quality of life in older persons with postherpetic neuralgia: results from a population-based survey. J Pain 2005; 6:356–363.
  17. Johnson RW, Bouhassira D, Kassianos G, Leplege A, Schmader KE, Weinke T. The impact of herpes zoster and post-herpetic neuralgia on quality-of-life. BMC Med 2010; 8:37.
  18. Harpaz R, Ortega-Sanchez IR, Seward JF; Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices (ACIP) Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). Prevention of herpes zoster: recommendations of the Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices (ACIP). MMWR Recomm Rep 2008; 57:1–30.
  19. Panatto D, Bragazzi NL, Rizzitelli E, et al. Evaluation of the economic burden of herpes zoster (HZ) infection. Hum Vaccin Immunother 2015; 11:245–262.
  20. Yawn BP, Itzler RF, Wollan PC, Pellissier JM, Sy LS, Saddier P. Health care utilization and cost burden of herpes zoster in a community population. Mayo Clin Proc 2009; 84:787–794.
  21. Dworkin RH, White R, O’Connor AB, Hawkins K. Health care expenditure burden of persisting herpes zoster pain. Pain Med 2008; 9:348–353.
  22. White RR, Lenhart G, Singhal PK, et al. Incremental 1-year medical resource utilization and costs for patients with herpes zoster from a set of US health plans. Pharmacoeconomics 2009; 27:781–792.
  23. Insinga RP, Itzler RF, Pellissier JM. Acute/subacute herpes zoster: healthcare resource utilisation and costs in a group of US health plans. Pharmacoeconomics 2007; 25:155–169.
  24. Singhal PK, Makin C, Pellissier J, Sy L, White R, Saddier P. Work and productivity loss related to herpes zoster. J Med Econ 2011; 14:639–645.
  25. US Bureau of Labor Statistics. Labor force statistics from the current population survey. www.bls.gov/web/empsit/cpseea13.htm. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  26. US Bureau of Labor Statistic. Occupational employment statistics. www.bls.gov/oes/current/oes_nat.htm. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  27. Oxman MN, Levin MJ, Johnson GR, et al; Shingles Prevention Study Group. A vaccine to prevent herpes zoster and postherpetic neuralgia in older adults. N Engl J Med 2005; 352:2271–2284.
  28. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). FDA clinical briefing document for Merck & Co., Inc. Zoster vaccine live (Oka/Merck) Zostavax. www.fda.gov/ohrms/dockets/ac/05/briefing/5-4198b2_1.pdf. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  29. Simberkoff MS, Arbeit RD, Johnson GR, et al; Shingles Prevention Study Group. Safety of herpes zoster vaccine in the shingles prevention study: a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2010; 152:545–554.
  30. Schmader KE, Oxman MN, Levin MJ, et al; Shingles Prevention Study Group. Persistence of the efficacy of zoster vaccine in the shingles prevention study and the short-term persistence substudy. Clin Infect Dis 2012; 55:1320–1328.
  31. Morrison VA, Johnson GR, Schmader KE, et al; Shingles Prevention Study Group. Long-term persistence of zoster vaccine efficacy. Clin Infect Dis 2015; 60:900–909.
  32. Levin MJ, Schmader KE, Pang L, et al. Cellular and humoral responses to a second dose of herpes zoster vaccine administered 10 years after the first dose among older adults. J Infect Dis 2016; 213:14–22.
  33. Schmader KE, Levin MJ, Gnann JW Jr, et al. Efficacy, safety, and tolerability of herpes zoster vaccine in persons aged 50-59 years. Clin Infect Dis 2012; 54:922–928.
  34. Hales CM, Harpaz R, Ortega-Sanchez I, Bialek SR; Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). Update on recommendations for use of herpes zoster vaccine. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2014; 63:729–731.
  35. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). Surveillance of vaccination coverage among adult populations—United States, 2014. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2016; 65(1):1–36. Accessed April 12, 2017.
  36. Williams WW, Lu PJ, O’Halloran A, et al; Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). Vaccination coverage among adults, excluding influenza vaccination—United States, 2013. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2015; 64:95–102.
  37. Oxman MN. Zoster vaccine: current status and future prospects. Clin Infect Dis 2010; 51:197–213.
  38. Hurley LP, Lindley MC, Harpaz R, et al. Barriers to the use of herpes zoster vaccine. Ann Intern Med 2010; 152:555–560.
  39. Lu PJ, Euler GL, Jumaan AO, Harpaz R. Herpes zoster vaccination among adults aged 60 years or older in the United States, 2007: uptake of the first new vaccine to target seniors. Vaccine 2009; 27:882–887.
  40. Hurley LP, Harpaz R, Daley MF, et al. National survey of primary care physicians regarding herpes zoster and the herpes zoster vaccine. J Infect Dis 2008; 197(suppl 2):S216–S223.
  41. Joon Lee T, Hayes S, Cummings DM, et al. Herpes zoster knowledge, prevalence, and vaccination rate by race. J Am Board Fam Med 2013; 26:45–51.
  42. Opstelten W, van Essen GA, Hak E. Determinants of non-compliance with herpes zoster vaccination in the community-dwelling elderly. Vaccine 2009; 27:192–196.
  43. Loo TS, Davis RB, Lipsitz LA, et al. Electronic medical record reminders and panel management to improve primary care of elderly patients. Arch Intern Med 2011; 171:1552–1558.
  44. Rhew DC, Glassman PA, Goetz MB. Improving pneumococcal vaccine rates. Nurse protocols versus clinical reminders. J Gen Intern Med 1999; 14:351–356.
  45. Chaudhry R, Schietel SM, North F, Dejesus R, Kesman RL, Stroebel RJ. Improving rates of herpes zoster vaccination with a clinical decision support system in a primary care practice. J Eval Clin Pract 2013; 19:263–266.
  46. Otsuka SH, Tayal NH, Porter K, Embi PJ, Beatty SJ. Improving herpes zoster vaccination rates through use of a clinical pharmacist and a personal health record. Am J Med 2013; 126:832.e1–832.e6.
  47. Taitel MS, Fensterheim LE, Cannon AE, Cohen ES. Improving pneumococcal and herpes zoster vaccination uptake: expanding pharmacist privileges. Am J Manag Care 2013; 19:e309–e313.
  48. Kawai K, Preaud E, Baron-Papillon F, Largeron N, Acosta CJ. Cost-effectiveness of vaccination against herpes zoster and postherpetic neuralgia: a critical review. Vaccine 2014; 32:1645–1653.
  49. Szucs TD, Pfeil AM. A systematic review of the cost effectiveness of herpes zoster vaccination. Pharmacoeconomics 2013; 31:125–136.
  50. Le P, Rothberg MB. Cost-effectiveness of herpes zoster vaccine for persons aged 50 years. Ann Intern Med 2015; 163:489–497.
  51. Le P, Rothberg MB. Determining the optimal age to vaccinate against herpes zoster: a cost-effectiveness analysis. Society for Medical Decision Making 37th Annual North American Meeting. St. Louis, MO; October 18-21, 2015.
  52. Cohen JI. Clinical practice: herpes zoster. N Engl J Med 2013; 369:255–263.
  53. Lal H, Cunningham AL, Godeaux O, et al; ZOE-50 Study Group. Efficacy of an adjuvanted herpes zoster subunit vaccine in older adults. N Engl J Med 2015; 372:2087–2096.
  54. GlaxoSmithKline plc. GSK’s candidate shingles vaccine demonstrates 90% efficacy against shingles in people 70 years of age and over. www.gsk.com/en-gb/media/press-releases/gsk-s-candidate-shingles-vaccine-demonstrates-90-efficacy-against-shingles-in-people-70-years-of-age-and-over/. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  55. Reed SG, Orr MT, Fox CB. Key roles of adjuvants in modern vaccines. Nat Med 2013; 19:1597–1608.
  56. Russell AF, Parrino J, Fisher CL Jr, et al. Safety, tolerability, and immunogenicity of zoster vaccine in subjects on chronic/maintenance corticosteroids. Vaccine 2015; 33:3129–3134.
  57. Hata A, Asanuma H, Rinki M, et al. Use of an inactivated varicella vaccine in recipients of hematopoietic-cell transplants. N Engl J Med 2002; 347:26–34.
  58. Mullane KM, Winston DJ, Wertheim MS, et al. Safety and immunogenicity of heat-treated zoster vaccine (ZVHT) in immunocompromised adults. J Infect Dis 2013; 208:1375–1385.
  59. Stadtmauer EA, Sullivan KM, Marty FM, et al. A phase 1/2 study of an adjuvanted varicella-zoster virus subunit vaccine in autologous hematopoietic cell transplant recipients. Blood 2014; 124:2921–2929.
  60. Berkowitz EM, Moyle G, Stellbrink HJ, et al. Safety and immunogenicity of an adjuvanted herpes zoster subunit candidate vaccine in HIV-infected adults: a phase 1/2a randomized, placebo-controlled study. J Infect Dis 2015; 211:1279–1287.
References
  1. Dworkin RH, Johnson RW, Breuer J, et al. Recommendations for the management of herpes zoster. Clin Infect Dis 2007; 44(suppl 1):S1–S26.
  2. Johnson RW. Herpes zoster and postherpetic neuralgia. Expert Rev Vaccines 2010; 9(suppl):21–26.
  3. Chen N, Li Q, Yang J, Zhou M, Zhou D, He L. Antiviral treatment for preventing postherpetic neuralgia. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2014; 2:CD006866.
  4. Kawai K, Gebremeskel BG, Acosta CJ. Systematic review of incidence and complications of herpes zoster: towards a global perspective. BMJ Open 2014; 4:e004833.
  5. Tseng HF, Smith N, Harpaz R, Bialek SR, Sy LS, Jacobsen SJ. Herpes zoster vaccine in older adults and the risk of subsequent herpes zoster disease. JAMA 2011; 305:160–166.
  6. Langan SM, Smeeth L, Margolis DJ, Thomas SL. Herpes zoster vaccine effectiveness against incident herpes zoster and post-herpetic neuralgia in an older US population: a cohort study. PLoS Med 2013; 10:e1001420.
  7. Yawn BP, Saddier P, Wollan PC, St. Sauver JL, Kurland MJ, Sy LS. A population-based study of the incidence and complication rates of herpes zoster before zoster vaccine introduction. Mayo Clin Proc 2007; 82:1341–1349.
  8. Yawn BP, Wollan PC, Kurland MJ, St. Sauver JL, Saddier P. Herpes zoster recurrences more frequent than previously reported. Mayo Clin Proc 2011; 86:88–93.
  9. Chen SY, Suaya JA, Li Q, et al. Incidence of herpes zoster in patients with altered immune function. Infection 2014; 42:325–334.
  10. Edmunds WJ, Brisson M. The effect of vaccination on the epidemiology of varicella zoster virus. J Infect 2002; 44:211–219.
  11. Hales CM, Harpaz R, Joesoef MR, Bialek SR. Examination of links between herpes zoster incidence and childhood varicella vaccination. Ann Intern Med 2013; 159:739–745.
  12. Leung J, Harpaz R, Molinari NA, Jumaan A, Zhou F. Herpes zoster incidence among insured persons in the United States, 1993-2006: evaluation of impact of varicella vaccination. Clin Infect Dis 2011; 52:332–340.
  13. Rimland D, Moanna A. Increasing incidence of herpes zoster among veterans. Clin Infect Dis 2010; 50:1000–1005.
  14. Jumaan AO, Yu O, Jackson LA, Bohlke K, Galil K, Seward JF. Incidence of herpes zoster, before and after varicella-vaccination-associated decreases in the incidence of varicella, 1992-2002. J Infect Dis 2005; 191:2002–2007.
  15. Plotkin SA, Starr SE, Connor K, Morton D. Zoster in normal children after varicella vaccine. J Infect Dis 1989; 159:1000–1001.
  16. Oster G, Harding G, Dukes E, Edelsberg J, Cleary PD. Pain, medication use, and health-related quality of life in older persons with postherpetic neuralgia: results from a population-based survey. J Pain 2005; 6:356–363.
  17. Johnson RW, Bouhassira D, Kassianos G, Leplege A, Schmader KE, Weinke T. The impact of herpes zoster and post-herpetic neuralgia on quality-of-life. BMC Med 2010; 8:37.
  18. Harpaz R, Ortega-Sanchez IR, Seward JF; Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices (ACIP) Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). Prevention of herpes zoster: recommendations of the Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices (ACIP). MMWR Recomm Rep 2008; 57:1–30.
  19. Panatto D, Bragazzi NL, Rizzitelli E, et al. Evaluation of the economic burden of herpes zoster (HZ) infection. Hum Vaccin Immunother 2015; 11:245–262.
  20. Yawn BP, Itzler RF, Wollan PC, Pellissier JM, Sy LS, Saddier P. Health care utilization and cost burden of herpes zoster in a community population. Mayo Clin Proc 2009; 84:787–794.
  21. Dworkin RH, White R, O’Connor AB, Hawkins K. Health care expenditure burden of persisting herpes zoster pain. Pain Med 2008; 9:348–353.
  22. White RR, Lenhart G, Singhal PK, et al. Incremental 1-year medical resource utilization and costs for patients with herpes zoster from a set of US health plans. Pharmacoeconomics 2009; 27:781–792.
  23. Insinga RP, Itzler RF, Pellissier JM. Acute/subacute herpes zoster: healthcare resource utilisation and costs in a group of US health plans. Pharmacoeconomics 2007; 25:155–169.
  24. Singhal PK, Makin C, Pellissier J, Sy L, White R, Saddier P. Work and productivity loss related to herpes zoster. J Med Econ 2011; 14:639–645.
  25. US Bureau of Labor Statistics. Labor force statistics from the current population survey. www.bls.gov/web/empsit/cpseea13.htm. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  26. US Bureau of Labor Statistic. Occupational employment statistics. www.bls.gov/oes/current/oes_nat.htm. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  27. Oxman MN, Levin MJ, Johnson GR, et al; Shingles Prevention Study Group. A vaccine to prevent herpes zoster and postherpetic neuralgia in older adults. N Engl J Med 2005; 352:2271–2284.
  28. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). FDA clinical briefing document for Merck & Co., Inc. Zoster vaccine live (Oka/Merck) Zostavax. www.fda.gov/ohrms/dockets/ac/05/briefing/5-4198b2_1.pdf. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  29. Simberkoff MS, Arbeit RD, Johnson GR, et al; Shingles Prevention Study Group. Safety of herpes zoster vaccine in the shingles prevention study: a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2010; 152:545–554.
  30. Schmader KE, Oxman MN, Levin MJ, et al; Shingles Prevention Study Group. Persistence of the efficacy of zoster vaccine in the shingles prevention study and the short-term persistence substudy. Clin Infect Dis 2012; 55:1320–1328.
  31. Morrison VA, Johnson GR, Schmader KE, et al; Shingles Prevention Study Group. Long-term persistence of zoster vaccine efficacy. Clin Infect Dis 2015; 60:900–909.
  32. Levin MJ, Schmader KE, Pang L, et al. Cellular and humoral responses to a second dose of herpes zoster vaccine administered 10 years after the first dose among older adults. J Infect Dis 2016; 213:14–22.
  33. Schmader KE, Levin MJ, Gnann JW Jr, et al. Efficacy, safety, and tolerability of herpes zoster vaccine in persons aged 50-59 years. Clin Infect Dis 2012; 54:922–928.
  34. Hales CM, Harpaz R, Ortega-Sanchez I, Bialek SR; Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). Update on recommendations for use of herpes zoster vaccine. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2014; 63:729–731.
  35. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). Surveillance of vaccination coverage among adult populations—United States, 2014. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2016; 65(1):1–36. Accessed April 12, 2017.
  36. Williams WW, Lu PJ, O’Halloran A, et al; Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). Vaccination coverage among adults, excluding influenza vaccination—United States, 2013. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2015; 64:95–102.
  37. Oxman MN. Zoster vaccine: current status and future prospects. Clin Infect Dis 2010; 51:197–213.
  38. Hurley LP, Lindley MC, Harpaz R, et al. Barriers to the use of herpes zoster vaccine. Ann Intern Med 2010; 152:555–560.
  39. Lu PJ, Euler GL, Jumaan AO, Harpaz R. Herpes zoster vaccination among adults aged 60 years or older in the United States, 2007: uptake of the first new vaccine to target seniors. Vaccine 2009; 27:882–887.
  40. Hurley LP, Harpaz R, Daley MF, et al. National survey of primary care physicians regarding herpes zoster and the herpes zoster vaccine. J Infect Dis 2008; 197(suppl 2):S216–S223.
  41. Joon Lee T, Hayes S, Cummings DM, et al. Herpes zoster knowledge, prevalence, and vaccination rate by race. J Am Board Fam Med 2013; 26:45–51.
  42. Opstelten W, van Essen GA, Hak E. Determinants of non-compliance with herpes zoster vaccination in the community-dwelling elderly. Vaccine 2009; 27:192–196.
  43. Loo TS, Davis RB, Lipsitz LA, et al. Electronic medical record reminders and panel management to improve primary care of elderly patients. Arch Intern Med 2011; 171:1552–1558.
  44. Rhew DC, Glassman PA, Goetz MB. Improving pneumococcal vaccine rates. Nurse protocols versus clinical reminders. J Gen Intern Med 1999; 14:351–356.
  45. Chaudhry R, Schietel SM, North F, Dejesus R, Kesman RL, Stroebel RJ. Improving rates of herpes zoster vaccination with a clinical decision support system in a primary care practice. J Eval Clin Pract 2013; 19:263–266.
  46. Otsuka SH, Tayal NH, Porter K, Embi PJ, Beatty SJ. Improving herpes zoster vaccination rates through use of a clinical pharmacist and a personal health record. Am J Med 2013; 126:832.e1–832.e6.
  47. Taitel MS, Fensterheim LE, Cannon AE, Cohen ES. Improving pneumococcal and herpes zoster vaccination uptake: expanding pharmacist privileges. Am J Manag Care 2013; 19:e309–e313.
  48. Kawai K, Preaud E, Baron-Papillon F, Largeron N, Acosta CJ. Cost-effectiveness of vaccination against herpes zoster and postherpetic neuralgia: a critical review. Vaccine 2014; 32:1645–1653.
  49. Szucs TD, Pfeil AM. A systematic review of the cost effectiveness of herpes zoster vaccination. Pharmacoeconomics 2013; 31:125–136.
  50. Le P, Rothberg MB. Cost-effectiveness of herpes zoster vaccine for persons aged 50 years. Ann Intern Med 2015; 163:489–497.
  51. Le P, Rothberg MB. Determining the optimal age to vaccinate against herpes zoster: a cost-effectiveness analysis. Society for Medical Decision Making 37th Annual North American Meeting. St. Louis, MO; October 18-21, 2015.
  52. Cohen JI. Clinical practice: herpes zoster. N Engl J Med 2013; 369:255–263.
  53. Lal H, Cunningham AL, Godeaux O, et al; ZOE-50 Study Group. Efficacy of an adjuvanted herpes zoster subunit vaccine in older adults. N Engl J Med 2015; 372:2087–2096.
  54. GlaxoSmithKline plc. GSK’s candidate shingles vaccine demonstrates 90% efficacy against shingles in people 70 years of age and over. www.gsk.com/en-gb/media/press-releases/gsk-s-candidate-shingles-vaccine-demonstrates-90-efficacy-against-shingles-in-people-70-years-of-age-and-over/. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  55. Reed SG, Orr MT, Fox CB. Key roles of adjuvants in modern vaccines. Nat Med 2013; 19:1597–1608.
  56. Russell AF, Parrino J, Fisher CL Jr, et al. Safety, tolerability, and immunogenicity of zoster vaccine in subjects on chronic/maintenance corticosteroids. Vaccine 2015; 33:3129–3134.
  57. Hata A, Asanuma H, Rinki M, et al. Use of an inactivated varicella vaccine in recipients of hematopoietic-cell transplants. N Engl J Med 2002; 347:26–34.
  58. Mullane KM, Winston DJ, Wertheim MS, et al. Safety and immunogenicity of heat-treated zoster vaccine (ZVHT) in immunocompromised adults. J Infect Dis 2013; 208:1375–1385.
  59. Stadtmauer EA, Sullivan KM, Marty FM, et al. A phase 1/2 study of an adjuvanted varicella-zoster virus subunit vaccine in autologous hematopoietic cell transplant recipients. Blood 2014; 124:2921–2929.
  60. Berkowitz EM, Moyle G, Stellbrink HJ, et al. Safety and immunogenicity of an adjuvanted herpes zoster subunit candidate vaccine in HIV-infected adults: a phase 1/2a randomized, placebo-controlled study. J Infect Dis 2015; 211:1279–1287.
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Page Number
359-366
Page Number
359-366
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Preventing herpes zoster through vaccination: New developments
Display Headline
Preventing herpes zoster through vaccination: New developments
Legacy Keywords
herpes zoster, HZ, postherpetic neuralgia, PHN, vaccination, shingles, varicella-zoster virus, VZV, Zostavax, Phuc Le, Camille Sabella, Michael Rothberg
Legacy Keywords
herpes zoster, HZ, postherpetic neuralgia, PHN, vaccination, shingles, varicella-zoster virus, VZV, Zostavax, Phuc Le, Camille Sabella, Michael Rothberg
Sections
Inside the Article

KEY POINTS

  • HZ continues to be an important public health problem, with substantial morbidity and economic impact. Because of the lack of effective treatment, vaccination provides the best strategy for disease mitigation.
  • Physicians can reduce the impact of HZ by educating patients about its complications and recommending immunization for all patients age 60 and older. Patients can protect themselves by seeking vaccination.
  • Vaccine protection wanes completely after 10 years, and physicians should be prepared to offer a booster dose should the Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices issue such recommendations.
  • Newer vaccines offer promise for greater efficacy, especially for the elderly. For immunocompromised patients, a safe and effective vaccine may be available in the near future.
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Use ProPublica
Article PDF Media

Thoughtful vaccination

Article Type
Changed
Display Headline
Thoughtful vaccination

Few in mainstream medicine doubt the efficacy of vaccination and the net positive value of a thoughtful vaccination policy. We have witnessed within a professional lifetime the virtual eradication, at least regionally, of a number of previously devastating infectious diseases including polio, smallpox, pertussis, and measles. With growing understanding of disease mechanisms, the potential value of vaccination has expanded to include preventing sequelae of certain infections and malignancy—a holy grail in oncology, the true prevention of cancer. Sporadic local resistance to uniform vaccination against measles has resulted in geographic reappearance of the disease, providing further support for a uniform approach to vaccination against communicable diseases, with some potential to opt out, perhaps with associated societal repercussions for those who do so.

For most clinicians, certainly those of us dealing with chronically ill or immunosuppressed patients, the decision to recommend annual influenza vaccination and pneumococcal vaccinations per guidelines is an easy one. Vaccination against certain infections provides some protection for the individual patient and for the population, contributing to “herd immunity” and helping to protect against the occurrence of pandemics. But this is not the case for all vaccines. For some vaccines the issues of immunity and vaccination are more individual and complicated and warrant more education, reflection, and conversation.

The vaccine to protect against human papillomavirus is effective at reducing the incidence of cervical and anal cancers triggered by infection with certain strains of human papillomavirus. The viral infection itself is not immediately life-threatening. Thus, patients (and their parents) are asked to consider vaccination against a sexually transmitted virus (before sexual transmission of infection) to prevent a possible malignancy later in life. This decision can create social angst. Perhaps less socially challenging, but medically more complicated, is vaccination against the hepatitis B virus (HBV). HBV is also sexually transmissible, but the source in many patients infected with this virus is unclear. The HBV vaccine helps protect against clinically meaningful hepatitis and chronic liver disease from HBV and also will reduce the occurrence of HBV-associated hepatocellular carcinoma and progression of cirrhosis in patients coinfected with hepatitis C virus.

More complex yet is vaccination against the varicella-zoster virus (VZV) to reduce the likelihood of shingles and its possible consequence, postherpetic neuralgia. Le, Sabella, and Rothberg, in this issue of the Journal, review clinical and public health challenges affecting the use of this vaccine.

We are almost all exposed to this virus as children, through natural infection (chickenpox) or vaccination; many infections are seemingly subclinical. My older son had the distinct misfortune of getting chickenpox in a quite memorable way, developing a concentrated collection of the pruritic vesicles underneath a newly placed arm cast. Whether we remember the initial infection or not, VZV sets up housekeeping and lies dormant for decades within sensory neurons. Decades later, it may erupt as shingles along the distribution of the infected nerves with characteristic painful vesicles, sometimes with persistent, extremely painful, and debilitating residua within the same dermatomal distribution: postherpetic neuralgia. The triggers for this fairly common scenario are only generically understood and include waning cellular immunity attributed to aging, malignancy, immunosuppressive medications, human immunodeficiency virus, and perhaps stress and depression.

The zoster vaccine is unique in that it is given to bolster already present cellular immunity to prevent clinical recurrence of the earlier infection, decades after the virus has been dormant—not, as for the other vaccines noted above, to prevent primary infection. It doesn’t matter if the patient has already experienced an episode of shingles. The currently available vaccine is a live-attenuated strain (Oka) of VZV. Another vaccine in clinical testing uses isolated viral components with adjuvant and thus eliminates current concerns of giving the live-attenuated vaccine to immunosuppressed and elderly patients, those who may benefit the most from it.

Fortunately, it seems that even significantly immunosuppressed and elderly patients tolerate the current vaccine, but at present it is suggested that these groups not receive the vaccine, and vaccination rates in these patients is low. Hopefully, additional data will accumulate regarding the safety of the vaccine and will permit its more widespread use within these patient groups, or a replacement “dead” vaccine will become available.

As Le et al nicely discuss, the current vaccine efficacy wanes over about 10 years, and then a booster vaccine should be considered, but there are few data to provide safety and efficacy outcome measures from patients who received a booster vaccination. The potential need to receive a booster injection after about a decade, the demonstrated greater efficacy against zoster when the initial vaccination is provided to patients ages 60 through 69 than in those over 70, and the lower absolute impact when given to patients ages 50 through 59 (baseline zoster incidence increases with age) should enter into the conversation with patients as to when they should receive the vaccine.

Additionally, there are the extremely provocative and as yet unanswered questions surrounding the implications of vaccination if VZV infection is a trigger of inflammatory vascular diseases such as giant cell arteritis in the elderly, as was proposed by the late Dr. Don Gilden.1

And yes, I did get the vaccine. I was 64 at the time.

References
  1. Gilden D, Nagel MA. Varicella zoster virus triggers the immunopathology of giant cell arteritis. Curr Opin Rheumatol 2016; 28:376–382.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
340-341
Legacy Keywords
Vaccination, immunization, human papillomavirus, HPV, hepatitis B virus, HBV, varicella-zoster virus, VZV, shingles, postherpetic neuralgia, Brian Mandell
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information
Author and Disclosure Information
Article PDF
Article PDF

Few in mainstream medicine doubt the efficacy of vaccination and the net positive value of a thoughtful vaccination policy. We have witnessed within a professional lifetime the virtual eradication, at least regionally, of a number of previously devastating infectious diseases including polio, smallpox, pertussis, and measles. With growing understanding of disease mechanisms, the potential value of vaccination has expanded to include preventing sequelae of certain infections and malignancy—a holy grail in oncology, the true prevention of cancer. Sporadic local resistance to uniform vaccination against measles has resulted in geographic reappearance of the disease, providing further support for a uniform approach to vaccination against communicable diseases, with some potential to opt out, perhaps with associated societal repercussions for those who do so.

For most clinicians, certainly those of us dealing with chronically ill or immunosuppressed patients, the decision to recommend annual influenza vaccination and pneumococcal vaccinations per guidelines is an easy one. Vaccination against certain infections provides some protection for the individual patient and for the population, contributing to “herd immunity” and helping to protect against the occurrence of pandemics. But this is not the case for all vaccines. For some vaccines the issues of immunity and vaccination are more individual and complicated and warrant more education, reflection, and conversation.

The vaccine to protect against human papillomavirus is effective at reducing the incidence of cervical and anal cancers triggered by infection with certain strains of human papillomavirus. The viral infection itself is not immediately life-threatening. Thus, patients (and their parents) are asked to consider vaccination against a sexually transmitted virus (before sexual transmission of infection) to prevent a possible malignancy later in life. This decision can create social angst. Perhaps less socially challenging, but medically more complicated, is vaccination against the hepatitis B virus (HBV). HBV is also sexually transmissible, but the source in many patients infected with this virus is unclear. The HBV vaccine helps protect against clinically meaningful hepatitis and chronic liver disease from HBV and also will reduce the occurrence of HBV-associated hepatocellular carcinoma and progression of cirrhosis in patients coinfected with hepatitis C virus.

More complex yet is vaccination against the varicella-zoster virus (VZV) to reduce the likelihood of shingles and its possible consequence, postherpetic neuralgia. Le, Sabella, and Rothberg, in this issue of the Journal, review clinical and public health challenges affecting the use of this vaccine.

We are almost all exposed to this virus as children, through natural infection (chickenpox) or vaccination; many infections are seemingly subclinical. My older son had the distinct misfortune of getting chickenpox in a quite memorable way, developing a concentrated collection of the pruritic vesicles underneath a newly placed arm cast. Whether we remember the initial infection or not, VZV sets up housekeeping and lies dormant for decades within sensory neurons. Decades later, it may erupt as shingles along the distribution of the infected nerves with characteristic painful vesicles, sometimes with persistent, extremely painful, and debilitating residua within the same dermatomal distribution: postherpetic neuralgia. The triggers for this fairly common scenario are only generically understood and include waning cellular immunity attributed to aging, malignancy, immunosuppressive medications, human immunodeficiency virus, and perhaps stress and depression.

The zoster vaccine is unique in that it is given to bolster already present cellular immunity to prevent clinical recurrence of the earlier infection, decades after the virus has been dormant—not, as for the other vaccines noted above, to prevent primary infection. It doesn’t matter if the patient has already experienced an episode of shingles. The currently available vaccine is a live-attenuated strain (Oka) of VZV. Another vaccine in clinical testing uses isolated viral components with adjuvant and thus eliminates current concerns of giving the live-attenuated vaccine to immunosuppressed and elderly patients, those who may benefit the most from it.

Fortunately, it seems that even significantly immunosuppressed and elderly patients tolerate the current vaccine, but at present it is suggested that these groups not receive the vaccine, and vaccination rates in these patients is low. Hopefully, additional data will accumulate regarding the safety of the vaccine and will permit its more widespread use within these patient groups, or a replacement “dead” vaccine will become available.

As Le et al nicely discuss, the current vaccine efficacy wanes over about 10 years, and then a booster vaccine should be considered, but there are few data to provide safety and efficacy outcome measures from patients who received a booster vaccination. The potential need to receive a booster injection after about a decade, the demonstrated greater efficacy against zoster when the initial vaccination is provided to patients ages 60 through 69 than in those over 70, and the lower absolute impact when given to patients ages 50 through 59 (baseline zoster incidence increases with age) should enter into the conversation with patients as to when they should receive the vaccine.

Additionally, there are the extremely provocative and as yet unanswered questions surrounding the implications of vaccination if VZV infection is a trigger of inflammatory vascular diseases such as giant cell arteritis in the elderly, as was proposed by the late Dr. Don Gilden.1

And yes, I did get the vaccine. I was 64 at the time.

Few in mainstream medicine doubt the efficacy of vaccination and the net positive value of a thoughtful vaccination policy. We have witnessed within a professional lifetime the virtual eradication, at least regionally, of a number of previously devastating infectious diseases including polio, smallpox, pertussis, and measles. With growing understanding of disease mechanisms, the potential value of vaccination has expanded to include preventing sequelae of certain infections and malignancy—a holy grail in oncology, the true prevention of cancer. Sporadic local resistance to uniform vaccination against measles has resulted in geographic reappearance of the disease, providing further support for a uniform approach to vaccination against communicable diseases, with some potential to opt out, perhaps with associated societal repercussions for those who do so.

For most clinicians, certainly those of us dealing with chronically ill or immunosuppressed patients, the decision to recommend annual influenza vaccination and pneumococcal vaccinations per guidelines is an easy one. Vaccination against certain infections provides some protection for the individual patient and for the population, contributing to “herd immunity” and helping to protect against the occurrence of pandemics. But this is not the case for all vaccines. For some vaccines the issues of immunity and vaccination are more individual and complicated and warrant more education, reflection, and conversation.

The vaccine to protect against human papillomavirus is effective at reducing the incidence of cervical and anal cancers triggered by infection with certain strains of human papillomavirus. The viral infection itself is not immediately life-threatening. Thus, patients (and their parents) are asked to consider vaccination against a sexually transmitted virus (before sexual transmission of infection) to prevent a possible malignancy later in life. This decision can create social angst. Perhaps less socially challenging, but medically more complicated, is vaccination against the hepatitis B virus (HBV). HBV is also sexually transmissible, but the source in many patients infected with this virus is unclear. The HBV vaccine helps protect against clinically meaningful hepatitis and chronic liver disease from HBV and also will reduce the occurrence of HBV-associated hepatocellular carcinoma and progression of cirrhosis in patients coinfected with hepatitis C virus.

More complex yet is vaccination against the varicella-zoster virus (VZV) to reduce the likelihood of shingles and its possible consequence, postherpetic neuralgia. Le, Sabella, and Rothberg, in this issue of the Journal, review clinical and public health challenges affecting the use of this vaccine.

We are almost all exposed to this virus as children, through natural infection (chickenpox) or vaccination; many infections are seemingly subclinical. My older son had the distinct misfortune of getting chickenpox in a quite memorable way, developing a concentrated collection of the pruritic vesicles underneath a newly placed arm cast. Whether we remember the initial infection or not, VZV sets up housekeeping and lies dormant for decades within sensory neurons. Decades later, it may erupt as shingles along the distribution of the infected nerves with characteristic painful vesicles, sometimes with persistent, extremely painful, and debilitating residua within the same dermatomal distribution: postherpetic neuralgia. The triggers for this fairly common scenario are only generically understood and include waning cellular immunity attributed to aging, malignancy, immunosuppressive medications, human immunodeficiency virus, and perhaps stress and depression.

The zoster vaccine is unique in that it is given to bolster already present cellular immunity to prevent clinical recurrence of the earlier infection, decades after the virus has been dormant—not, as for the other vaccines noted above, to prevent primary infection. It doesn’t matter if the patient has already experienced an episode of shingles. The currently available vaccine is a live-attenuated strain (Oka) of VZV. Another vaccine in clinical testing uses isolated viral components with adjuvant and thus eliminates current concerns of giving the live-attenuated vaccine to immunosuppressed and elderly patients, those who may benefit the most from it.

Fortunately, it seems that even significantly immunosuppressed and elderly patients tolerate the current vaccine, but at present it is suggested that these groups not receive the vaccine, and vaccination rates in these patients is low. Hopefully, additional data will accumulate regarding the safety of the vaccine and will permit its more widespread use within these patient groups, or a replacement “dead” vaccine will become available.

As Le et al nicely discuss, the current vaccine efficacy wanes over about 10 years, and then a booster vaccine should be considered, but there are few data to provide safety and efficacy outcome measures from patients who received a booster vaccination. The potential need to receive a booster injection after about a decade, the demonstrated greater efficacy against zoster when the initial vaccination is provided to patients ages 60 through 69 than in those over 70, and the lower absolute impact when given to patients ages 50 through 59 (baseline zoster incidence increases with age) should enter into the conversation with patients as to when they should receive the vaccine.

Additionally, there are the extremely provocative and as yet unanswered questions surrounding the implications of vaccination if VZV infection is a trigger of inflammatory vascular diseases such as giant cell arteritis in the elderly, as was proposed by the late Dr. Don Gilden.1

And yes, I did get the vaccine. I was 64 at the time.

References
  1. Gilden D, Nagel MA. Varicella zoster virus triggers the immunopathology of giant cell arteritis. Curr Opin Rheumatol 2016; 28:376–382.
References
  1. Gilden D, Nagel MA. Varicella zoster virus triggers the immunopathology of giant cell arteritis. Curr Opin Rheumatol 2016; 28:376–382.
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Page Number
340-341
Page Number
340-341
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Thoughtful vaccination
Display Headline
Thoughtful vaccination
Legacy Keywords
Vaccination, immunization, human papillomavirus, HPV, hepatitis B virus, HBV, varicella-zoster virus, VZV, shingles, postherpetic neuralgia, Brian Mandell
Legacy Keywords
Vaccination, immunization, human papillomavirus, HPV, hepatitis B virus, HBV, varicella-zoster virus, VZV, shingles, postherpetic neuralgia, Brian Mandell
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Article PDF Media

Diabetes control during Ramadan fasting

Article Type
Changed
Display Headline
Diabetes control during Ramadan fasting

An estimated 50 million patients with diabetes worldwide practice daily fasting during Ramadan, the ninth month of the Islamic calendar, which lasts 29 or 30 days. In the United States, Ramadan begins this year at sundown on Friday, May 26, and ends at sundown on Sunday, June 25.

See related editorial

According to the Multi-Country Retrospective Observational Study of the Management and Outcomes of Patients With Diabetes During Ramadan, conducted in 13 countries, 94.2% of Muslim diabetic patients fasted at least 15 days, and 67.6% of these fasted every day.1

The daily fasting period, which may extend from 14 to 18 hours, starts before sunrise and ends after sunset. The meal taken before sunrise is called Suhur, and the meal after sunset is called Iftar. The fast requires abstaining from eating, drinking, sexual activity, medications, and smoking. For diabetic patients, this poses medical challenges, increasing the risk of acute metabolic complications.

The goal of caring for diabetic patients during Ramadan fasting is to help them to fast without major complications and to empower them to modify their lifestyle in order to achieve this goal.

POSSIBLE METABOLIC COMPLICATIONS

Metabolic complications during Ramadan fasting include hypoglycemia, hyperglycemia, diabetic ketoacidosis, dehydration, and thrombosis.

Hypoglycemia

For patients with type 1 diabetes, fasting increases the risk of hypoglycemia 4.7 times, and the risk is 7.5 times higher for patients with type 2 diabetes.2 However, this is often underreported, as mild to moderate hypoglycemia does not usually require medical assistance.

Precipitating factors include long fasting hours, missing the Suhur meal, and failure to modify drug dosage and timing.

Hyperglycemia

The risk of severe hyperglycemia during fasting is 3.2 times higher in patients with type 1 diabetes and 5 times higher in those with type 2 diabetes.2 Precipitating factors include lack of diet control during the Iftar meal and excessive reduction in the dosage of diabetes medications due to fear of hypoglycemia.

Diabetic ketoacidosis

Ketoacidosis can be precipitated by a lack of diet control during the Iftar meal, excessive reduction in the dosage of insulin due to fear of hypoglycemia, acute stress, and illness or infection.

Dehydration and thrombosis

Patients can become dehydrated during long fasting hours in especially hot weather, by sweating during physical activity, and by osmotic diuresis in poorly controlled diabetes.

Diabetes is a procoagulant condition, and dehydration increases the risk of thrombosis.

OVERALL MANAGEMENT GOALS DURING RAMADAN FASTING

Important aspects of managing diabetes during Ramadan fasting are:

  • The pre-Ramadan evaluation and risk stratification
  • Promoting patient awareness with Ramadan-focused diabetes education
  • Providing instruction on dietary modification
  • Modification of the dosage and timing of diabetes medication
  • Encouraging frequent monitoring of blood glucose levels
  • Advising the patient when to break the fast
  • Managing complications.

PRE-RAMADAN MEDICAL EVALUATION AND RISK STRATIFICATION

All diabetic patients who fast during Ramadan should undergo an evaluation 1 or 2 months before the start of Ramadan to determine their level of diabetes control and the presence of acute and chronic complications of diabetes and other comorbid conditions. Also important is to determine the patient’s social circumstances, ie, knowledge about diabetes, socioeconomic factors, religious beliefs, educational status, diabetes self-management skills, and family support in case of hypoglycemia or complications.

The evaluation helps to determine the patient’s risk of diabetes-related complications from Ramadan fasting, which is categorized as very high, high, or moderate/low according to the criteria of the International Diabetes Federation (Table 1).3 Patients should be advised as to the feasibility of fasting based on this risk categorization.

Even though the recommendation is to avoid fasting if the risk is very high or high, many patients fast. But patients should be advised about Islamic regulations exempting people from fasting (Table 2).4

RAMADAN-FOCUSED DIABETES EDUCATION

Improving the patient’s awareness of the risks of Ramadan fasting reduces the chance of complications. Education should include information on diet and exercise, changes in the timing and dosing of medications, signs and symptoms of hypoglycemia and hyperglycemia, the importance of monitoring blood glucose levels on fasting days, and the importance of breaking the fast in case of complications.5

 

 

DIET AND EXERCISE

All diabetic patients should be encouraged to remember to eat the predawn meal on fasting days. They should maintain a balanced diet, with complex carbohydrates with slow energy release for the predawn meal and simple carbohydrates for the sunset meal. Foods with a low glycemic index and high fiber content are recommended, and patients should be advised to avoid saturated fats and to drink plenty of fluids between sunset and sunrise to avoid dehydration.6

Diabetic patients can perform their usual physical activity, including moderate exercise, but should avoid excessive physical activity especially toward evening hours to prevent hypoglycemia.

Some patients may decide not to monitor their blood glucose as they believe that pricking the finger for blood sugar testing breaks the fast.7 Patients should be advised that this is a misconception.

ADJUSTING DIABETES MEDICATIONS

Oral diabetes drugs

Drugs such as metformin, alpha glucosidase inhibitors, thiazolidinediones, the short-acting insulin secretagogue nateglinide, dipeptidyl peptidase 4 inhibitors (eg, sitagliptin), and glucagon-like peptide 1 receptor agonists are associated with a lower risk of hypoglycemia and can be used during Ramadan fasting without significant changes in the daily dose (Table 3).8

Sulfonylureas carry a higher risk of hypoglycemia and should be used cautiously during fasting, with appropriate modification in dose and timing.9,10

Sodium-glucose cotransporter 2 inhibitors, when not combined with insulin or sulfonylureas, carry a lower risk of hypoglycemia, but during Ramadan fasting there is an increased risk of dehydration, urinary tract infection, and postural hypotension since fluids cannot be taken during fasting hours.

Dipeptidyl peptidase 4 inhibitors carry a low risk of hypoglycemia and can be used during Ramadan without dosing modification. Glucagon-like peptide 1 agonists also can be used without adjusting the dosage.11

Insulins

Insulin treatment is associated with a higher risk of hypoglycemia during Ramadan fasting.12 During fasting, the risk of hypoglycemia from premixed insulin can be minimized by changing to a multiple-dose regimen involving a basal insulin and short-acting insulin before meals, with adjustment of the short- acting insulin dose based on the anticipated carbohydrate intake for each meal.13

Patients taking premixed insulin preparations consisting of 70% intermediate-acting or long-acting insulin and 30% short-acting insulin should change to a 50/50 preparation during Ramadan fasting to reduce hypoglycemic risk and improve glycemic control; taking more of the fast-acting component controls postprandial hyperglycemia, and taking less of the intermediate or long-acting component minimizes the risk of hypoglycemia during fasting hours.14,15

Insulin analogues carry a lower risk of hypoglycemia than human insulin. Compared with a human insulin 70/30 preparation, an analogue premix containing 75% neutral protamine lispro and 25% insulin lispro resulted in better glycemic control during Ramadan fasting.16 This could be related to the pharmacodynamics of low-ratio premix analogues, as well as to the mealtime flexibility of analogue insulin, as the injections of the 75/25 mix were given immediately before the morning and evening meals. Insulin analogues are also less likely to cause postprandial hypoglycemia.16

A multiple-dose insulin regimen involving a long-acting basal insulin (eg, glargine, detemir, degludec) and a short-acting insulin (eg, glulisine, aspart, lispro) before meals is preferred in view of better glycemic control and lower risk of hypoglycemia.17

Use of an insulin pump during Ramadan is associated with a reduced risk of hypoglycemia.18 In patients with an insulin pump, the rate of basal insulin must be reduced during daytime, and the postprandial bolus of insulin must be increased after breaking the fast.

FREQUENT MONITORING OF BLOOD GLUCOSE DURING FASTING

Frequent monitoring reduces the risk of both hypoglycemia and hyperglycemia and helps control blood sugar levels during Ramadan fasting. As mentioned above, pricking the finger for blood sugar testing during fasting hours does not break the fast, and this should be emphasized during Ramadan-focused diabetes education.

The exact frequency of blood sugar testing is not defined. In patients with well-controlled diabetes without complications, testing once or twice a day is enough. Patients with poorly controlled diabetes and those with complications should test more often.

ADVICE REGARDING WHEN TO BREAK THE FAST

If signs or symptoms of hypoglycemia develop, the patient should break the fast in order to avoid serious complications. This is acceptable under Islamic law.3,19–21

MANAGEMENT OF COMPLICATIONS

Management of diabetic complications in patients during Ramadan fasting is similar to that for other diabetic patients and includes management of hypo- and hyperglycemia, diabetic ketoacidosis, and dehydration.

References
  1. Babineaux SM, Toaima D, Boye KS, et al. Multi-country retrospective observational study of the management and outcomes of patients with type 2 diabetes during Ramadan in 2010 (CREED). Diabet Med 2015; 32:819–828.
  2. Salti I, Benard E, Detournay B, et al; EPIDIAR Study Group. A population-based study of diabetes and its characteristics during the fasting month of Ramadan in 13 countries: results of the Epidemiology of Diabetes and Ramadan 1422/2001 (EPIDIAR) study. Diabetes Care 2004; 27:2306–2311.
  3. International Diabetes Federation and the DAR International Alliance. Diabetes and Ramadan: Practical Guidelines. Brussels, Belgium: International Diabetes Federation, 2016. www.idf.org/guidelines/diabetes-in-ramadan and www.daralliance.org. Accessed March 8, 2017.
  4. Al-Arouj M, Bouguerra R, Buse J, et al. Recommendations for management of diabetes during Ramadan. Diabetes Care 2005; 28:2305–2311.
  5. Masood SN, Masood Y, Hakim R, Alvi SFD, Shera AS. Ramadan fasting related awareness, practices and experiences of a representative group of urban Pakistani Diabetics. Pak J Med Sci 2012; 28:432–436.
  6. Bravis V, Hui E, Salih S, Mehar S, Hassanein M, Devendra D. Ramadan education and awareness in diabetes (READ) programme for Muslims with type 2 diabetes who fast during Ramadan. Diabet Med 2010; 27:327–331.
  7. Masood SN, Sheikh MA, Masood Y, Hakeem R, Shera AS. Beliefs of people with diabetes about skin prick during Ramadan fasting. Diabetes Care 2014; 37:e68–e69.
  8. Aravind S, Ismail SB, Balamurugan R, et al. Hypoglycemia in patients with type 2 diabetes from India and Malaysia treated with sitagliptin or a sulfonylurea during Ramadan: a randomized, pragmatic study. Curr Med Res Opin 2012; 28:1289–1296.
  9. Glimepiride in Ramadan (GLIRA) Study Group. The efficacy and safety of glimepiride in the management of type 2 diabetes in Muslim patients during Ramadan. Diabetes Care 2005; 28:421–422.
  10. Hassanein M, Abdallah K, Schweizer A. A double-blind, randomized trial, including frequent patient-physician contacts and Ramadan-focused advice, assessing vildagliptin and gliclazide in patients with type 2 diabetes fasting during Ramadan: the STEADFAST study. Vasc Health Risk Manag 2014; 10:319–326.
  11. Brady EM, Davies MJ, Gray LJ, et al. A randomized controlled trial comparing the GLP-1 receptor agonist liraglutide to a sulphonylurea as add on to metformin in patients with established type 2 diabetes during Ramadan: the Treat 4 Ramadan trial. Diabetes Obes Metab 2014; 16:527–536.
  12. Ibrahim M, Abu Al Magd M, Annabi FA, et al. Recommendations for management of diabetes during Ramadan: update 2015. BMJ Open Diabetes Res Care 2015; 3:e000108.
  13. Kassem HS, Zantout MS, Azar ST. Insulin therapy during Ramadan fast for type 1 diabetes patients. J Endocrinol Invest 2005; 28:802–805.
  14. Hui E, Bravis V, Salih S, Hassanein M, Devendra D. Comparison of humalog mix 50 with human insulin mix 30 in type 2 diabetes patients during Ramadan. Int J Clin Pract 2010; 64:1095–1099.
  15. Hassanein M, Belhadj M, Abdallah K, et al. Management of type 2 diabetes in Ramadan: low ratio premix insulin working group practical advice. Indian J Endocrinol Metab 2014; 18:794–799.
  16. Mattoo V, Milicevic Z, Malone JK, et al; Ramadan Study Group. A comparison of insulin lispro Mix25 and human insulin 30/70 in the treatment of type 2 diabetes during Ramadan. Diabetes Res Clin Pract 2003; 59:137–143.
  17. Pathan MF, Sahay RK, Zargar AH, et al. South Asian Consensus Guideline: use of insulin in diabetes during Ramadan. Indian J Endocrinol Metab 2012; 16:499–502.
  18. Khalil AB, Beshyah SA, Abu Awad SM, et al. Ramadan fasting in diabetes patients on insulin pump therapy augmented by continuous glucose monitoring: an observational real-life study. Diabetes Technol Ther 2012; 14:813–818.
  19. Holy Qur’an 2:195.
  20. Holy Qur’an 4:29.
  21. Bashir MI, Pathan MF, Raza SA. Role of oral hypoglycemic agents in the management of type 2 diabetes mellitus during Ramadan. Indian J Endocrinol Metab 2012; 16:503–507.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Raveendran A. V., MBBS, MD
Specialist in Internal Medicine, Badr Al Samaa, Barka, Sultanate of Oman; Former Assistant Professor of Medicine, Department of Internal Medicine, Govt. Medical College, Manjeri, Malappuram (DT), Kerala, India

Abdul Hamid Zargar, MBBS, MD, DM
Member, Medical Council of India; Member Institute Body, AIIMS, New Delhi, India; Chairman, Independent Ethics Committee Fortis-Escorts Hospital & Research Centre, New Delhi, India; Past-President, Endocrine Society of India; Senior Endocrinologist, Advanced Center for Diabetes and Endocrine Care, National Highway, Gulshan Nagar, Chanapora, Srinigar, India

Address: Raveendran A.V., MBBS, MD, Department of Internal Medicine, Govt. Medical College, Manjeri, Malappuram (DT), Kerala 670631, India; raveendranav@yahoo.co.in

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
352-356
Legacy Keywords
diabetes, Ramadan, fasting, hypoglycemia, hyperglycemia, Muslims, insulin, sulfonylureas, Raveendran AV, Abdul Zargar
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Raveendran A. V., MBBS, MD
Specialist in Internal Medicine, Badr Al Samaa, Barka, Sultanate of Oman; Former Assistant Professor of Medicine, Department of Internal Medicine, Govt. Medical College, Manjeri, Malappuram (DT), Kerala, India

Abdul Hamid Zargar, MBBS, MD, DM
Member, Medical Council of India; Member Institute Body, AIIMS, New Delhi, India; Chairman, Independent Ethics Committee Fortis-Escorts Hospital & Research Centre, New Delhi, India; Past-President, Endocrine Society of India; Senior Endocrinologist, Advanced Center for Diabetes and Endocrine Care, National Highway, Gulshan Nagar, Chanapora, Srinigar, India

Address: Raveendran A.V., MBBS, MD, Department of Internal Medicine, Govt. Medical College, Manjeri, Malappuram (DT), Kerala 670631, India; raveendranav@yahoo.co.in

Author and Disclosure Information

Raveendran A. V., MBBS, MD
Specialist in Internal Medicine, Badr Al Samaa, Barka, Sultanate of Oman; Former Assistant Professor of Medicine, Department of Internal Medicine, Govt. Medical College, Manjeri, Malappuram (DT), Kerala, India

Abdul Hamid Zargar, MBBS, MD, DM
Member, Medical Council of India; Member Institute Body, AIIMS, New Delhi, India; Chairman, Independent Ethics Committee Fortis-Escorts Hospital & Research Centre, New Delhi, India; Past-President, Endocrine Society of India; Senior Endocrinologist, Advanced Center for Diabetes and Endocrine Care, National Highway, Gulshan Nagar, Chanapora, Srinigar, India

Address: Raveendran A.V., MBBS, MD, Department of Internal Medicine, Govt. Medical College, Manjeri, Malappuram (DT), Kerala 670631, India; raveendranav@yahoo.co.in

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

An estimated 50 million patients with diabetes worldwide practice daily fasting during Ramadan, the ninth month of the Islamic calendar, which lasts 29 or 30 days. In the United States, Ramadan begins this year at sundown on Friday, May 26, and ends at sundown on Sunday, June 25.

See related editorial

According to the Multi-Country Retrospective Observational Study of the Management and Outcomes of Patients With Diabetes During Ramadan, conducted in 13 countries, 94.2% of Muslim diabetic patients fasted at least 15 days, and 67.6% of these fasted every day.1

The daily fasting period, which may extend from 14 to 18 hours, starts before sunrise and ends after sunset. The meal taken before sunrise is called Suhur, and the meal after sunset is called Iftar. The fast requires abstaining from eating, drinking, sexual activity, medications, and smoking. For diabetic patients, this poses medical challenges, increasing the risk of acute metabolic complications.

The goal of caring for diabetic patients during Ramadan fasting is to help them to fast without major complications and to empower them to modify their lifestyle in order to achieve this goal.

POSSIBLE METABOLIC COMPLICATIONS

Metabolic complications during Ramadan fasting include hypoglycemia, hyperglycemia, diabetic ketoacidosis, dehydration, and thrombosis.

Hypoglycemia

For patients with type 1 diabetes, fasting increases the risk of hypoglycemia 4.7 times, and the risk is 7.5 times higher for patients with type 2 diabetes.2 However, this is often underreported, as mild to moderate hypoglycemia does not usually require medical assistance.

Precipitating factors include long fasting hours, missing the Suhur meal, and failure to modify drug dosage and timing.

Hyperglycemia

The risk of severe hyperglycemia during fasting is 3.2 times higher in patients with type 1 diabetes and 5 times higher in those with type 2 diabetes.2 Precipitating factors include lack of diet control during the Iftar meal and excessive reduction in the dosage of diabetes medications due to fear of hypoglycemia.

Diabetic ketoacidosis

Ketoacidosis can be precipitated by a lack of diet control during the Iftar meal, excessive reduction in the dosage of insulin due to fear of hypoglycemia, acute stress, and illness or infection.

Dehydration and thrombosis

Patients can become dehydrated during long fasting hours in especially hot weather, by sweating during physical activity, and by osmotic diuresis in poorly controlled diabetes.

Diabetes is a procoagulant condition, and dehydration increases the risk of thrombosis.

OVERALL MANAGEMENT GOALS DURING RAMADAN FASTING

Important aspects of managing diabetes during Ramadan fasting are:

  • The pre-Ramadan evaluation and risk stratification
  • Promoting patient awareness with Ramadan-focused diabetes education
  • Providing instruction on dietary modification
  • Modification of the dosage and timing of diabetes medication
  • Encouraging frequent monitoring of blood glucose levels
  • Advising the patient when to break the fast
  • Managing complications.

PRE-RAMADAN MEDICAL EVALUATION AND RISK STRATIFICATION

All diabetic patients who fast during Ramadan should undergo an evaluation 1 or 2 months before the start of Ramadan to determine their level of diabetes control and the presence of acute and chronic complications of diabetes and other comorbid conditions. Also important is to determine the patient’s social circumstances, ie, knowledge about diabetes, socioeconomic factors, religious beliefs, educational status, diabetes self-management skills, and family support in case of hypoglycemia or complications.

The evaluation helps to determine the patient’s risk of diabetes-related complications from Ramadan fasting, which is categorized as very high, high, or moderate/low according to the criteria of the International Diabetes Federation (Table 1).3 Patients should be advised as to the feasibility of fasting based on this risk categorization.

Even though the recommendation is to avoid fasting if the risk is very high or high, many patients fast. But patients should be advised about Islamic regulations exempting people from fasting (Table 2).4

RAMADAN-FOCUSED DIABETES EDUCATION

Improving the patient’s awareness of the risks of Ramadan fasting reduces the chance of complications. Education should include information on diet and exercise, changes in the timing and dosing of medications, signs and symptoms of hypoglycemia and hyperglycemia, the importance of monitoring blood glucose levels on fasting days, and the importance of breaking the fast in case of complications.5

 

 

DIET AND EXERCISE

All diabetic patients should be encouraged to remember to eat the predawn meal on fasting days. They should maintain a balanced diet, with complex carbohydrates with slow energy release for the predawn meal and simple carbohydrates for the sunset meal. Foods with a low glycemic index and high fiber content are recommended, and patients should be advised to avoid saturated fats and to drink plenty of fluids between sunset and sunrise to avoid dehydration.6

Diabetic patients can perform their usual physical activity, including moderate exercise, but should avoid excessive physical activity especially toward evening hours to prevent hypoglycemia.

Some patients may decide not to monitor their blood glucose as they believe that pricking the finger for blood sugar testing breaks the fast.7 Patients should be advised that this is a misconception.

ADJUSTING DIABETES MEDICATIONS

Oral diabetes drugs

Drugs such as metformin, alpha glucosidase inhibitors, thiazolidinediones, the short-acting insulin secretagogue nateglinide, dipeptidyl peptidase 4 inhibitors (eg, sitagliptin), and glucagon-like peptide 1 receptor agonists are associated with a lower risk of hypoglycemia and can be used during Ramadan fasting without significant changes in the daily dose (Table 3).8

Sulfonylureas carry a higher risk of hypoglycemia and should be used cautiously during fasting, with appropriate modification in dose and timing.9,10

Sodium-glucose cotransporter 2 inhibitors, when not combined with insulin or sulfonylureas, carry a lower risk of hypoglycemia, but during Ramadan fasting there is an increased risk of dehydration, urinary tract infection, and postural hypotension since fluids cannot be taken during fasting hours.

Dipeptidyl peptidase 4 inhibitors carry a low risk of hypoglycemia and can be used during Ramadan without dosing modification. Glucagon-like peptide 1 agonists also can be used without adjusting the dosage.11

Insulins

Insulin treatment is associated with a higher risk of hypoglycemia during Ramadan fasting.12 During fasting, the risk of hypoglycemia from premixed insulin can be minimized by changing to a multiple-dose regimen involving a basal insulin and short-acting insulin before meals, with adjustment of the short- acting insulin dose based on the anticipated carbohydrate intake for each meal.13

Patients taking premixed insulin preparations consisting of 70% intermediate-acting or long-acting insulin and 30% short-acting insulin should change to a 50/50 preparation during Ramadan fasting to reduce hypoglycemic risk and improve glycemic control; taking more of the fast-acting component controls postprandial hyperglycemia, and taking less of the intermediate or long-acting component minimizes the risk of hypoglycemia during fasting hours.14,15

Insulin analogues carry a lower risk of hypoglycemia than human insulin. Compared with a human insulin 70/30 preparation, an analogue premix containing 75% neutral protamine lispro and 25% insulin lispro resulted in better glycemic control during Ramadan fasting.16 This could be related to the pharmacodynamics of low-ratio premix analogues, as well as to the mealtime flexibility of analogue insulin, as the injections of the 75/25 mix were given immediately before the morning and evening meals. Insulin analogues are also less likely to cause postprandial hypoglycemia.16

A multiple-dose insulin regimen involving a long-acting basal insulin (eg, glargine, detemir, degludec) and a short-acting insulin (eg, glulisine, aspart, lispro) before meals is preferred in view of better glycemic control and lower risk of hypoglycemia.17

Use of an insulin pump during Ramadan is associated with a reduced risk of hypoglycemia.18 In patients with an insulin pump, the rate of basal insulin must be reduced during daytime, and the postprandial bolus of insulin must be increased after breaking the fast.

FREQUENT MONITORING OF BLOOD GLUCOSE DURING FASTING

Frequent monitoring reduces the risk of both hypoglycemia and hyperglycemia and helps control blood sugar levels during Ramadan fasting. As mentioned above, pricking the finger for blood sugar testing during fasting hours does not break the fast, and this should be emphasized during Ramadan-focused diabetes education.

The exact frequency of blood sugar testing is not defined. In patients with well-controlled diabetes without complications, testing once or twice a day is enough. Patients with poorly controlled diabetes and those with complications should test more often.

ADVICE REGARDING WHEN TO BREAK THE FAST

If signs or symptoms of hypoglycemia develop, the patient should break the fast in order to avoid serious complications. This is acceptable under Islamic law.3,19–21

MANAGEMENT OF COMPLICATIONS

Management of diabetic complications in patients during Ramadan fasting is similar to that for other diabetic patients and includes management of hypo- and hyperglycemia, diabetic ketoacidosis, and dehydration.

An estimated 50 million patients with diabetes worldwide practice daily fasting during Ramadan, the ninth month of the Islamic calendar, which lasts 29 or 30 days. In the United States, Ramadan begins this year at sundown on Friday, May 26, and ends at sundown on Sunday, June 25.

See related editorial

According to the Multi-Country Retrospective Observational Study of the Management and Outcomes of Patients With Diabetes During Ramadan, conducted in 13 countries, 94.2% of Muslim diabetic patients fasted at least 15 days, and 67.6% of these fasted every day.1

The daily fasting period, which may extend from 14 to 18 hours, starts before sunrise and ends after sunset. The meal taken before sunrise is called Suhur, and the meal after sunset is called Iftar. The fast requires abstaining from eating, drinking, sexual activity, medications, and smoking. For diabetic patients, this poses medical challenges, increasing the risk of acute metabolic complications.

The goal of caring for diabetic patients during Ramadan fasting is to help them to fast without major complications and to empower them to modify their lifestyle in order to achieve this goal.

POSSIBLE METABOLIC COMPLICATIONS

Metabolic complications during Ramadan fasting include hypoglycemia, hyperglycemia, diabetic ketoacidosis, dehydration, and thrombosis.

Hypoglycemia

For patients with type 1 diabetes, fasting increases the risk of hypoglycemia 4.7 times, and the risk is 7.5 times higher for patients with type 2 diabetes.2 However, this is often underreported, as mild to moderate hypoglycemia does not usually require medical assistance.

Precipitating factors include long fasting hours, missing the Suhur meal, and failure to modify drug dosage and timing.

Hyperglycemia

The risk of severe hyperglycemia during fasting is 3.2 times higher in patients with type 1 diabetes and 5 times higher in those with type 2 diabetes.2 Precipitating factors include lack of diet control during the Iftar meal and excessive reduction in the dosage of diabetes medications due to fear of hypoglycemia.

Diabetic ketoacidosis

Ketoacidosis can be precipitated by a lack of diet control during the Iftar meal, excessive reduction in the dosage of insulin due to fear of hypoglycemia, acute stress, and illness or infection.

Dehydration and thrombosis

Patients can become dehydrated during long fasting hours in especially hot weather, by sweating during physical activity, and by osmotic diuresis in poorly controlled diabetes.

Diabetes is a procoagulant condition, and dehydration increases the risk of thrombosis.

OVERALL MANAGEMENT GOALS DURING RAMADAN FASTING

Important aspects of managing diabetes during Ramadan fasting are:

  • The pre-Ramadan evaluation and risk stratification
  • Promoting patient awareness with Ramadan-focused diabetes education
  • Providing instruction on dietary modification
  • Modification of the dosage and timing of diabetes medication
  • Encouraging frequent monitoring of blood glucose levels
  • Advising the patient when to break the fast
  • Managing complications.

PRE-RAMADAN MEDICAL EVALUATION AND RISK STRATIFICATION

All diabetic patients who fast during Ramadan should undergo an evaluation 1 or 2 months before the start of Ramadan to determine their level of diabetes control and the presence of acute and chronic complications of diabetes and other comorbid conditions. Also important is to determine the patient’s social circumstances, ie, knowledge about diabetes, socioeconomic factors, religious beliefs, educational status, diabetes self-management skills, and family support in case of hypoglycemia or complications.

The evaluation helps to determine the patient’s risk of diabetes-related complications from Ramadan fasting, which is categorized as very high, high, or moderate/low according to the criteria of the International Diabetes Federation (Table 1).3 Patients should be advised as to the feasibility of fasting based on this risk categorization.

Even though the recommendation is to avoid fasting if the risk is very high or high, many patients fast. But patients should be advised about Islamic regulations exempting people from fasting (Table 2).4

RAMADAN-FOCUSED DIABETES EDUCATION

Improving the patient’s awareness of the risks of Ramadan fasting reduces the chance of complications. Education should include information on diet and exercise, changes in the timing and dosing of medications, signs and symptoms of hypoglycemia and hyperglycemia, the importance of monitoring blood glucose levels on fasting days, and the importance of breaking the fast in case of complications.5

 

 

DIET AND EXERCISE

All diabetic patients should be encouraged to remember to eat the predawn meal on fasting days. They should maintain a balanced diet, with complex carbohydrates with slow energy release for the predawn meal and simple carbohydrates for the sunset meal. Foods with a low glycemic index and high fiber content are recommended, and patients should be advised to avoid saturated fats and to drink plenty of fluids between sunset and sunrise to avoid dehydration.6

Diabetic patients can perform their usual physical activity, including moderate exercise, but should avoid excessive physical activity especially toward evening hours to prevent hypoglycemia.

Some patients may decide not to monitor their blood glucose as they believe that pricking the finger for blood sugar testing breaks the fast.7 Patients should be advised that this is a misconception.

ADJUSTING DIABETES MEDICATIONS

Oral diabetes drugs

Drugs such as metformin, alpha glucosidase inhibitors, thiazolidinediones, the short-acting insulin secretagogue nateglinide, dipeptidyl peptidase 4 inhibitors (eg, sitagliptin), and glucagon-like peptide 1 receptor agonists are associated with a lower risk of hypoglycemia and can be used during Ramadan fasting without significant changes in the daily dose (Table 3).8

Sulfonylureas carry a higher risk of hypoglycemia and should be used cautiously during fasting, with appropriate modification in dose and timing.9,10

Sodium-glucose cotransporter 2 inhibitors, when not combined with insulin or sulfonylureas, carry a lower risk of hypoglycemia, but during Ramadan fasting there is an increased risk of dehydration, urinary tract infection, and postural hypotension since fluids cannot be taken during fasting hours.

Dipeptidyl peptidase 4 inhibitors carry a low risk of hypoglycemia and can be used during Ramadan without dosing modification. Glucagon-like peptide 1 agonists also can be used without adjusting the dosage.11

Insulins

Insulin treatment is associated with a higher risk of hypoglycemia during Ramadan fasting.12 During fasting, the risk of hypoglycemia from premixed insulin can be minimized by changing to a multiple-dose regimen involving a basal insulin and short-acting insulin before meals, with adjustment of the short- acting insulin dose based on the anticipated carbohydrate intake for each meal.13

Patients taking premixed insulin preparations consisting of 70% intermediate-acting or long-acting insulin and 30% short-acting insulin should change to a 50/50 preparation during Ramadan fasting to reduce hypoglycemic risk and improve glycemic control; taking more of the fast-acting component controls postprandial hyperglycemia, and taking less of the intermediate or long-acting component minimizes the risk of hypoglycemia during fasting hours.14,15

Insulin analogues carry a lower risk of hypoglycemia than human insulin. Compared with a human insulin 70/30 preparation, an analogue premix containing 75% neutral protamine lispro and 25% insulin lispro resulted in better glycemic control during Ramadan fasting.16 This could be related to the pharmacodynamics of low-ratio premix analogues, as well as to the mealtime flexibility of analogue insulin, as the injections of the 75/25 mix were given immediately before the morning and evening meals. Insulin analogues are also less likely to cause postprandial hypoglycemia.16

A multiple-dose insulin regimen involving a long-acting basal insulin (eg, glargine, detemir, degludec) and a short-acting insulin (eg, glulisine, aspart, lispro) before meals is preferred in view of better glycemic control and lower risk of hypoglycemia.17

Use of an insulin pump during Ramadan is associated with a reduced risk of hypoglycemia.18 In patients with an insulin pump, the rate of basal insulin must be reduced during daytime, and the postprandial bolus of insulin must be increased after breaking the fast.

FREQUENT MONITORING OF BLOOD GLUCOSE DURING FASTING

Frequent monitoring reduces the risk of both hypoglycemia and hyperglycemia and helps control blood sugar levels during Ramadan fasting. As mentioned above, pricking the finger for blood sugar testing during fasting hours does not break the fast, and this should be emphasized during Ramadan-focused diabetes education.

The exact frequency of blood sugar testing is not defined. In patients with well-controlled diabetes without complications, testing once or twice a day is enough. Patients with poorly controlled diabetes and those with complications should test more often.

ADVICE REGARDING WHEN TO BREAK THE FAST

If signs or symptoms of hypoglycemia develop, the patient should break the fast in order to avoid serious complications. This is acceptable under Islamic law.3,19–21

MANAGEMENT OF COMPLICATIONS

Management of diabetic complications in patients during Ramadan fasting is similar to that for other diabetic patients and includes management of hypo- and hyperglycemia, diabetic ketoacidosis, and dehydration.

References
  1. Babineaux SM, Toaima D, Boye KS, et al. Multi-country retrospective observational study of the management and outcomes of patients with type 2 diabetes during Ramadan in 2010 (CREED). Diabet Med 2015; 32:819–828.
  2. Salti I, Benard E, Detournay B, et al; EPIDIAR Study Group. A population-based study of diabetes and its characteristics during the fasting month of Ramadan in 13 countries: results of the Epidemiology of Diabetes and Ramadan 1422/2001 (EPIDIAR) study. Diabetes Care 2004; 27:2306–2311.
  3. International Diabetes Federation and the DAR International Alliance. Diabetes and Ramadan: Practical Guidelines. Brussels, Belgium: International Diabetes Federation, 2016. www.idf.org/guidelines/diabetes-in-ramadan and www.daralliance.org. Accessed March 8, 2017.
  4. Al-Arouj M, Bouguerra R, Buse J, et al. Recommendations for management of diabetes during Ramadan. Diabetes Care 2005; 28:2305–2311.
  5. Masood SN, Masood Y, Hakim R, Alvi SFD, Shera AS. Ramadan fasting related awareness, practices and experiences of a representative group of urban Pakistani Diabetics. Pak J Med Sci 2012; 28:432–436.
  6. Bravis V, Hui E, Salih S, Mehar S, Hassanein M, Devendra D. Ramadan education and awareness in diabetes (READ) programme for Muslims with type 2 diabetes who fast during Ramadan. Diabet Med 2010; 27:327–331.
  7. Masood SN, Sheikh MA, Masood Y, Hakeem R, Shera AS. Beliefs of people with diabetes about skin prick during Ramadan fasting. Diabetes Care 2014; 37:e68–e69.
  8. Aravind S, Ismail SB, Balamurugan R, et al. Hypoglycemia in patients with type 2 diabetes from India and Malaysia treated with sitagliptin or a sulfonylurea during Ramadan: a randomized, pragmatic study. Curr Med Res Opin 2012; 28:1289–1296.
  9. Glimepiride in Ramadan (GLIRA) Study Group. The efficacy and safety of glimepiride in the management of type 2 diabetes in Muslim patients during Ramadan. Diabetes Care 2005; 28:421–422.
  10. Hassanein M, Abdallah K, Schweizer A. A double-blind, randomized trial, including frequent patient-physician contacts and Ramadan-focused advice, assessing vildagliptin and gliclazide in patients with type 2 diabetes fasting during Ramadan: the STEADFAST study. Vasc Health Risk Manag 2014; 10:319–326.
  11. Brady EM, Davies MJ, Gray LJ, et al. A randomized controlled trial comparing the GLP-1 receptor agonist liraglutide to a sulphonylurea as add on to metformin in patients with established type 2 diabetes during Ramadan: the Treat 4 Ramadan trial. Diabetes Obes Metab 2014; 16:527–536.
  12. Ibrahim M, Abu Al Magd M, Annabi FA, et al. Recommendations for management of diabetes during Ramadan: update 2015. BMJ Open Diabetes Res Care 2015; 3:e000108.
  13. Kassem HS, Zantout MS, Azar ST. Insulin therapy during Ramadan fast for type 1 diabetes patients. J Endocrinol Invest 2005; 28:802–805.
  14. Hui E, Bravis V, Salih S, Hassanein M, Devendra D. Comparison of humalog mix 50 with human insulin mix 30 in type 2 diabetes patients during Ramadan. Int J Clin Pract 2010; 64:1095–1099.
  15. Hassanein M, Belhadj M, Abdallah K, et al. Management of type 2 diabetes in Ramadan: low ratio premix insulin working group practical advice. Indian J Endocrinol Metab 2014; 18:794–799.
  16. Mattoo V, Milicevic Z, Malone JK, et al; Ramadan Study Group. A comparison of insulin lispro Mix25 and human insulin 30/70 in the treatment of type 2 diabetes during Ramadan. Diabetes Res Clin Pract 2003; 59:137–143.
  17. Pathan MF, Sahay RK, Zargar AH, et al. South Asian Consensus Guideline: use of insulin in diabetes during Ramadan. Indian J Endocrinol Metab 2012; 16:499–502.
  18. Khalil AB, Beshyah SA, Abu Awad SM, et al. Ramadan fasting in diabetes patients on insulin pump therapy augmented by continuous glucose monitoring: an observational real-life study. Diabetes Technol Ther 2012; 14:813–818.
  19. Holy Qur’an 2:195.
  20. Holy Qur’an 4:29.
  21. Bashir MI, Pathan MF, Raza SA. Role of oral hypoglycemic agents in the management of type 2 diabetes mellitus during Ramadan. Indian J Endocrinol Metab 2012; 16:503–507.
References
  1. Babineaux SM, Toaima D, Boye KS, et al. Multi-country retrospective observational study of the management and outcomes of patients with type 2 diabetes during Ramadan in 2010 (CREED). Diabet Med 2015; 32:819–828.
  2. Salti I, Benard E, Detournay B, et al; EPIDIAR Study Group. A population-based study of diabetes and its characteristics during the fasting month of Ramadan in 13 countries: results of the Epidemiology of Diabetes and Ramadan 1422/2001 (EPIDIAR) study. Diabetes Care 2004; 27:2306–2311.
  3. International Diabetes Federation and the DAR International Alliance. Diabetes and Ramadan: Practical Guidelines. Brussels, Belgium: International Diabetes Federation, 2016. www.idf.org/guidelines/diabetes-in-ramadan and www.daralliance.org. Accessed March 8, 2017.
  4. Al-Arouj M, Bouguerra R, Buse J, et al. Recommendations for management of diabetes during Ramadan. Diabetes Care 2005; 28:2305–2311.
  5. Masood SN, Masood Y, Hakim R, Alvi SFD, Shera AS. Ramadan fasting related awareness, practices and experiences of a representative group of urban Pakistani Diabetics. Pak J Med Sci 2012; 28:432–436.
  6. Bravis V, Hui E, Salih S, Mehar S, Hassanein M, Devendra D. Ramadan education and awareness in diabetes (READ) programme for Muslims with type 2 diabetes who fast during Ramadan. Diabet Med 2010; 27:327–331.
  7. Masood SN, Sheikh MA, Masood Y, Hakeem R, Shera AS. Beliefs of people with diabetes about skin prick during Ramadan fasting. Diabetes Care 2014; 37:e68–e69.
  8. Aravind S, Ismail SB, Balamurugan R, et al. Hypoglycemia in patients with type 2 diabetes from India and Malaysia treated with sitagliptin or a sulfonylurea during Ramadan: a randomized, pragmatic study. Curr Med Res Opin 2012; 28:1289–1296.
  9. Glimepiride in Ramadan (GLIRA) Study Group. The efficacy and safety of glimepiride in the management of type 2 diabetes in Muslim patients during Ramadan. Diabetes Care 2005; 28:421–422.
  10. Hassanein M, Abdallah K, Schweizer A. A double-blind, randomized trial, including frequent patient-physician contacts and Ramadan-focused advice, assessing vildagliptin and gliclazide in patients with type 2 diabetes fasting during Ramadan: the STEADFAST study. Vasc Health Risk Manag 2014; 10:319–326.
  11. Brady EM, Davies MJ, Gray LJ, et al. A randomized controlled trial comparing the GLP-1 receptor agonist liraglutide to a sulphonylurea as add on to metformin in patients with established type 2 diabetes during Ramadan: the Treat 4 Ramadan trial. Diabetes Obes Metab 2014; 16:527–536.
  12. Ibrahim M, Abu Al Magd M, Annabi FA, et al. Recommendations for management of diabetes during Ramadan: update 2015. BMJ Open Diabetes Res Care 2015; 3:e000108.
  13. Kassem HS, Zantout MS, Azar ST. Insulin therapy during Ramadan fast for type 1 diabetes patients. J Endocrinol Invest 2005; 28:802–805.
  14. Hui E, Bravis V, Salih S, Hassanein M, Devendra D. Comparison of humalog mix 50 with human insulin mix 30 in type 2 diabetes patients during Ramadan. Int J Clin Pract 2010; 64:1095–1099.
  15. Hassanein M, Belhadj M, Abdallah K, et al. Management of type 2 diabetes in Ramadan: low ratio premix insulin working group practical advice. Indian J Endocrinol Metab 2014; 18:794–799.
  16. Mattoo V, Milicevic Z, Malone JK, et al; Ramadan Study Group. A comparison of insulin lispro Mix25 and human insulin 30/70 in the treatment of type 2 diabetes during Ramadan. Diabetes Res Clin Pract 2003; 59:137–143.
  17. Pathan MF, Sahay RK, Zargar AH, et al. South Asian Consensus Guideline: use of insulin in diabetes during Ramadan. Indian J Endocrinol Metab 2012; 16:499–502.
  18. Khalil AB, Beshyah SA, Abu Awad SM, et al. Ramadan fasting in diabetes patients on insulin pump therapy augmented by continuous glucose monitoring: an observational real-life study. Diabetes Technol Ther 2012; 14:813–818.
  19. Holy Qur’an 2:195.
  20. Holy Qur’an 4:29.
  21. Bashir MI, Pathan MF, Raza SA. Role of oral hypoglycemic agents in the management of type 2 diabetes mellitus during Ramadan. Indian J Endocrinol Metab 2012; 16:503–507.
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Page Number
352-356
Page Number
352-356
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Diabetes control during Ramadan fasting
Display Headline
Diabetes control during Ramadan fasting
Legacy Keywords
diabetes, Ramadan, fasting, hypoglycemia, hyperglycemia, Muslims, insulin, sulfonylureas, Raveendran AV, Abdul Zargar
Legacy Keywords
diabetes, Ramadan, fasting, hypoglycemia, hyperglycemia, Muslims, insulin, sulfonylureas, Raveendran AV, Abdul Zargar
Sections
Inside the Article

KEY POINTS

  • A diabetic patient who develops signs or symptoms of hypoglycemia during Ramadan fasting should break the fast to avoid serious complications.
  • Management of complications in diabetic patients during Ramadan is similar to that for nonfasting diabetic patients. Complications include hypo- and hyperglycemia, diabetic ketoacidosis, and dehydration.
  • A common misconception among patients is that pricking the finger for blood sugar testing during fasting hours breaks the fast; this should be addressed during Ramadan-focused diabetes education.
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Article PDF Media

Strategies for management of intermittent fasting in patients with diabetes

Article Type
Changed
Display Headline
Strategies for management of intermittent fasting in patients with diabetes

Islam is the second most common religion in the world, and there are 1.6 billion Muslims, many in areas where diabetes is prevalent. Each year observant Muslims fast during the daylight hours for the holy month of Ramadan. It is estimated that 50 million diabetic people fast between dawn and sundown during Ramadan, and Muslims are not the only group of patients who fast for religious or other reasons. It is important for healthcare providers to guide patients with diabetes in avoiding problems related to prolonged fasting.

See related article

In this issue of the Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine, Drs. A.V. and Zagar address management of diabetes specifically relating to Ramadan fasting, with considerations that also apply to other diabetic patients who fast for religious or for medical reasons.

Fortunately, we now have antihyperglycemic agents that are unlikely to cause hypoglycemia if used alone or in combination, as long as the regimen does not include insulin or a sulfonylurea. These include:

  • Metformin and thiazolidinediones (pioglitazone and rosig­litazone), which improve insulin sensitivity
  • Glucagon-like peptide 1 (GLP-1) agonists (exenatide, liraglutide, dulaglutide, and albaglutide), which facilitate insulin release in a glucose-dependent fashion
  • Dipeptidyl peptidase 4 inhibitors (sitagliptin, saxagliptin, alogliptin, and linagliptin), which augment endogenous incretin hormones, primarily GLP-1, and also facilitate insulin production in a glucose-dependent fashion
  • Alpha glucosidase inhibitors (acarbose and miglitol), which slow carbohydrate absorption.

Introduced in recent years, the sodium-glucose cotransporter 2 (SGLT-2) inhibitors canagliflozin, dapagliflozin, and empagliflozin lower blood glucose by reducing the renal threshold for reabsorption of glucose, coupled with reabsorption of sodium leading to daily urinary excretion of about 200 calories. These agents alone or taken with any of the agents above should not cause hypoglycemia. However, they can lead to dehydration if fasting precludes the intake of water as well as food.

The primary concern during fasting is hypoglycemia when diabetes regimens involve insulin or insulin secretagogues, most commonly sulfonylureas. Long-acting basal insulin should not require adjustment during fasting if the dose is not excessive. The amount and timing of short-acting analogues administered before meals should be adjusted to the timing of meals, and doses should be adjusted proportionally to the anticipated carbohydrate intake. Premixed insulins such as intermediate-acting (protamine suspension) insulin and a short-acting insulin in 70/30, 75/25, or 50/50 ratios should be avoided. They do not lend themselves to changes in timing, and the short-acting component is fixed and cannot be changed for varied intake without changing the intermediate-acting portion, which functions as the basal insulin.

Sulfonylurea doses can be reduced or the larger dose moved to before the evening meal, but these agents still pose a risk of hypoglycemia during fasting hours. And as Drs. A.V. and Zagar state, glimepiride, glipizide, and gliclazide are the only agents in the class that should be considered; glyburide (ie, glibenclamide) poses too great a risk of hypoglycemia. On the other hand, the short-acting secretagogue nateglinide can be used safely before meals without much risk of hypoglycemia.

We have focused primarily on hypoglycemia risk. But if antihyperglycemic agents are halted completely or if the reduction is too severe, patients are at risk for hyperglycemia and even diabetic ketoacidosis. Careful monitoring of blood glucose levels during the fasting period is most important for patients taking agents that can cause hypoglycemia, and patients should be advised to break the fast if dangerously low glycemic levels occur. Similarly, if severe hyperglycemia or ketoacidosis develops, patients should be advised to seek medical advice promptly.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Leann Olansky, MD, FACP, FACE
Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes and Metabolism, Cleveland Clinic

Address: Leann Olansky, MD, FACP, FACE, Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Metabolism, F20, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; olanskl@ccf.org

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
357-358
Legacy Keywords
diabetes, Ramadan, fasting, hypoglycemia, hyperglycemia, Leann Olansky
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Leann Olansky, MD, FACP, FACE
Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes and Metabolism, Cleveland Clinic

Address: Leann Olansky, MD, FACP, FACE, Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Metabolism, F20, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; olanskl@ccf.org

Author and Disclosure Information

Leann Olansky, MD, FACP, FACE
Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes and Metabolism, Cleveland Clinic

Address: Leann Olansky, MD, FACP, FACE, Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Metabolism, F20, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; olanskl@ccf.org

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

Islam is the second most common religion in the world, and there are 1.6 billion Muslims, many in areas where diabetes is prevalent. Each year observant Muslims fast during the daylight hours for the holy month of Ramadan. It is estimated that 50 million diabetic people fast between dawn and sundown during Ramadan, and Muslims are not the only group of patients who fast for religious or other reasons. It is important for healthcare providers to guide patients with diabetes in avoiding problems related to prolonged fasting.

See related article

In this issue of the Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine, Drs. A.V. and Zagar address management of diabetes specifically relating to Ramadan fasting, with considerations that also apply to other diabetic patients who fast for religious or for medical reasons.

Fortunately, we now have antihyperglycemic agents that are unlikely to cause hypoglycemia if used alone or in combination, as long as the regimen does not include insulin or a sulfonylurea. These include:

  • Metformin and thiazolidinediones (pioglitazone and rosig­litazone), which improve insulin sensitivity
  • Glucagon-like peptide 1 (GLP-1) agonists (exenatide, liraglutide, dulaglutide, and albaglutide), which facilitate insulin release in a glucose-dependent fashion
  • Dipeptidyl peptidase 4 inhibitors (sitagliptin, saxagliptin, alogliptin, and linagliptin), which augment endogenous incretin hormones, primarily GLP-1, and also facilitate insulin production in a glucose-dependent fashion
  • Alpha glucosidase inhibitors (acarbose and miglitol), which slow carbohydrate absorption.

Introduced in recent years, the sodium-glucose cotransporter 2 (SGLT-2) inhibitors canagliflozin, dapagliflozin, and empagliflozin lower blood glucose by reducing the renal threshold for reabsorption of glucose, coupled with reabsorption of sodium leading to daily urinary excretion of about 200 calories. These agents alone or taken with any of the agents above should not cause hypoglycemia. However, they can lead to dehydration if fasting precludes the intake of water as well as food.

The primary concern during fasting is hypoglycemia when diabetes regimens involve insulin or insulin secretagogues, most commonly sulfonylureas. Long-acting basal insulin should not require adjustment during fasting if the dose is not excessive. The amount and timing of short-acting analogues administered before meals should be adjusted to the timing of meals, and doses should be adjusted proportionally to the anticipated carbohydrate intake. Premixed insulins such as intermediate-acting (protamine suspension) insulin and a short-acting insulin in 70/30, 75/25, or 50/50 ratios should be avoided. They do not lend themselves to changes in timing, and the short-acting component is fixed and cannot be changed for varied intake without changing the intermediate-acting portion, which functions as the basal insulin.

Sulfonylurea doses can be reduced or the larger dose moved to before the evening meal, but these agents still pose a risk of hypoglycemia during fasting hours. And as Drs. A.V. and Zagar state, glimepiride, glipizide, and gliclazide are the only agents in the class that should be considered; glyburide (ie, glibenclamide) poses too great a risk of hypoglycemia. On the other hand, the short-acting secretagogue nateglinide can be used safely before meals without much risk of hypoglycemia.

We have focused primarily on hypoglycemia risk. But if antihyperglycemic agents are halted completely or if the reduction is too severe, patients are at risk for hyperglycemia and even diabetic ketoacidosis. Careful monitoring of blood glucose levels during the fasting period is most important for patients taking agents that can cause hypoglycemia, and patients should be advised to break the fast if dangerously low glycemic levels occur. Similarly, if severe hyperglycemia or ketoacidosis develops, patients should be advised to seek medical advice promptly.

Islam is the second most common religion in the world, and there are 1.6 billion Muslims, many in areas where diabetes is prevalent. Each year observant Muslims fast during the daylight hours for the holy month of Ramadan. It is estimated that 50 million diabetic people fast between dawn and sundown during Ramadan, and Muslims are not the only group of patients who fast for religious or other reasons. It is important for healthcare providers to guide patients with diabetes in avoiding problems related to prolonged fasting.

See related article

In this issue of the Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine, Drs. A.V. and Zagar address management of diabetes specifically relating to Ramadan fasting, with considerations that also apply to other diabetic patients who fast for religious or for medical reasons.

Fortunately, we now have antihyperglycemic agents that are unlikely to cause hypoglycemia if used alone or in combination, as long as the regimen does not include insulin or a sulfonylurea. These include:

  • Metformin and thiazolidinediones (pioglitazone and rosig­litazone), which improve insulin sensitivity
  • Glucagon-like peptide 1 (GLP-1) agonists (exenatide, liraglutide, dulaglutide, and albaglutide), which facilitate insulin release in a glucose-dependent fashion
  • Dipeptidyl peptidase 4 inhibitors (sitagliptin, saxagliptin, alogliptin, and linagliptin), which augment endogenous incretin hormones, primarily GLP-1, and also facilitate insulin production in a glucose-dependent fashion
  • Alpha glucosidase inhibitors (acarbose and miglitol), which slow carbohydrate absorption.

Introduced in recent years, the sodium-glucose cotransporter 2 (SGLT-2) inhibitors canagliflozin, dapagliflozin, and empagliflozin lower blood glucose by reducing the renal threshold for reabsorption of glucose, coupled with reabsorption of sodium leading to daily urinary excretion of about 200 calories. These agents alone or taken with any of the agents above should not cause hypoglycemia. However, they can lead to dehydration if fasting precludes the intake of water as well as food.

The primary concern during fasting is hypoglycemia when diabetes regimens involve insulin or insulin secretagogues, most commonly sulfonylureas. Long-acting basal insulin should not require adjustment during fasting if the dose is not excessive. The amount and timing of short-acting analogues administered before meals should be adjusted to the timing of meals, and doses should be adjusted proportionally to the anticipated carbohydrate intake. Premixed insulins such as intermediate-acting (protamine suspension) insulin and a short-acting insulin in 70/30, 75/25, or 50/50 ratios should be avoided. They do not lend themselves to changes in timing, and the short-acting component is fixed and cannot be changed for varied intake without changing the intermediate-acting portion, which functions as the basal insulin.

Sulfonylurea doses can be reduced or the larger dose moved to before the evening meal, but these agents still pose a risk of hypoglycemia during fasting hours. And as Drs. A.V. and Zagar state, glimepiride, glipizide, and gliclazide are the only agents in the class that should be considered; glyburide (ie, glibenclamide) poses too great a risk of hypoglycemia. On the other hand, the short-acting secretagogue nateglinide can be used safely before meals without much risk of hypoglycemia.

We have focused primarily on hypoglycemia risk. But if antihyperglycemic agents are halted completely or if the reduction is too severe, patients are at risk for hyperglycemia and even diabetic ketoacidosis. Careful monitoring of blood glucose levels during the fasting period is most important for patients taking agents that can cause hypoglycemia, and patients should be advised to break the fast if dangerously low glycemic levels occur. Similarly, if severe hyperglycemia or ketoacidosis develops, patients should be advised to seek medical advice promptly.

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Page Number
357-358
Page Number
357-358
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Strategies for management of intermittent fasting in patients with diabetes
Display Headline
Strategies for management of intermittent fasting in patients with diabetes
Legacy Keywords
diabetes, Ramadan, fasting, hypoglycemia, hyperglycemia, Leann Olansky
Legacy Keywords
diabetes, Ramadan, fasting, hypoglycemia, hyperglycemia, Leann Olansky
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Article PDF Media

Peripartum depression: Early recognition improves outcomes

Article Type
Changed
Display Headline
Peripartum depression: Early recognition improves outcomes

Contrary to common belief, pregnancy does not confer protection against depression.1,2 In fact, pregnant women are just as likely as nonpregnant women to become or remain depressed, and up to 12.7% of pregnant women meet criteria for depression.1

In the postpartum period, women are particularly vulnerable to a major depressive episode, whether a first episode or a recurrence. The estimated prevalence of a depressive episode in the first 3 postpartum  months is 19.2%,2 making postpartum depression the most common complication of childbearing.2 At the same time, peripartum depression remains largely underrecognized and undertreated.3

As evidence mounts regarding the deleterious impact of untreated mental illness on the mother, the developing fetus, and the infant, early detection and intervention for peripartum depression are paramount.3

DEPRESSION DURING PREGNANCY: SIGNIFICANT CONSEQUENCES

Although the rates of depression in pregnant and nonpregnant women are similar, depression in pregnancy carries additional significant consequences. Further, many depressed pregnant women believe their depression will lift once their baby is born, though it is well documented that depression during pregnancy is the strongest predictor of postpartum depression and that if left untreated it can be devastating for mother, infant, and family.4

Compared with nondepressed pregnant women, depressed pregnant women have poorer overall health status,5 are more likely to engage in behaviors that pose risk to the developing fetus such as smoking,5 alcohol consumption, and substance use,6 and have poor nutrition and inadequate weight gain.7,8

Pregnant women who are depressed and are also experiencing domestic violence are especially at risk for poor prenatal care as they tend to miss more prenatal appointments.9 Evidence also suggests that depressed pregnant women are less attached to the fetus and more likely to have elective terminations.10,11

Depression in pregnancy is associated with higher rates of adverse pregnancy outcomes such as preterm birth, low birth weight, operative delivery, and longer predelivery hospital stay.3,12 Depression and anxiety during pregnancy have been associated with prenatal hypertension,13 gestational diabetes,14 preeclampsia,15 and HELLP syndrome (ie, hemolysis, elevated liver enzymes, and low platelet count).15 Depression and anxiety during pregnancy are associated with subsequent poorer infant attachment16,17 and an overall unfavorable impact on infant and child development.18

Risk factors for depression during pregnancy include past episodes of depression, current anxiety, poor social support, unintended pregnancy, life stress, being single, domestic violence, and being on Medicaid.19

Undoubtedly the most devastating consequence of severe depression during pregnancy is suicide. Rates of suicide are lower in peripartum women,20 but when suicide does occur, pregnant women tend to use more violent means than nonpregnant women. Pregnant adolescents represent a particularly high-risk group.21

POSTPARTUM DEPRESSION

Postpartum depression is the most common complication of childbearing. Although the precise pathogenesis is undetermined, there is converging evidence of a subset of women particularly sensitive to dramatic fluctuations in levels of estradiol and progesterone that occur during childbirth.22,23 There is also evidence that dysregulation of the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal axis contributes to the development of postpartum depression in certain women.24 Further, women who have depression or anxiety during pregnancy are much more likely to experience postpartum depression than those who are not symptomatic during pregnancy.4 A history of peripartum depression or other lifetime depressive episodes, poverty, conflict with a primary partner, poor social support, stressful life events, and low self-esteem are strongly associated with postpartum depression.25

When unrecognized and untreated, postpartum depression can have profound and persistent effects on the mother and the developing infant.18,26 Mothers with postpartum depression are much more likely than mothers without depression to have impaired bonding,27 to be less responsive to their infant’s needs,17 and to be more likely to miss well-baby checkups.28

Postpartum depression’s effects on maternal-infant interactions can include maternal withdrawal, disengagement, intrusion, and hostility and can lead to long-term effects on child development, including poor cognitive functioning, emotional maladjustment, and behavioral inhibition.29,30 Infants and children of mothers with untreated postpartum depression have been shown to exhibit a higher incidence of colic, excessive crying, sleep problems, and irritability.31,32 Women with postpartum depression may be less likely to initiate or maintain breastfeeding, and depressive symptoms have been noted to precede the discontinuation of breastfeeding.33–35

Risk factors for postpartum depression

Characteristics to look for in the prenatal care of pregnant women include the following:

  • Depression during pregnancy
  • History of postpartum or other depressive episode
  • Poverty
  • Conflict with primary partner
  • Poor social support
  • Low self-esteem
  • Single status.

 

 

DIFFERENTIATING ‘POSTPARTUM BLUES’ FROM MAJOR DEPRESSION

Primary care providers are often the first point of contact for depressed women. The diagnosis of major depression in pregnant and postpartum women is challenging because of changes in sleep, appetite, and energy brought on by pregnancy, complications of delivery, and demands of caring for a newborn.36 Many pregnant and postpartum women are reluctant to disclose their symptoms due to a sense of shame and guilt for being depressed during a time in their life that society commonly regards as joyful, and this contributes to under-detection.

In the first few days postpartum, fatigue, emotionality, irritability, and worry over the infant’s well-being affect up to 75% of women. This period, typically referred to as the “baby blues” or “postpartum blues,” is not considered a disorder and responds well to support, reassurance, and adequate sleep, and it typically resolves within 2 weeks.37,38 Table 1 lists features that help distinguish postpartum blues from major depression.

Signs of major depressive disorder

Major depressive disorder is a serious and disabling condition. To meet criteria for major depressive disorder, women must report depressed mood and loss of interest or pleasure in normally pleasurable activities for at least 2 weeks. Completing the symptom profile, at least 5 of the following must be present: sleep disturbance (insomnia or hypersomnia), lack of energy, feelings of worthlessness or low self-esteem, guilt, difficulty concentrating, indecisiveness, psychomotor retardation or agitation, and thoughts of suicide or death.

The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (5th edition) recognizes that postpartum depression commonly begins during pregnancy, and now uses “peripartum onset” as the specifier for major depressive disorder that occurs during pregnancy, postpartum, or both.39 Other hallmark symptoms with peripartum onset include a lack of interest in or attachment to the pregnancy or infant, and anxiety and worry often accompanied by intrusive, unwanted thoughts of harm befalling the infant.40

Postpartum psychosis

Postpartum psychosis is a far less common presentation, occurring in 1 to 2 per 1,000 births, but it constitutes a psychiatric emergency requiring immediate referral to a psychiatric care setting. Women at highest risk are those with a personal or family history of bipolar disorder.

The clinical presentation is most commonly characterized by confusion, agitation, hallucinations, delusional beliefs, and disorientation. Suicide and infanticide, while rare, are more likely to occur in the context of a psychotic episode.41

SCREENING RECOMMENDATIONS

Screening for depression is routine in primary care settings and is no less important for peripartum women.

In 2016, the US Preventive Services Task Force issued a recommendation that all pregnant and postpartum women be screened for depression,42 highlighting the need for all medical providers to be alert to the potentially serious consequences of unrecognized and untreated maternal psychiatric illness.

The American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists (ACOG) recommends screening for depression and anxiety at least once during the peripartum period,43 and the American Academy of Pediatrics recommends screening mothers for depression at the 1-, 2-, and 4-month well-baby visits.44

The peripartum period is associated with changes in sleep, appetite, and energy levels, but these are also typical of depression. Taking this into account, the Edinburgh Postnatal Depression Scale (EPDS) was developed to screen for depression specifically in this population.45 The EPDS is a validated and widely used 10-item self-reporting questionnaire with a high degree of sensitivity and specificity; it is easily administered and quickly scored. A cutoff score of 13 (of a maximum of 30) is considered indicative of depressed mood and signals the need for further assessment.

Source: Kroenke K, Spitzer RL, Williams JB. The PHQ-9: Validity of a brief depression severity measure. J Gen In-tern Med 2001; 16:606–616. No permission required to reproduce, translate, display, or distribute.
FIGURE 1. Patient Health Questionnaire–9. A score ranging from 5 to 10 indicates mild depression, 10 to 14 moderate depression, 15 to 19 moderate to severe depression, and greater than 19 severe depression.

ACOG, the American Academy of Pediatrics, and the US Preventive Services Task Force recommend a standardized validated tool and cite both the EPDS (https://psychology-tools.com/epds/) and the Patient Health Questionnaire-9 (PHQ-9) (Figure 1) as appropriate to screen for peripartum depression.42–44 Primary care providers tend to be most familiar with the PHQ-9, a highly sensitive and specific 9-item depression screen that has been validated in primary care and obstetric clinic patients.46 A score on the PHQ-9 ranging from 5 to 10 indicates mild depression, 10 to 14 moderate depression, 15 to 19 moderate to severe depression, and greater than 19 severe depression.

 

 

CLINICAL MANAGEMENT

Many women prefer nondrug therapy

The gold standard treatment for moderate to severe major depressive disorder is psychotherapy plus pharmacotherapy. Yet many peripartum women voice concerns about exposure to pharmacologic treatment, and studies have shown that many women prefer nonpharmacologic intervention.47

Evidence-based psychotherapies that have demonstrated efficacy in peripartum women include cognitive behavioral therapy48 and interpersonal psychotherapy when administered by a psychotherapist trained in these treatments. Pregnant and breastfeeding women often express preference for psychotherapy and complementary and alternative treatments as a means of avoiding fetal and infant exposure to antidepressants.47

For mild to moderate depression, complementary therapies such as exercise, yoga, bright light therapy, and acupuncture have shown efficacy and can be used alone or adjunctively.49 Because a poor marital relationship is consistently associated with peripartum depression,25 primary care physicians who routinely address social support and screen for family conflict are well positioned to detect this significant correlate and to recommend marital or family therapy as a primary or adjunctive treatment.

When to consider drug therapy

The decision to recommend drug therapy must be individualized and based on the severity of symptoms, functional impairment, number and frequency of depressive episodes, history of response to medications, and the preferences of the patient, with the recognition that no decision is risk-free and that antidepressants enter the amniotic fluid, so fetal exposure is unavoidable.

Table 2 lists common antidepressants. The antidepressants most commonly prescribed, especially in the primary care setting, are selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs), which are favored because of their effectiveness, low side-effect profile, and lack of overdose toxicity.

Serotonin syndrome is no more likely to occur in pregnant than in nonpregnant women. Close monitoring for this condition is warranted only when patients are taking very  high doses of SSRIs or SSRIs in combination with other serotonergic agonists.

Prescribing antidepressants for pregnant or breastfeeding women requires thoughtful consideration of the patient’s preferences, as well as weighing the risks and benefits of fetal and infant exposure to maternal depression vs exposure to medications. Additional considerations include monotherapy, avoiding medication changes, choosing drugs that have been effective in the past, and avoiding drugs with known drug-drug interactions or teratogenic effects.50

There is increasing consensus that the short- and long-term consequences of undertreatment or nontreatment of maternal depression outweigh the risk of fetal exposure to SSRIs.3,51,52 Cohen et al53 have recommended that if a woman is on an antidepressant and learns she is pregnant, she should not discontinue it because of the likelihood of relapse; they found a 68% relapse rate in women who discontinued their antidepressant in the first trimester of pregnancy.53

In a comprehensive review of studies published between 1996 and 2012 that examined antidepressant use during pregnancy, Byatt et al54 found little or no evidence of increased teratogenic risk with antidepressants with the exception of paroxetine, which is associated with a small but significant increased risk of cardiac malformation during first-trimester exposure.54

These conclusions were underscored in a large cohort study in the United Kingdom.55 In addition, a joint task force of the American Psychiatric Association and ACOG reviewed studies looking at the association between depression, antidepressants, and birth outcomes including miscarriage, preterm birth, cardiac abnormalities (resulting from first trimester exposure), persistent pulmonary hypertension (related to second- and third-trimester exposure), and neonatal adaptation syndrome (associated with third-trimester exposure).8 They concluded that the available data neither support nor refute a link between the use of antidepressants and several of the above outcomes. No increase in risk of congenital malformations (including cardiac abnormalities) was found. An increased risk of persistent pulmonary hypertension was noted, although the absolute risk of this disorder remained low, at 3 to 6 per 1,000 infants exposed to SSRIs in utero.8,56

Neonatal adaptation syndrome

Neonatal adaptation syndrome is characterized by jitteriness, irritability, decreased muscle tone, and feeding difficulty in the neonate. It can occur in 15% to 30% of infants exposed to SSRIs antenatally.57,58 These symptoms, however, are transient and typically resolve within 7 to 10 days after birth. A more recent study suggested that neurobehavioral symptoms for some infants extend beyond 2 weeks and that concomitant exposure to benzodiazepines results in even higher rates of this syndrome.59 There is no evidence that tapering or discontinuing antidepressants near term is necessary, safe, or effective in preventing transient neonatal complications. However, this approach would increase the risk of relapse for the mother.

Autism spectrum disorders

The possible association between antidepressants and autism spectrum disorders in pregnancy has captured much attention in recent years. One study based on healthcare claims60 and one registry-based study61 associated in utero exposure to antidepressants with autism liability in children. However, a large-scale Danish registry-based study did not replicate this association.62 In addition, 2 recent cohort studies, identifying children with autism spectrum disorder or attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder from electronic health records, found that neither disorder was significantly associated with prenatal antidepressant exposure in crude or adjusted models. However, both studies found a significant association with the use of antidepressants before pregnancy, indicating that the risk of autism observed with prenatal antidepressant exposure is likely confounded by the severity of maternal illness.63,64

Concerns about drug therapy during breastfeeding

For infants of breastfeeding women, exposure to antidepressants through breast milk is minimal. Amounts in breast milk depend on the timing of the antidepressant dose, timing of feeding, and genetically influenced metabolic activity in mother and infant. The current literature supports antidepressant use for breastfeeding mothers of healthy full-term infants.65

The 2 most widely studied antidepressants in breastfed infants are paroxetine and sertraline. It has been shown that very little can be detected in the infant’s serum, with relative infant doses ranging from 0.4% to 2.8%.65 While clinicians are cautioned against prescribing paroxetine for pregnant women, the drug remains a suitable alternative for breastfeeding women.

If an antidepressant is started postpartum, the recommendation is to start with a low dose and then slowly titrate upward while monitoring the infant for adverse effects.65,66 Possible adverse effects in breastfeeding infants include irritability, sedation, poor weight gain, and a change in feeding patterns.67 Adverse events are most likely to occur in newborns up to 8 weeks of age, and infants born prematurely or with medical problems may be particularly at risk.65,68

Helping patients weigh risks and benefits of drug therapy

Women may hear about the risks of medications to the fetus and during breastfeeding and so may be reluctant to seek or accept intervention. Often, the information is not from a reliable, scientifically based source. Primary care physicians are well positioned to guide peripartum women in risk-benefit analysis of proper treatment of their depression vs no treatment or undertreatment. In addition, establishing referral sources—ideally with a peripartum mental health specialist—is advisable. Online resources that clinicians can refer patients to for help in managing peripartum depression include the following:

INCREASED AWARENESS IS KEY

Primary care physicians must remain alert to the high prevalence of depression in women of childbearing age and embrace routine screening for depression. (See the sidebar, “The primary care management of peripartum depression.”) Since half of pregnancies are unintended, awareness of the risks of undetected and untreated peripartum depression to the mother, developing fetus, and infant is essential. Untreated antepartum depression has been linked to poor pregnancy outcomes, nutritional deficits, and substance abuse. Untreated postpartum depression negatively affects mother-infant attachment, infant, and child development and maternal self care.

Not treating depression is hazardous

Drug treatment during pregnancy and breastfeeding poses challenges for the patient and physician due to the inevitability of fetal and infant exposure, but lack of treatment can be hazardous.

To date, the evidence on the use of antidepressants in pregnant and lactating women is reassuring. Specialized peripartum psychiatric partial hospital programs69 and inpatient programs70 exist for women who need a higher level of care. There is also substantial evidence that psychotherapy, especially cognitive behavioral therapy and interpersonal therapy, is highly effective, and emerging data on complementary and alternative treatments are promising. Coordinated care between primary care and behavioral healthcare providers with expertise in treating peripartum depression is most likely to yield optimal outcomes.

References
  1. World Health Organization (WHO). A message from the Director General. www.who.int/whr/2001/dg_message/en/index.html. Accessed March 6, 2017.
  2. Gavin NI, Gaynes BN, Lohr KN, Meltzer-Brody S, Gartlehner G, Swinson T. Perinatal depression: a systematic review of prevalence and incidence. Obset Gynecol 2005; 106:1071–1083.
  3. Davalos DB, Yadon CA, Tregellas HC. Untreated prenatal maternal depression and the potential risks to offspring: a review. Arch Women’s Mental Health 2012; 15:1–14.
  4. Chaudron LH, Klein MH, Remington P, Palta M, Allen C, Essex MJ. Predictors, prodromes and incidence of postpartum depression. J Psychosom Obstet Gynaecol 2001; 22:103–112.
  5. Orr ST, Blazer DG, Orr CA. Maternal prenatal depressive symptoms, nicotine addiction, and smoking-related knowledge, attitudes, beliefs, and behaviors. Matern Child Health J 2012; 16:973–978.
  6. Flynn HA, Chermack ST. Prenatal alcohol use: the role of lifetime problems with alcohol,drugs, depression, and violence. J Stud Alcohol Drugs 2008; 69:500–509.
  7. Bodnar LM, Wisner KL, Moses-Kolko E, Sit DK, Hanusa BH. Prepregnancy body mass index, gestational weight gain, and the likelihood of major depressive disorder during pregnancy. J Clin Psychiatry 2009; 70:1290–1296.
  8. Yonkers KA, Wisner KL, Stewart DE, et al. The management of depression during pregnancy: a report from the American Psychiatric Association and the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists. Obstet Gynecol 2009; 114:703–713.
  9. Han A, Stewart DE. Maternal and fetal outcomes of intimate partner violence associated with pregnancy in the Latin American and Caribbean region. Int J Gynecol Obstet 2014; 124:6–11.
  10. McFarland J, Salisbury AL, Battler CL, Hawes K, Halloran K, Lester BM. Major depressive disorder during pregnancy and emotional attachment to the fetus. Arch Womens Ment Health 2011; 14:425–434.
  11. Suri R, Althuler LA, Mintz J. Depression and the decision to abort. Am J Psychiatry 2004; 161:1502.
  12. Kim DR, Sockol LE, Sammel MD, Kelly C, Moseley M, Epperson CN. Elevated risk of adverse obstetric outcomes in pregnant women with depression. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2013; 16:475–482.
  13. Mautner E, Greimel E, Trutnovsky G, Daghofer F, Egger JW, Lang U. Quality of life outcomes in pregnancy and postpartum complicated by hypertensive disorders, gestational diabetes, and preterm birth. J Psychosom Obstet Gynaecol 2009; 30:231–237.
  14. Katon JG, Russo J, Gavin AR, Melville JL, Katon WJ. Diabetes and depression in pregnancy: is there an association? J Women’s Health (Larchmt) 2011; 20:983–989.
  15. Delahaije DH, Dirksen CD, Peeters LL, Smits LJ. Anxiety and depression following preeclampsia or HELLP syndrome: a systematic review. Acta Obstet Gynecol Scand 2013; 92:746–761.
  16. O’Higgins M, Roberts IS, Glover V, Taylor A. Mother-child bonding at 1 year; associations with symptoms of postnatal depression and bonding in the first few weeks. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2013; 16:381–389.
  17. Field T, Healy BT, Goldstein S, Guthertz M. Behavior-state matching and synchrony in mother-infant interactions of nondepressed versus depressed dyads. Dev Psychol 1990; 26:7–14.
  18. Kingston D, Tough S, Whitfield H. Prenatal and postpartum maternal psychological distress and infant development: a systematic review. Child Psychiatry Hum Dev 2012; 43:683–714.
  19. Lancaster CA, Gold KJ, Flynn HA, Yoo H, Marcus SM, Davis MM. Risk factors for depressive symptoms during pregnancy: a systematic review. Am J Obstet Gynecol 2010; 202:5–14.
  20. Lindahl V, Pearson JL, Colpe L. Prevalence of suicidality during pregnancy and the postpartum. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2005; 8:77–87.
  21. Appleby L. Suicide after pregnancy and the first postnatal year. BMJ 1991; 302:137–140.
  22. Bloch M, Schmidt PJ, Danaceau M, Murphy J, Nieman L, Rubinow DR. Effects of gonadal steroids in women with a history of postpartum depression. Am J Psychiatry 2000; 157:924–930.
  23. Workman JL, Barha CK, Galea LAM. Endocrine substrates of cognitive and affective changes during pregnancy and postpartum. Behav Neurosci 2012; 126:54–72.
  24. Meltzer-Brody S. New insights into perinatal depression: pathogenesis and treatment during pregnancy and postpartum. Dialogues Clin Neurosci 2011; 13:89–100.
  25. O’Hara MW, McCabe JE. Postpartum depression: current status and future directions. Annu Rev Clin Psychol 2013; 9:379–407.
  26. Goodman SH, Rouse MH, Connell AM, Broth MR, Hall CM, Heyward D. Maternal depression and child psychopathology: a meta-analytic review. Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev 2011; 14:1–27
  27. Muzik M, Bocknek EL, Broderick A, et al. Mother-infant bonding impairment across the first 6 months postpartum: the primacy of psychopathology in women with childhood abuse and neglect histories. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2013; 16:29–38.
  28. Farr SL, Dietz PM, Rizzo JH, et al. Health care utilisation in the first year of life among infants of mothers with perinatal depression or anxiety. Paediatr Perinat Epidemiol 2013; 27:81–88.
  29. Grace SL, Evindar A, Stewart DE. The effect of postpartum depression on child cognitive development and behavior: a review and critical analysis of the literature. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2003; 6:263–274.
  30. Murray L, Cooper PJ. Postpartum depression and child development. Psychol Med 1997; 27:253–260.
  31. Orhon FS, Ulukol B, Soykan A. Postpartum mood disorders and maternal perceptions of infant patterns in well-child follow-up visits. Acta Paediatr 2007; 96:1777–1783.
  32. Dennis CL, Ross L. Relationships among infant sleep patterns, maternal fatigue, and development of depressive symptomatology. Birth 2005; 32:187–193.
  33. Ip S, Chung M, Raman G, et al. Breastfeeding and maternal and infant health outcomes in developed countries. Evid Rep Technol Assess (Full Rep) 2007; 153:1–186.
  34. Dennis CL, McQueen K. Does maternal postpartum depressive symptomatology influence infant feeding outcomes? Acta Paediatr 2007; 96:590–594.
  35. Hatton DC, Harrison-Hohner J, Coste S, Dorato V, Curet LB, McCarron DA. Symptoms of postpartum depression and breastfeeding. J Hum Lact 2005; 21:444–449.
  36. Klein MH, Essex MJ. Pregnant or depressed? The effect of overlap between symptoms of depression and somatic complaints of pregnancy on rates of major depression in the second trimester. Depression 1994; 2:308–314.
  37. Seyfried LS, Marcus SM. Postpartum mood disorders. Int Rev Psychiatry 2003; 15:231–242.
  38. Buttner MM, O’Hara MW, Watson D. The structure of women’s mood in the early postpartum. Assessment 2012; 19:247–256.
  39. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders. 5th ed. Arlington, VA; American Psychiatric Association Publishing: 2013.
  40. Wisner KL, Peindl KS, Gigliotti T, Hanusa BH. Obsessions and compulsions in women with postpartum depression. J Clin Psychiatry 1999: 60:176-180.
  41. Di Florio A, Smith S, Jones I. Postpartum psychosis. The Obstetrician & Gynecologist 2013; 15:145–150.
  42. O’Connor E, Rossom RC, Henniger M, Groom HC, Burda BU. Primary care screening for and treatment of depression in pregnant and postpartum women: evidence report and systematic review for the US Preventive Services Task Force. JAMA 2016; 315:388–406.
  43. Committee on Obstetric Practice. The American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists Committee Opinion no. 630. Screening for perinatal depression. Obstet Gynecol 2015; 125:1268–1271.
  44. Earls MF; Committee on Psychosocial Aspects of Child and Family Health American Academy of Pediatrics. Incorporating recognition and management of perinatal and postpartum depression into pediatric practice. Pediatrics 2010; 126:1032–1039.
  45. Cox JL, Holden JM, Sagovsky R. Detection of postnatal depression: development of the 10-item Edinburgh postnatal depression scale. Br J Psychiatry 1987; 150:782–786.
  46. Kroenke K, Spitzer RL, Williams JB. The PHQ-9: validity of a brief depression severity measure. J Gen Intern Med 2001; 16:606–616.
  47. Battle CL, Salisbury AL, Schofield CA, Ortiz-Hernandez S. Perinatal antidepressant use: understanding women’s preferences and concerns. J Psychiatr Pract 2013; 19:443–453.
  48. Stuart S, Koleva H. Psychological treatments for perinatal depression. Best Pract Res Clin Obstet Gynaecol 2014; 28:61–70.
  49. Deligiannidis KM, Freeman MP. Complementary and alternative medicine therapies for perinatal depression. Best Pract Res Clin Obstet Gynaecol 2014; 28:85–95.
  50. ACOG Committee on Practice Bulletins—Obstetrics. ACOG Practice Bulletin: clinical management guidelines for obstetrician-gynecologists number 92, April 2008 (replaces Practice Bulletin number 87, November 2007). Use of psychiatric medications during pregnancy and lactation. Obstet Gynecol 2008; 111:1001–1020.
  51. Ornoy A, Koren G. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors in human pregnancy: on the way to resolving the controversy. Semin Fetal Neonatal Med 2014; 19:188–194.
  52. Salisbury AL, Wisner KL, Pearlstein T, Battle CL, Stroud L, Lester BM. Newborn neurobehavioral patterns are differentially related to prenatal maternal major depressive disorder and serotonin reuptake inhibitor treatment. Depress Anxiety 2011; 28:1008–1019.
  53. Cohen LS, Altshuler LL, Harlow BL, et al. Relapse of major depression during pregnancy in women who maintain or discontinue antidepressant treatment. JAMA 2006; 295:499–507.
  54. Byatt N, Deligiannidis KM, Freeman MP. Antidepressant use in pregnancy: a critical review focused on risks and controversies. Acta Psychiatr Scand 2013; 127:94–114.
  55. Ban L, Gibson JE, West J, et al. Maternal depression, antidepressant prescriptions, and congenital anomaly risk in offspring: a population-based cohort study. BJOG 2014; 121:1471–1481.
  56. Kallen B, Olausson P. Maternal use of selective serotonin re-uptake inhibitors and persistent pulmonary hypertension of the newborn. Pharmacoepidemiol Drug Saf 2008; 17:801–806.
  57. Chambers CD, Johnson KA, Dick LM, Felix RJ, Jones KL. Birth outcomes in pregnant women taking fluoxetine. N Engl J Med 1996; 335:1010–1015.
  58. Costei AM, Kozer E, Ho T, Ito S, Koren G. Perinatal outcome following third trimester exposure to paroxetine. Arch Pediatr Adolesc Med 2002; 156:1129–1132.
  59. Salisbury AL, O’Grady KE, Battle CL, et al. The roles of maternal depression, serotonin reuptake inhibitor treatment, and concomitant benzodiazepine use on infant neurobehavioral functioning over the first postnatal month. Am J Psychiatry 2016; 173:147–157.
  60. Croen LA, Grether JK, Yoshida CK, Odouli R, Hendrick V. Antidepressant use during pregnancy and childhood autism spectrum disorders. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2011; 68:1104–1112.
  61. Rai D, Lee BK, Dalman C, Golding J, Lewis G, Magnusson C. Parental depression, maternal antidepressant use during pregnancy, and risk of autism spectrum disorders: population based case-control study. BMJ 2013; 346:f2059.
  62. Sorensen MJ, Gronborg TK, Christensen J, et al. Antidepressant exposure in pregnancy and risk of autism spectrum disorders. Clin Epidemiol 2013; 5:449–459.
  63. Clements CC, Castro VM, Blumenthal SR, et al. Prenatal antidepressant exposure is associated with risk for attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder but not autism spectrum disorder in a large health system. Mol Psychiatry 2015; 20:727–734.
  64. Castro VM, Kong SW, Clements CC, et al. Absence of evidence for increase in risk for autism or attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder following antidepressant exposure during pregnancy: a replication study. Transl Psychiatry 2016; 6:e708.
  65. Hale TW, Rowe HE. Medications and Mothers’ Milk. 16th ed. Amarillo, TX: Hale Publishing, L.P; 2014.
  66. Abreu AC, Stuart S. Pharmacologic and hormonal treatments for postpartum depression. Psychiatr Ann 2005; 35:568–576.
  67. Sit DK, Wisner KL. Decision making for postpartum depression treatment. Psychiatr Ann 2005; 35:577–584.
  68. Wisner KL, Parry BL, Piontek CM. Clinical practice. Postpartum depression. N Engl J Med 2002; 347:194–199.
  69. Howard M, Battle CL, Pearlstein T, Rosene-Montella K. A psychiatric mother-baby day hospital for pregnant and postpartum women. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2006; 9:213–218.
  70. Meltzer-Brody S, Brandon AR, Pearson B, et al. Evaluating the clinical effectiveness of a specialized perinatal psychiatry inpatient unit. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2014; 17:107–113.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Margaret M. Howard, PhD
Departments of Psychiatry and Human Behavior and Medicine, Warren Alpert Medical School of Brown University; Professor (Clinical), Women and Infants Hospital of Rhode Island, Providence

Niharika D. Mehta, MD
Department of Medicine, Warren Alpert Medical School of Brown University; Assistant Professor, Women and Infants Hospital of Rhode Island, Providence

Raymond Powrie, MD
Departments of Medicine and Obstetrics and Gynecology, Warren Alpert Medical School of Brown University; Professor, Women and Infants Hospital of Rhode Island, Providence

Address: Margaret M. Howard, PhD, Division of Women’s Behavioral Health, Women and Infants Hospital, 101 Dudley Street, Providence, RI 02905; mhoward@wihri.org

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
388-396
Legacy Keywords
depression, postpartum, peripartum, major depressive disorder, pregnancy, Patient Health Questionnaire-9, PHQ-9, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors, SSRIs, antidepressants, Margaret Howard, Niharika Mehta, Raymond Powrie
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Margaret M. Howard, PhD
Departments of Psychiatry and Human Behavior and Medicine, Warren Alpert Medical School of Brown University; Professor (Clinical), Women and Infants Hospital of Rhode Island, Providence

Niharika D. Mehta, MD
Department of Medicine, Warren Alpert Medical School of Brown University; Assistant Professor, Women and Infants Hospital of Rhode Island, Providence

Raymond Powrie, MD
Departments of Medicine and Obstetrics and Gynecology, Warren Alpert Medical School of Brown University; Professor, Women and Infants Hospital of Rhode Island, Providence

Address: Margaret M. Howard, PhD, Division of Women’s Behavioral Health, Women and Infants Hospital, 101 Dudley Street, Providence, RI 02905; mhoward@wihri.org

Author and Disclosure Information

Margaret M. Howard, PhD
Departments of Psychiatry and Human Behavior and Medicine, Warren Alpert Medical School of Brown University; Professor (Clinical), Women and Infants Hospital of Rhode Island, Providence

Niharika D. Mehta, MD
Department of Medicine, Warren Alpert Medical School of Brown University; Assistant Professor, Women and Infants Hospital of Rhode Island, Providence

Raymond Powrie, MD
Departments of Medicine and Obstetrics and Gynecology, Warren Alpert Medical School of Brown University; Professor, Women and Infants Hospital of Rhode Island, Providence

Address: Margaret M. Howard, PhD, Division of Women’s Behavioral Health, Women and Infants Hospital, 101 Dudley Street, Providence, RI 02905; mhoward@wihri.org

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

Contrary to common belief, pregnancy does not confer protection against depression.1,2 In fact, pregnant women are just as likely as nonpregnant women to become or remain depressed, and up to 12.7% of pregnant women meet criteria for depression.1

In the postpartum period, women are particularly vulnerable to a major depressive episode, whether a first episode or a recurrence. The estimated prevalence of a depressive episode in the first 3 postpartum  months is 19.2%,2 making postpartum depression the most common complication of childbearing.2 At the same time, peripartum depression remains largely underrecognized and undertreated.3

As evidence mounts regarding the deleterious impact of untreated mental illness on the mother, the developing fetus, and the infant, early detection and intervention for peripartum depression are paramount.3

DEPRESSION DURING PREGNANCY: SIGNIFICANT CONSEQUENCES

Although the rates of depression in pregnant and nonpregnant women are similar, depression in pregnancy carries additional significant consequences. Further, many depressed pregnant women believe their depression will lift once their baby is born, though it is well documented that depression during pregnancy is the strongest predictor of postpartum depression and that if left untreated it can be devastating for mother, infant, and family.4

Compared with nondepressed pregnant women, depressed pregnant women have poorer overall health status,5 are more likely to engage in behaviors that pose risk to the developing fetus such as smoking,5 alcohol consumption, and substance use,6 and have poor nutrition and inadequate weight gain.7,8

Pregnant women who are depressed and are also experiencing domestic violence are especially at risk for poor prenatal care as they tend to miss more prenatal appointments.9 Evidence also suggests that depressed pregnant women are less attached to the fetus and more likely to have elective terminations.10,11

Depression in pregnancy is associated with higher rates of adverse pregnancy outcomes such as preterm birth, low birth weight, operative delivery, and longer predelivery hospital stay.3,12 Depression and anxiety during pregnancy have been associated with prenatal hypertension,13 gestational diabetes,14 preeclampsia,15 and HELLP syndrome (ie, hemolysis, elevated liver enzymes, and low platelet count).15 Depression and anxiety during pregnancy are associated with subsequent poorer infant attachment16,17 and an overall unfavorable impact on infant and child development.18

Risk factors for depression during pregnancy include past episodes of depression, current anxiety, poor social support, unintended pregnancy, life stress, being single, domestic violence, and being on Medicaid.19

Undoubtedly the most devastating consequence of severe depression during pregnancy is suicide. Rates of suicide are lower in peripartum women,20 but when suicide does occur, pregnant women tend to use more violent means than nonpregnant women. Pregnant adolescents represent a particularly high-risk group.21

POSTPARTUM DEPRESSION

Postpartum depression is the most common complication of childbearing. Although the precise pathogenesis is undetermined, there is converging evidence of a subset of women particularly sensitive to dramatic fluctuations in levels of estradiol and progesterone that occur during childbirth.22,23 There is also evidence that dysregulation of the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal axis contributes to the development of postpartum depression in certain women.24 Further, women who have depression or anxiety during pregnancy are much more likely to experience postpartum depression than those who are not symptomatic during pregnancy.4 A history of peripartum depression or other lifetime depressive episodes, poverty, conflict with a primary partner, poor social support, stressful life events, and low self-esteem are strongly associated with postpartum depression.25

When unrecognized and untreated, postpartum depression can have profound and persistent effects on the mother and the developing infant.18,26 Mothers with postpartum depression are much more likely than mothers without depression to have impaired bonding,27 to be less responsive to their infant’s needs,17 and to be more likely to miss well-baby checkups.28

Postpartum depression’s effects on maternal-infant interactions can include maternal withdrawal, disengagement, intrusion, and hostility and can lead to long-term effects on child development, including poor cognitive functioning, emotional maladjustment, and behavioral inhibition.29,30 Infants and children of mothers with untreated postpartum depression have been shown to exhibit a higher incidence of colic, excessive crying, sleep problems, and irritability.31,32 Women with postpartum depression may be less likely to initiate or maintain breastfeeding, and depressive symptoms have been noted to precede the discontinuation of breastfeeding.33–35

Risk factors for postpartum depression

Characteristics to look for in the prenatal care of pregnant women include the following:

  • Depression during pregnancy
  • History of postpartum or other depressive episode
  • Poverty
  • Conflict with primary partner
  • Poor social support
  • Low self-esteem
  • Single status.

 

 

DIFFERENTIATING ‘POSTPARTUM BLUES’ FROM MAJOR DEPRESSION

Primary care providers are often the first point of contact for depressed women. The diagnosis of major depression in pregnant and postpartum women is challenging because of changes in sleep, appetite, and energy brought on by pregnancy, complications of delivery, and demands of caring for a newborn.36 Many pregnant and postpartum women are reluctant to disclose their symptoms due to a sense of shame and guilt for being depressed during a time in their life that society commonly regards as joyful, and this contributes to under-detection.

In the first few days postpartum, fatigue, emotionality, irritability, and worry over the infant’s well-being affect up to 75% of women. This period, typically referred to as the “baby blues” or “postpartum blues,” is not considered a disorder and responds well to support, reassurance, and adequate sleep, and it typically resolves within 2 weeks.37,38 Table 1 lists features that help distinguish postpartum blues from major depression.

Signs of major depressive disorder

Major depressive disorder is a serious and disabling condition. To meet criteria for major depressive disorder, women must report depressed mood and loss of interest or pleasure in normally pleasurable activities for at least 2 weeks. Completing the symptom profile, at least 5 of the following must be present: sleep disturbance (insomnia or hypersomnia), lack of energy, feelings of worthlessness or low self-esteem, guilt, difficulty concentrating, indecisiveness, psychomotor retardation or agitation, and thoughts of suicide or death.

The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (5th edition) recognizes that postpartum depression commonly begins during pregnancy, and now uses “peripartum onset” as the specifier for major depressive disorder that occurs during pregnancy, postpartum, or both.39 Other hallmark symptoms with peripartum onset include a lack of interest in or attachment to the pregnancy or infant, and anxiety and worry often accompanied by intrusive, unwanted thoughts of harm befalling the infant.40

Postpartum psychosis

Postpartum psychosis is a far less common presentation, occurring in 1 to 2 per 1,000 births, but it constitutes a psychiatric emergency requiring immediate referral to a psychiatric care setting. Women at highest risk are those with a personal or family history of bipolar disorder.

The clinical presentation is most commonly characterized by confusion, agitation, hallucinations, delusional beliefs, and disorientation. Suicide and infanticide, while rare, are more likely to occur in the context of a psychotic episode.41

SCREENING RECOMMENDATIONS

Screening for depression is routine in primary care settings and is no less important for peripartum women.

In 2016, the US Preventive Services Task Force issued a recommendation that all pregnant and postpartum women be screened for depression,42 highlighting the need for all medical providers to be alert to the potentially serious consequences of unrecognized and untreated maternal psychiatric illness.

The American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists (ACOG) recommends screening for depression and anxiety at least once during the peripartum period,43 and the American Academy of Pediatrics recommends screening mothers for depression at the 1-, 2-, and 4-month well-baby visits.44

The peripartum period is associated with changes in sleep, appetite, and energy levels, but these are also typical of depression. Taking this into account, the Edinburgh Postnatal Depression Scale (EPDS) was developed to screen for depression specifically in this population.45 The EPDS is a validated and widely used 10-item self-reporting questionnaire with a high degree of sensitivity and specificity; it is easily administered and quickly scored. A cutoff score of 13 (of a maximum of 30) is considered indicative of depressed mood and signals the need for further assessment.

Source: Kroenke K, Spitzer RL, Williams JB. The PHQ-9: Validity of a brief depression severity measure. J Gen In-tern Med 2001; 16:606–616. No permission required to reproduce, translate, display, or distribute.
FIGURE 1. Patient Health Questionnaire–9. A score ranging from 5 to 10 indicates mild depression, 10 to 14 moderate depression, 15 to 19 moderate to severe depression, and greater than 19 severe depression.

ACOG, the American Academy of Pediatrics, and the US Preventive Services Task Force recommend a standardized validated tool and cite both the EPDS (https://psychology-tools.com/epds/) and the Patient Health Questionnaire-9 (PHQ-9) (Figure 1) as appropriate to screen for peripartum depression.42–44 Primary care providers tend to be most familiar with the PHQ-9, a highly sensitive and specific 9-item depression screen that has been validated in primary care and obstetric clinic patients.46 A score on the PHQ-9 ranging from 5 to 10 indicates mild depression, 10 to 14 moderate depression, 15 to 19 moderate to severe depression, and greater than 19 severe depression.

 

 

CLINICAL MANAGEMENT

Many women prefer nondrug therapy

The gold standard treatment for moderate to severe major depressive disorder is psychotherapy plus pharmacotherapy. Yet many peripartum women voice concerns about exposure to pharmacologic treatment, and studies have shown that many women prefer nonpharmacologic intervention.47

Evidence-based psychotherapies that have demonstrated efficacy in peripartum women include cognitive behavioral therapy48 and interpersonal psychotherapy when administered by a psychotherapist trained in these treatments. Pregnant and breastfeeding women often express preference for psychotherapy and complementary and alternative treatments as a means of avoiding fetal and infant exposure to antidepressants.47

For mild to moderate depression, complementary therapies such as exercise, yoga, bright light therapy, and acupuncture have shown efficacy and can be used alone or adjunctively.49 Because a poor marital relationship is consistently associated with peripartum depression,25 primary care physicians who routinely address social support and screen for family conflict are well positioned to detect this significant correlate and to recommend marital or family therapy as a primary or adjunctive treatment.

When to consider drug therapy

The decision to recommend drug therapy must be individualized and based on the severity of symptoms, functional impairment, number and frequency of depressive episodes, history of response to medications, and the preferences of the patient, with the recognition that no decision is risk-free and that antidepressants enter the amniotic fluid, so fetal exposure is unavoidable.

Table 2 lists common antidepressants. The antidepressants most commonly prescribed, especially in the primary care setting, are selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs), which are favored because of their effectiveness, low side-effect profile, and lack of overdose toxicity.

Serotonin syndrome is no more likely to occur in pregnant than in nonpregnant women. Close monitoring for this condition is warranted only when patients are taking very  high doses of SSRIs or SSRIs in combination with other serotonergic agonists.

Prescribing antidepressants for pregnant or breastfeeding women requires thoughtful consideration of the patient’s preferences, as well as weighing the risks and benefits of fetal and infant exposure to maternal depression vs exposure to medications. Additional considerations include monotherapy, avoiding medication changes, choosing drugs that have been effective in the past, and avoiding drugs with known drug-drug interactions or teratogenic effects.50

There is increasing consensus that the short- and long-term consequences of undertreatment or nontreatment of maternal depression outweigh the risk of fetal exposure to SSRIs.3,51,52 Cohen et al53 have recommended that if a woman is on an antidepressant and learns she is pregnant, she should not discontinue it because of the likelihood of relapse; they found a 68% relapse rate in women who discontinued their antidepressant in the first trimester of pregnancy.53

In a comprehensive review of studies published between 1996 and 2012 that examined antidepressant use during pregnancy, Byatt et al54 found little or no evidence of increased teratogenic risk with antidepressants with the exception of paroxetine, which is associated with a small but significant increased risk of cardiac malformation during first-trimester exposure.54

These conclusions were underscored in a large cohort study in the United Kingdom.55 In addition, a joint task force of the American Psychiatric Association and ACOG reviewed studies looking at the association between depression, antidepressants, and birth outcomes including miscarriage, preterm birth, cardiac abnormalities (resulting from first trimester exposure), persistent pulmonary hypertension (related to second- and third-trimester exposure), and neonatal adaptation syndrome (associated with third-trimester exposure).8 They concluded that the available data neither support nor refute a link between the use of antidepressants and several of the above outcomes. No increase in risk of congenital malformations (including cardiac abnormalities) was found. An increased risk of persistent pulmonary hypertension was noted, although the absolute risk of this disorder remained low, at 3 to 6 per 1,000 infants exposed to SSRIs in utero.8,56

Neonatal adaptation syndrome

Neonatal adaptation syndrome is characterized by jitteriness, irritability, decreased muscle tone, and feeding difficulty in the neonate. It can occur in 15% to 30% of infants exposed to SSRIs antenatally.57,58 These symptoms, however, are transient and typically resolve within 7 to 10 days after birth. A more recent study suggested that neurobehavioral symptoms for some infants extend beyond 2 weeks and that concomitant exposure to benzodiazepines results in even higher rates of this syndrome.59 There is no evidence that tapering or discontinuing antidepressants near term is necessary, safe, or effective in preventing transient neonatal complications. However, this approach would increase the risk of relapse for the mother.

Autism spectrum disorders

The possible association between antidepressants and autism spectrum disorders in pregnancy has captured much attention in recent years. One study based on healthcare claims60 and one registry-based study61 associated in utero exposure to antidepressants with autism liability in children. However, a large-scale Danish registry-based study did not replicate this association.62 In addition, 2 recent cohort studies, identifying children with autism spectrum disorder or attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder from electronic health records, found that neither disorder was significantly associated with prenatal antidepressant exposure in crude or adjusted models. However, both studies found a significant association with the use of antidepressants before pregnancy, indicating that the risk of autism observed with prenatal antidepressant exposure is likely confounded by the severity of maternal illness.63,64

Concerns about drug therapy during breastfeeding

For infants of breastfeeding women, exposure to antidepressants through breast milk is minimal. Amounts in breast milk depend on the timing of the antidepressant dose, timing of feeding, and genetically influenced metabolic activity in mother and infant. The current literature supports antidepressant use for breastfeeding mothers of healthy full-term infants.65

The 2 most widely studied antidepressants in breastfed infants are paroxetine and sertraline. It has been shown that very little can be detected in the infant’s serum, with relative infant doses ranging from 0.4% to 2.8%.65 While clinicians are cautioned against prescribing paroxetine for pregnant women, the drug remains a suitable alternative for breastfeeding women.

If an antidepressant is started postpartum, the recommendation is to start with a low dose and then slowly titrate upward while monitoring the infant for adverse effects.65,66 Possible adverse effects in breastfeeding infants include irritability, sedation, poor weight gain, and a change in feeding patterns.67 Adverse events are most likely to occur in newborns up to 8 weeks of age, and infants born prematurely or with medical problems may be particularly at risk.65,68

Helping patients weigh risks and benefits of drug therapy

Women may hear about the risks of medications to the fetus and during breastfeeding and so may be reluctant to seek or accept intervention. Often, the information is not from a reliable, scientifically based source. Primary care physicians are well positioned to guide peripartum women in risk-benefit analysis of proper treatment of their depression vs no treatment or undertreatment. In addition, establishing referral sources—ideally with a peripartum mental health specialist—is advisable. Online resources that clinicians can refer patients to for help in managing peripartum depression include the following:

INCREASED AWARENESS IS KEY

Primary care physicians must remain alert to the high prevalence of depression in women of childbearing age and embrace routine screening for depression. (See the sidebar, “The primary care management of peripartum depression.”) Since half of pregnancies are unintended, awareness of the risks of undetected and untreated peripartum depression to the mother, developing fetus, and infant is essential. Untreated antepartum depression has been linked to poor pregnancy outcomes, nutritional deficits, and substance abuse. Untreated postpartum depression negatively affects mother-infant attachment, infant, and child development and maternal self care.

Not treating depression is hazardous

Drug treatment during pregnancy and breastfeeding poses challenges for the patient and physician due to the inevitability of fetal and infant exposure, but lack of treatment can be hazardous.

To date, the evidence on the use of antidepressants in pregnant and lactating women is reassuring. Specialized peripartum psychiatric partial hospital programs69 and inpatient programs70 exist for women who need a higher level of care. There is also substantial evidence that psychotherapy, especially cognitive behavioral therapy and interpersonal therapy, is highly effective, and emerging data on complementary and alternative treatments are promising. Coordinated care between primary care and behavioral healthcare providers with expertise in treating peripartum depression is most likely to yield optimal outcomes.

Contrary to common belief, pregnancy does not confer protection against depression.1,2 In fact, pregnant women are just as likely as nonpregnant women to become or remain depressed, and up to 12.7% of pregnant women meet criteria for depression.1

In the postpartum period, women are particularly vulnerable to a major depressive episode, whether a first episode or a recurrence. The estimated prevalence of a depressive episode in the first 3 postpartum  months is 19.2%,2 making postpartum depression the most common complication of childbearing.2 At the same time, peripartum depression remains largely underrecognized and undertreated.3

As evidence mounts regarding the deleterious impact of untreated mental illness on the mother, the developing fetus, and the infant, early detection and intervention for peripartum depression are paramount.3

DEPRESSION DURING PREGNANCY: SIGNIFICANT CONSEQUENCES

Although the rates of depression in pregnant and nonpregnant women are similar, depression in pregnancy carries additional significant consequences. Further, many depressed pregnant women believe their depression will lift once their baby is born, though it is well documented that depression during pregnancy is the strongest predictor of postpartum depression and that if left untreated it can be devastating for mother, infant, and family.4

Compared with nondepressed pregnant women, depressed pregnant women have poorer overall health status,5 are more likely to engage in behaviors that pose risk to the developing fetus such as smoking,5 alcohol consumption, and substance use,6 and have poor nutrition and inadequate weight gain.7,8

Pregnant women who are depressed and are also experiencing domestic violence are especially at risk for poor prenatal care as they tend to miss more prenatal appointments.9 Evidence also suggests that depressed pregnant women are less attached to the fetus and more likely to have elective terminations.10,11

Depression in pregnancy is associated with higher rates of adverse pregnancy outcomes such as preterm birth, low birth weight, operative delivery, and longer predelivery hospital stay.3,12 Depression and anxiety during pregnancy have been associated with prenatal hypertension,13 gestational diabetes,14 preeclampsia,15 and HELLP syndrome (ie, hemolysis, elevated liver enzymes, and low platelet count).15 Depression and anxiety during pregnancy are associated with subsequent poorer infant attachment16,17 and an overall unfavorable impact on infant and child development.18

Risk factors for depression during pregnancy include past episodes of depression, current anxiety, poor social support, unintended pregnancy, life stress, being single, domestic violence, and being on Medicaid.19

Undoubtedly the most devastating consequence of severe depression during pregnancy is suicide. Rates of suicide are lower in peripartum women,20 but when suicide does occur, pregnant women tend to use more violent means than nonpregnant women. Pregnant adolescents represent a particularly high-risk group.21

POSTPARTUM DEPRESSION

Postpartum depression is the most common complication of childbearing. Although the precise pathogenesis is undetermined, there is converging evidence of a subset of women particularly sensitive to dramatic fluctuations in levels of estradiol and progesterone that occur during childbirth.22,23 There is also evidence that dysregulation of the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal axis contributes to the development of postpartum depression in certain women.24 Further, women who have depression or anxiety during pregnancy are much more likely to experience postpartum depression than those who are not symptomatic during pregnancy.4 A history of peripartum depression or other lifetime depressive episodes, poverty, conflict with a primary partner, poor social support, stressful life events, and low self-esteem are strongly associated with postpartum depression.25

When unrecognized and untreated, postpartum depression can have profound and persistent effects on the mother and the developing infant.18,26 Mothers with postpartum depression are much more likely than mothers without depression to have impaired bonding,27 to be less responsive to their infant’s needs,17 and to be more likely to miss well-baby checkups.28

Postpartum depression’s effects on maternal-infant interactions can include maternal withdrawal, disengagement, intrusion, and hostility and can lead to long-term effects on child development, including poor cognitive functioning, emotional maladjustment, and behavioral inhibition.29,30 Infants and children of mothers with untreated postpartum depression have been shown to exhibit a higher incidence of colic, excessive crying, sleep problems, and irritability.31,32 Women with postpartum depression may be less likely to initiate or maintain breastfeeding, and depressive symptoms have been noted to precede the discontinuation of breastfeeding.33–35

Risk factors for postpartum depression

Characteristics to look for in the prenatal care of pregnant women include the following:

  • Depression during pregnancy
  • History of postpartum or other depressive episode
  • Poverty
  • Conflict with primary partner
  • Poor social support
  • Low self-esteem
  • Single status.

 

 

DIFFERENTIATING ‘POSTPARTUM BLUES’ FROM MAJOR DEPRESSION

Primary care providers are often the first point of contact for depressed women. The diagnosis of major depression in pregnant and postpartum women is challenging because of changes in sleep, appetite, and energy brought on by pregnancy, complications of delivery, and demands of caring for a newborn.36 Many pregnant and postpartum women are reluctant to disclose their symptoms due to a sense of shame and guilt for being depressed during a time in their life that society commonly regards as joyful, and this contributes to under-detection.

In the first few days postpartum, fatigue, emotionality, irritability, and worry over the infant’s well-being affect up to 75% of women. This period, typically referred to as the “baby blues” or “postpartum blues,” is not considered a disorder and responds well to support, reassurance, and adequate sleep, and it typically resolves within 2 weeks.37,38 Table 1 lists features that help distinguish postpartum blues from major depression.

Signs of major depressive disorder

Major depressive disorder is a serious and disabling condition. To meet criteria for major depressive disorder, women must report depressed mood and loss of interest or pleasure in normally pleasurable activities for at least 2 weeks. Completing the symptom profile, at least 5 of the following must be present: sleep disturbance (insomnia or hypersomnia), lack of energy, feelings of worthlessness or low self-esteem, guilt, difficulty concentrating, indecisiveness, psychomotor retardation or agitation, and thoughts of suicide or death.

The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (5th edition) recognizes that postpartum depression commonly begins during pregnancy, and now uses “peripartum onset” as the specifier for major depressive disorder that occurs during pregnancy, postpartum, or both.39 Other hallmark symptoms with peripartum onset include a lack of interest in or attachment to the pregnancy or infant, and anxiety and worry often accompanied by intrusive, unwanted thoughts of harm befalling the infant.40

Postpartum psychosis

Postpartum psychosis is a far less common presentation, occurring in 1 to 2 per 1,000 births, but it constitutes a psychiatric emergency requiring immediate referral to a psychiatric care setting. Women at highest risk are those with a personal or family history of bipolar disorder.

The clinical presentation is most commonly characterized by confusion, agitation, hallucinations, delusional beliefs, and disorientation. Suicide and infanticide, while rare, are more likely to occur in the context of a psychotic episode.41

SCREENING RECOMMENDATIONS

Screening for depression is routine in primary care settings and is no less important for peripartum women.

In 2016, the US Preventive Services Task Force issued a recommendation that all pregnant and postpartum women be screened for depression,42 highlighting the need for all medical providers to be alert to the potentially serious consequences of unrecognized and untreated maternal psychiatric illness.

The American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists (ACOG) recommends screening for depression and anxiety at least once during the peripartum period,43 and the American Academy of Pediatrics recommends screening mothers for depression at the 1-, 2-, and 4-month well-baby visits.44

The peripartum period is associated with changes in sleep, appetite, and energy levels, but these are also typical of depression. Taking this into account, the Edinburgh Postnatal Depression Scale (EPDS) was developed to screen for depression specifically in this population.45 The EPDS is a validated and widely used 10-item self-reporting questionnaire with a high degree of sensitivity and specificity; it is easily administered and quickly scored. A cutoff score of 13 (of a maximum of 30) is considered indicative of depressed mood and signals the need for further assessment.

Source: Kroenke K, Spitzer RL, Williams JB. The PHQ-9: Validity of a brief depression severity measure. J Gen In-tern Med 2001; 16:606–616. No permission required to reproduce, translate, display, or distribute.
FIGURE 1. Patient Health Questionnaire–9. A score ranging from 5 to 10 indicates mild depression, 10 to 14 moderate depression, 15 to 19 moderate to severe depression, and greater than 19 severe depression.

ACOG, the American Academy of Pediatrics, and the US Preventive Services Task Force recommend a standardized validated tool and cite both the EPDS (https://psychology-tools.com/epds/) and the Patient Health Questionnaire-9 (PHQ-9) (Figure 1) as appropriate to screen for peripartum depression.42–44 Primary care providers tend to be most familiar with the PHQ-9, a highly sensitive and specific 9-item depression screen that has been validated in primary care and obstetric clinic patients.46 A score on the PHQ-9 ranging from 5 to 10 indicates mild depression, 10 to 14 moderate depression, 15 to 19 moderate to severe depression, and greater than 19 severe depression.

 

 

CLINICAL MANAGEMENT

Many women prefer nondrug therapy

The gold standard treatment for moderate to severe major depressive disorder is psychotherapy plus pharmacotherapy. Yet many peripartum women voice concerns about exposure to pharmacologic treatment, and studies have shown that many women prefer nonpharmacologic intervention.47

Evidence-based psychotherapies that have demonstrated efficacy in peripartum women include cognitive behavioral therapy48 and interpersonal psychotherapy when administered by a psychotherapist trained in these treatments. Pregnant and breastfeeding women often express preference for psychotherapy and complementary and alternative treatments as a means of avoiding fetal and infant exposure to antidepressants.47

For mild to moderate depression, complementary therapies such as exercise, yoga, bright light therapy, and acupuncture have shown efficacy and can be used alone or adjunctively.49 Because a poor marital relationship is consistently associated with peripartum depression,25 primary care physicians who routinely address social support and screen for family conflict are well positioned to detect this significant correlate and to recommend marital or family therapy as a primary or adjunctive treatment.

When to consider drug therapy

The decision to recommend drug therapy must be individualized and based on the severity of symptoms, functional impairment, number and frequency of depressive episodes, history of response to medications, and the preferences of the patient, with the recognition that no decision is risk-free and that antidepressants enter the amniotic fluid, so fetal exposure is unavoidable.

Table 2 lists common antidepressants. The antidepressants most commonly prescribed, especially in the primary care setting, are selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs), which are favored because of their effectiveness, low side-effect profile, and lack of overdose toxicity.

Serotonin syndrome is no more likely to occur in pregnant than in nonpregnant women. Close monitoring for this condition is warranted only when patients are taking very  high doses of SSRIs or SSRIs in combination with other serotonergic agonists.

Prescribing antidepressants for pregnant or breastfeeding women requires thoughtful consideration of the patient’s preferences, as well as weighing the risks and benefits of fetal and infant exposure to maternal depression vs exposure to medications. Additional considerations include monotherapy, avoiding medication changes, choosing drugs that have been effective in the past, and avoiding drugs with known drug-drug interactions or teratogenic effects.50

There is increasing consensus that the short- and long-term consequences of undertreatment or nontreatment of maternal depression outweigh the risk of fetal exposure to SSRIs.3,51,52 Cohen et al53 have recommended that if a woman is on an antidepressant and learns she is pregnant, she should not discontinue it because of the likelihood of relapse; they found a 68% relapse rate in women who discontinued their antidepressant in the first trimester of pregnancy.53

In a comprehensive review of studies published between 1996 and 2012 that examined antidepressant use during pregnancy, Byatt et al54 found little or no evidence of increased teratogenic risk with antidepressants with the exception of paroxetine, which is associated with a small but significant increased risk of cardiac malformation during first-trimester exposure.54

These conclusions were underscored in a large cohort study in the United Kingdom.55 In addition, a joint task force of the American Psychiatric Association and ACOG reviewed studies looking at the association between depression, antidepressants, and birth outcomes including miscarriage, preterm birth, cardiac abnormalities (resulting from first trimester exposure), persistent pulmonary hypertension (related to second- and third-trimester exposure), and neonatal adaptation syndrome (associated with third-trimester exposure).8 They concluded that the available data neither support nor refute a link between the use of antidepressants and several of the above outcomes. No increase in risk of congenital malformations (including cardiac abnormalities) was found. An increased risk of persistent pulmonary hypertension was noted, although the absolute risk of this disorder remained low, at 3 to 6 per 1,000 infants exposed to SSRIs in utero.8,56

Neonatal adaptation syndrome

Neonatal adaptation syndrome is characterized by jitteriness, irritability, decreased muscle tone, and feeding difficulty in the neonate. It can occur in 15% to 30% of infants exposed to SSRIs antenatally.57,58 These symptoms, however, are transient and typically resolve within 7 to 10 days after birth. A more recent study suggested that neurobehavioral symptoms for some infants extend beyond 2 weeks and that concomitant exposure to benzodiazepines results in even higher rates of this syndrome.59 There is no evidence that tapering or discontinuing antidepressants near term is necessary, safe, or effective in preventing transient neonatal complications. However, this approach would increase the risk of relapse for the mother.

Autism spectrum disorders

The possible association between antidepressants and autism spectrum disorders in pregnancy has captured much attention in recent years. One study based on healthcare claims60 and one registry-based study61 associated in utero exposure to antidepressants with autism liability in children. However, a large-scale Danish registry-based study did not replicate this association.62 In addition, 2 recent cohort studies, identifying children with autism spectrum disorder or attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder from electronic health records, found that neither disorder was significantly associated with prenatal antidepressant exposure in crude or adjusted models. However, both studies found a significant association with the use of antidepressants before pregnancy, indicating that the risk of autism observed with prenatal antidepressant exposure is likely confounded by the severity of maternal illness.63,64

Concerns about drug therapy during breastfeeding

For infants of breastfeeding women, exposure to antidepressants through breast milk is minimal. Amounts in breast milk depend on the timing of the antidepressant dose, timing of feeding, and genetically influenced metabolic activity in mother and infant. The current literature supports antidepressant use for breastfeeding mothers of healthy full-term infants.65

The 2 most widely studied antidepressants in breastfed infants are paroxetine and sertraline. It has been shown that very little can be detected in the infant’s serum, with relative infant doses ranging from 0.4% to 2.8%.65 While clinicians are cautioned against prescribing paroxetine for pregnant women, the drug remains a suitable alternative for breastfeeding women.

If an antidepressant is started postpartum, the recommendation is to start with a low dose and then slowly titrate upward while monitoring the infant for adverse effects.65,66 Possible adverse effects in breastfeeding infants include irritability, sedation, poor weight gain, and a change in feeding patterns.67 Adverse events are most likely to occur in newborns up to 8 weeks of age, and infants born prematurely or with medical problems may be particularly at risk.65,68

Helping patients weigh risks and benefits of drug therapy

Women may hear about the risks of medications to the fetus and during breastfeeding and so may be reluctant to seek or accept intervention. Often, the information is not from a reliable, scientifically based source. Primary care physicians are well positioned to guide peripartum women in risk-benefit analysis of proper treatment of their depression vs no treatment or undertreatment. In addition, establishing referral sources—ideally with a peripartum mental health specialist—is advisable. Online resources that clinicians can refer patients to for help in managing peripartum depression include the following:

INCREASED AWARENESS IS KEY

Primary care physicians must remain alert to the high prevalence of depression in women of childbearing age and embrace routine screening for depression. (See the sidebar, “The primary care management of peripartum depression.”) Since half of pregnancies are unintended, awareness of the risks of undetected and untreated peripartum depression to the mother, developing fetus, and infant is essential. Untreated antepartum depression has been linked to poor pregnancy outcomes, nutritional deficits, and substance abuse. Untreated postpartum depression negatively affects mother-infant attachment, infant, and child development and maternal self care.

Not treating depression is hazardous

Drug treatment during pregnancy and breastfeeding poses challenges for the patient and physician due to the inevitability of fetal and infant exposure, but lack of treatment can be hazardous.

To date, the evidence on the use of antidepressants in pregnant and lactating women is reassuring. Specialized peripartum psychiatric partial hospital programs69 and inpatient programs70 exist for women who need a higher level of care. There is also substantial evidence that psychotherapy, especially cognitive behavioral therapy and interpersonal therapy, is highly effective, and emerging data on complementary and alternative treatments are promising. Coordinated care between primary care and behavioral healthcare providers with expertise in treating peripartum depression is most likely to yield optimal outcomes.

References
  1. World Health Organization (WHO). A message from the Director General. www.who.int/whr/2001/dg_message/en/index.html. Accessed March 6, 2017.
  2. Gavin NI, Gaynes BN, Lohr KN, Meltzer-Brody S, Gartlehner G, Swinson T. Perinatal depression: a systematic review of prevalence and incidence. Obset Gynecol 2005; 106:1071–1083.
  3. Davalos DB, Yadon CA, Tregellas HC. Untreated prenatal maternal depression and the potential risks to offspring: a review. Arch Women’s Mental Health 2012; 15:1–14.
  4. Chaudron LH, Klein MH, Remington P, Palta M, Allen C, Essex MJ. Predictors, prodromes and incidence of postpartum depression. J Psychosom Obstet Gynaecol 2001; 22:103–112.
  5. Orr ST, Blazer DG, Orr CA. Maternal prenatal depressive symptoms, nicotine addiction, and smoking-related knowledge, attitudes, beliefs, and behaviors. Matern Child Health J 2012; 16:973–978.
  6. Flynn HA, Chermack ST. Prenatal alcohol use: the role of lifetime problems with alcohol,drugs, depression, and violence. J Stud Alcohol Drugs 2008; 69:500–509.
  7. Bodnar LM, Wisner KL, Moses-Kolko E, Sit DK, Hanusa BH. Prepregnancy body mass index, gestational weight gain, and the likelihood of major depressive disorder during pregnancy. J Clin Psychiatry 2009; 70:1290–1296.
  8. Yonkers KA, Wisner KL, Stewart DE, et al. The management of depression during pregnancy: a report from the American Psychiatric Association and the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists. Obstet Gynecol 2009; 114:703–713.
  9. Han A, Stewart DE. Maternal and fetal outcomes of intimate partner violence associated with pregnancy in the Latin American and Caribbean region. Int J Gynecol Obstet 2014; 124:6–11.
  10. McFarland J, Salisbury AL, Battler CL, Hawes K, Halloran K, Lester BM. Major depressive disorder during pregnancy and emotional attachment to the fetus. Arch Womens Ment Health 2011; 14:425–434.
  11. Suri R, Althuler LA, Mintz J. Depression and the decision to abort. Am J Psychiatry 2004; 161:1502.
  12. Kim DR, Sockol LE, Sammel MD, Kelly C, Moseley M, Epperson CN. Elevated risk of adverse obstetric outcomes in pregnant women with depression. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2013; 16:475–482.
  13. Mautner E, Greimel E, Trutnovsky G, Daghofer F, Egger JW, Lang U. Quality of life outcomes in pregnancy and postpartum complicated by hypertensive disorders, gestational diabetes, and preterm birth. J Psychosom Obstet Gynaecol 2009; 30:231–237.
  14. Katon JG, Russo J, Gavin AR, Melville JL, Katon WJ. Diabetes and depression in pregnancy: is there an association? J Women’s Health (Larchmt) 2011; 20:983–989.
  15. Delahaije DH, Dirksen CD, Peeters LL, Smits LJ. Anxiety and depression following preeclampsia or HELLP syndrome: a systematic review. Acta Obstet Gynecol Scand 2013; 92:746–761.
  16. O’Higgins M, Roberts IS, Glover V, Taylor A. Mother-child bonding at 1 year; associations with symptoms of postnatal depression and bonding in the first few weeks. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2013; 16:381–389.
  17. Field T, Healy BT, Goldstein S, Guthertz M. Behavior-state matching and synchrony in mother-infant interactions of nondepressed versus depressed dyads. Dev Psychol 1990; 26:7–14.
  18. Kingston D, Tough S, Whitfield H. Prenatal and postpartum maternal psychological distress and infant development: a systematic review. Child Psychiatry Hum Dev 2012; 43:683–714.
  19. Lancaster CA, Gold KJ, Flynn HA, Yoo H, Marcus SM, Davis MM. Risk factors for depressive symptoms during pregnancy: a systematic review. Am J Obstet Gynecol 2010; 202:5–14.
  20. Lindahl V, Pearson JL, Colpe L. Prevalence of suicidality during pregnancy and the postpartum. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2005; 8:77–87.
  21. Appleby L. Suicide after pregnancy and the first postnatal year. BMJ 1991; 302:137–140.
  22. Bloch M, Schmidt PJ, Danaceau M, Murphy J, Nieman L, Rubinow DR. Effects of gonadal steroids in women with a history of postpartum depression. Am J Psychiatry 2000; 157:924–930.
  23. Workman JL, Barha CK, Galea LAM. Endocrine substrates of cognitive and affective changes during pregnancy and postpartum. Behav Neurosci 2012; 126:54–72.
  24. Meltzer-Brody S. New insights into perinatal depression: pathogenesis and treatment during pregnancy and postpartum. Dialogues Clin Neurosci 2011; 13:89–100.
  25. O’Hara MW, McCabe JE. Postpartum depression: current status and future directions. Annu Rev Clin Psychol 2013; 9:379–407.
  26. Goodman SH, Rouse MH, Connell AM, Broth MR, Hall CM, Heyward D. Maternal depression and child psychopathology: a meta-analytic review. Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev 2011; 14:1–27
  27. Muzik M, Bocknek EL, Broderick A, et al. Mother-infant bonding impairment across the first 6 months postpartum: the primacy of psychopathology in women with childhood abuse and neglect histories. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2013; 16:29–38.
  28. Farr SL, Dietz PM, Rizzo JH, et al. Health care utilisation in the first year of life among infants of mothers with perinatal depression or anxiety. Paediatr Perinat Epidemiol 2013; 27:81–88.
  29. Grace SL, Evindar A, Stewart DE. The effect of postpartum depression on child cognitive development and behavior: a review and critical analysis of the literature. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2003; 6:263–274.
  30. Murray L, Cooper PJ. Postpartum depression and child development. Psychol Med 1997; 27:253–260.
  31. Orhon FS, Ulukol B, Soykan A. Postpartum mood disorders and maternal perceptions of infant patterns in well-child follow-up visits. Acta Paediatr 2007; 96:1777–1783.
  32. Dennis CL, Ross L. Relationships among infant sleep patterns, maternal fatigue, and development of depressive symptomatology. Birth 2005; 32:187–193.
  33. Ip S, Chung M, Raman G, et al. Breastfeeding and maternal and infant health outcomes in developed countries. Evid Rep Technol Assess (Full Rep) 2007; 153:1–186.
  34. Dennis CL, McQueen K. Does maternal postpartum depressive symptomatology influence infant feeding outcomes? Acta Paediatr 2007; 96:590–594.
  35. Hatton DC, Harrison-Hohner J, Coste S, Dorato V, Curet LB, McCarron DA. Symptoms of postpartum depression and breastfeeding. J Hum Lact 2005; 21:444–449.
  36. Klein MH, Essex MJ. Pregnant or depressed? The effect of overlap between symptoms of depression and somatic complaints of pregnancy on rates of major depression in the second trimester. Depression 1994; 2:308–314.
  37. Seyfried LS, Marcus SM. Postpartum mood disorders. Int Rev Psychiatry 2003; 15:231–242.
  38. Buttner MM, O’Hara MW, Watson D. The structure of women’s mood in the early postpartum. Assessment 2012; 19:247–256.
  39. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders. 5th ed. Arlington, VA; American Psychiatric Association Publishing: 2013.
  40. Wisner KL, Peindl KS, Gigliotti T, Hanusa BH. Obsessions and compulsions in women with postpartum depression. J Clin Psychiatry 1999: 60:176-180.
  41. Di Florio A, Smith S, Jones I. Postpartum psychosis. The Obstetrician & Gynecologist 2013; 15:145–150.
  42. O’Connor E, Rossom RC, Henniger M, Groom HC, Burda BU. Primary care screening for and treatment of depression in pregnant and postpartum women: evidence report and systematic review for the US Preventive Services Task Force. JAMA 2016; 315:388–406.
  43. Committee on Obstetric Practice. The American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists Committee Opinion no. 630. Screening for perinatal depression. Obstet Gynecol 2015; 125:1268–1271.
  44. Earls MF; Committee on Psychosocial Aspects of Child and Family Health American Academy of Pediatrics. Incorporating recognition and management of perinatal and postpartum depression into pediatric practice. Pediatrics 2010; 126:1032–1039.
  45. Cox JL, Holden JM, Sagovsky R. Detection of postnatal depression: development of the 10-item Edinburgh postnatal depression scale. Br J Psychiatry 1987; 150:782–786.
  46. Kroenke K, Spitzer RL, Williams JB. The PHQ-9: validity of a brief depression severity measure. J Gen Intern Med 2001; 16:606–616.
  47. Battle CL, Salisbury AL, Schofield CA, Ortiz-Hernandez S. Perinatal antidepressant use: understanding women’s preferences and concerns. J Psychiatr Pract 2013; 19:443–453.
  48. Stuart S, Koleva H. Psychological treatments for perinatal depression. Best Pract Res Clin Obstet Gynaecol 2014; 28:61–70.
  49. Deligiannidis KM, Freeman MP. Complementary and alternative medicine therapies for perinatal depression. Best Pract Res Clin Obstet Gynaecol 2014; 28:85–95.
  50. ACOG Committee on Practice Bulletins—Obstetrics. ACOG Practice Bulletin: clinical management guidelines for obstetrician-gynecologists number 92, April 2008 (replaces Practice Bulletin number 87, November 2007). Use of psychiatric medications during pregnancy and lactation. Obstet Gynecol 2008; 111:1001–1020.
  51. Ornoy A, Koren G. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors in human pregnancy: on the way to resolving the controversy. Semin Fetal Neonatal Med 2014; 19:188–194.
  52. Salisbury AL, Wisner KL, Pearlstein T, Battle CL, Stroud L, Lester BM. Newborn neurobehavioral patterns are differentially related to prenatal maternal major depressive disorder and serotonin reuptake inhibitor treatment. Depress Anxiety 2011; 28:1008–1019.
  53. Cohen LS, Altshuler LL, Harlow BL, et al. Relapse of major depression during pregnancy in women who maintain or discontinue antidepressant treatment. JAMA 2006; 295:499–507.
  54. Byatt N, Deligiannidis KM, Freeman MP. Antidepressant use in pregnancy: a critical review focused on risks and controversies. Acta Psychiatr Scand 2013; 127:94–114.
  55. Ban L, Gibson JE, West J, et al. Maternal depression, antidepressant prescriptions, and congenital anomaly risk in offspring: a population-based cohort study. BJOG 2014; 121:1471–1481.
  56. Kallen B, Olausson P. Maternal use of selective serotonin re-uptake inhibitors and persistent pulmonary hypertension of the newborn. Pharmacoepidemiol Drug Saf 2008; 17:801–806.
  57. Chambers CD, Johnson KA, Dick LM, Felix RJ, Jones KL. Birth outcomes in pregnant women taking fluoxetine. N Engl J Med 1996; 335:1010–1015.
  58. Costei AM, Kozer E, Ho T, Ito S, Koren G. Perinatal outcome following third trimester exposure to paroxetine. Arch Pediatr Adolesc Med 2002; 156:1129–1132.
  59. Salisbury AL, O’Grady KE, Battle CL, et al. The roles of maternal depression, serotonin reuptake inhibitor treatment, and concomitant benzodiazepine use on infant neurobehavioral functioning over the first postnatal month. Am J Psychiatry 2016; 173:147–157.
  60. Croen LA, Grether JK, Yoshida CK, Odouli R, Hendrick V. Antidepressant use during pregnancy and childhood autism spectrum disorders. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2011; 68:1104–1112.
  61. Rai D, Lee BK, Dalman C, Golding J, Lewis G, Magnusson C. Parental depression, maternal antidepressant use during pregnancy, and risk of autism spectrum disorders: population based case-control study. BMJ 2013; 346:f2059.
  62. Sorensen MJ, Gronborg TK, Christensen J, et al. Antidepressant exposure in pregnancy and risk of autism spectrum disorders. Clin Epidemiol 2013; 5:449–459.
  63. Clements CC, Castro VM, Blumenthal SR, et al. Prenatal antidepressant exposure is associated with risk for attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder but not autism spectrum disorder in a large health system. Mol Psychiatry 2015; 20:727–734.
  64. Castro VM, Kong SW, Clements CC, et al. Absence of evidence for increase in risk for autism or attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder following antidepressant exposure during pregnancy: a replication study. Transl Psychiatry 2016; 6:e708.
  65. Hale TW, Rowe HE. Medications and Mothers’ Milk. 16th ed. Amarillo, TX: Hale Publishing, L.P; 2014.
  66. Abreu AC, Stuart S. Pharmacologic and hormonal treatments for postpartum depression. Psychiatr Ann 2005; 35:568–576.
  67. Sit DK, Wisner KL. Decision making for postpartum depression treatment. Psychiatr Ann 2005; 35:577–584.
  68. Wisner KL, Parry BL, Piontek CM. Clinical practice. Postpartum depression. N Engl J Med 2002; 347:194–199.
  69. Howard M, Battle CL, Pearlstein T, Rosene-Montella K. A psychiatric mother-baby day hospital for pregnant and postpartum women. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2006; 9:213–218.
  70. Meltzer-Brody S, Brandon AR, Pearson B, et al. Evaluating the clinical effectiveness of a specialized perinatal psychiatry inpatient unit. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2014; 17:107–113.
References
  1. World Health Organization (WHO). A message from the Director General. www.who.int/whr/2001/dg_message/en/index.html. Accessed March 6, 2017.
  2. Gavin NI, Gaynes BN, Lohr KN, Meltzer-Brody S, Gartlehner G, Swinson T. Perinatal depression: a systematic review of prevalence and incidence. Obset Gynecol 2005; 106:1071–1083.
  3. Davalos DB, Yadon CA, Tregellas HC. Untreated prenatal maternal depression and the potential risks to offspring: a review. Arch Women’s Mental Health 2012; 15:1–14.
  4. Chaudron LH, Klein MH, Remington P, Palta M, Allen C, Essex MJ. Predictors, prodromes and incidence of postpartum depression. J Psychosom Obstet Gynaecol 2001; 22:103–112.
  5. Orr ST, Blazer DG, Orr CA. Maternal prenatal depressive symptoms, nicotine addiction, and smoking-related knowledge, attitudes, beliefs, and behaviors. Matern Child Health J 2012; 16:973–978.
  6. Flynn HA, Chermack ST. Prenatal alcohol use: the role of lifetime problems with alcohol,drugs, depression, and violence. J Stud Alcohol Drugs 2008; 69:500–509.
  7. Bodnar LM, Wisner KL, Moses-Kolko E, Sit DK, Hanusa BH. Prepregnancy body mass index, gestational weight gain, and the likelihood of major depressive disorder during pregnancy. J Clin Psychiatry 2009; 70:1290–1296.
  8. Yonkers KA, Wisner KL, Stewart DE, et al. The management of depression during pregnancy: a report from the American Psychiatric Association and the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists. Obstet Gynecol 2009; 114:703–713.
  9. Han A, Stewart DE. Maternal and fetal outcomes of intimate partner violence associated with pregnancy in the Latin American and Caribbean region. Int J Gynecol Obstet 2014; 124:6–11.
  10. McFarland J, Salisbury AL, Battler CL, Hawes K, Halloran K, Lester BM. Major depressive disorder during pregnancy and emotional attachment to the fetus. Arch Womens Ment Health 2011; 14:425–434.
  11. Suri R, Althuler LA, Mintz J. Depression and the decision to abort. Am J Psychiatry 2004; 161:1502.
  12. Kim DR, Sockol LE, Sammel MD, Kelly C, Moseley M, Epperson CN. Elevated risk of adverse obstetric outcomes in pregnant women with depression. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2013; 16:475–482.
  13. Mautner E, Greimel E, Trutnovsky G, Daghofer F, Egger JW, Lang U. Quality of life outcomes in pregnancy and postpartum complicated by hypertensive disorders, gestational diabetes, and preterm birth. J Psychosom Obstet Gynaecol 2009; 30:231–237.
  14. Katon JG, Russo J, Gavin AR, Melville JL, Katon WJ. Diabetes and depression in pregnancy: is there an association? J Women’s Health (Larchmt) 2011; 20:983–989.
  15. Delahaije DH, Dirksen CD, Peeters LL, Smits LJ. Anxiety and depression following preeclampsia or HELLP syndrome: a systematic review. Acta Obstet Gynecol Scand 2013; 92:746–761.
  16. O’Higgins M, Roberts IS, Glover V, Taylor A. Mother-child bonding at 1 year; associations with symptoms of postnatal depression and bonding in the first few weeks. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2013; 16:381–389.
  17. Field T, Healy BT, Goldstein S, Guthertz M. Behavior-state matching and synchrony in mother-infant interactions of nondepressed versus depressed dyads. Dev Psychol 1990; 26:7–14.
  18. Kingston D, Tough S, Whitfield H. Prenatal and postpartum maternal psychological distress and infant development: a systematic review. Child Psychiatry Hum Dev 2012; 43:683–714.
  19. Lancaster CA, Gold KJ, Flynn HA, Yoo H, Marcus SM, Davis MM. Risk factors for depressive symptoms during pregnancy: a systematic review. Am J Obstet Gynecol 2010; 202:5–14.
  20. Lindahl V, Pearson JL, Colpe L. Prevalence of suicidality during pregnancy and the postpartum. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2005; 8:77–87.
  21. Appleby L. Suicide after pregnancy and the first postnatal year. BMJ 1991; 302:137–140.
  22. Bloch M, Schmidt PJ, Danaceau M, Murphy J, Nieman L, Rubinow DR. Effects of gonadal steroids in women with a history of postpartum depression. Am J Psychiatry 2000; 157:924–930.
  23. Workman JL, Barha CK, Galea LAM. Endocrine substrates of cognitive and affective changes during pregnancy and postpartum. Behav Neurosci 2012; 126:54–72.
  24. Meltzer-Brody S. New insights into perinatal depression: pathogenesis and treatment during pregnancy and postpartum. Dialogues Clin Neurosci 2011; 13:89–100.
  25. O’Hara MW, McCabe JE. Postpartum depression: current status and future directions. Annu Rev Clin Psychol 2013; 9:379–407.
  26. Goodman SH, Rouse MH, Connell AM, Broth MR, Hall CM, Heyward D. Maternal depression and child psychopathology: a meta-analytic review. Clin Child Fam Psychol Rev 2011; 14:1–27
  27. Muzik M, Bocknek EL, Broderick A, et al. Mother-infant bonding impairment across the first 6 months postpartum: the primacy of psychopathology in women with childhood abuse and neglect histories. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2013; 16:29–38.
  28. Farr SL, Dietz PM, Rizzo JH, et al. Health care utilisation in the first year of life among infants of mothers with perinatal depression or anxiety. Paediatr Perinat Epidemiol 2013; 27:81–88.
  29. Grace SL, Evindar A, Stewart DE. The effect of postpartum depression on child cognitive development and behavior: a review and critical analysis of the literature. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2003; 6:263–274.
  30. Murray L, Cooper PJ. Postpartum depression and child development. Psychol Med 1997; 27:253–260.
  31. Orhon FS, Ulukol B, Soykan A. Postpartum mood disorders and maternal perceptions of infant patterns in well-child follow-up visits. Acta Paediatr 2007; 96:1777–1783.
  32. Dennis CL, Ross L. Relationships among infant sleep patterns, maternal fatigue, and development of depressive symptomatology. Birth 2005; 32:187–193.
  33. Ip S, Chung M, Raman G, et al. Breastfeeding and maternal and infant health outcomes in developed countries. Evid Rep Technol Assess (Full Rep) 2007; 153:1–186.
  34. Dennis CL, McQueen K. Does maternal postpartum depressive symptomatology influence infant feeding outcomes? Acta Paediatr 2007; 96:590–594.
  35. Hatton DC, Harrison-Hohner J, Coste S, Dorato V, Curet LB, McCarron DA. Symptoms of postpartum depression and breastfeeding. J Hum Lact 2005; 21:444–449.
  36. Klein MH, Essex MJ. Pregnant or depressed? The effect of overlap between symptoms of depression and somatic complaints of pregnancy on rates of major depression in the second trimester. Depression 1994; 2:308–314.
  37. Seyfried LS, Marcus SM. Postpartum mood disorders. Int Rev Psychiatry 2003; 15:231–242.
  38. Buttner MM, O’Hara MW, Watson D. The structure of women’s mood in the early postpartum. Assessment 2012; 19:247–256.
  39. American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders. 5th ed. Arlington, VA; American Psychiatric Association Publishing: 2013.
  40. Wisner KL, Peindl KS, Gigliotti T, Hanusa BH. Obsessions and compulsions in women with postpartum depression. J Clin Psychiatry 1999: 60:176-180.
  41. Di Florio A, Smith S, Jones I. Postpartum psychosis. The Obstetrician & Gynecologist 2013; 15:145–150.
  42. O’Connor E, Rossom RC, Henniger M, Groom HC, Burda BU. Primary care screening for and treatment of depression in pregnant and postpartum women: evidence report and systematic review for the US Preventive Services Task Force. JAMA 2016; 315:388–406.
  43. Committee on Obstetric Practice. The American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists Committee Opinion no. 630. Screening for perinatal depression. Obstet Gynecol 2015; 125:1268–1271.
  44. Earls MF; Committee on Psychosocial Aspects of Child and Family Health American Academy of Pediatrics. Incorporating recognition and management of perinatal and postpartum depression into pediatric practice. Pediatrics 2010; 126:1032–1039.
  45. Cox JL, Holden JM, Sagovsky R. Detection of postnatal depression: development of the 10-item Edinburgh postnatal depression scale. Br J Psychiatry 1987; 150:782–786.
  46. Kroenke K, Spitzer RL, Williams JB. The PHQ-9: validity of a brief depression severity measure. J Gen Intern Med 2001; 16:606–616.
  47. Battle CL, Salisbury AL, Schofield CA, Ortiz-Hernandez S. Perinatal antidepressant use: understanding women’s preferences and concerns. J Psychiatr Pract 2013; 19:443–453.
  48. Stuart S, Koleva H. Psychological treatments for perinatal depression. Best Pract Res Clin Obstet Gynaecol 2014; 28:61–70.
  49. Deligiannidis KM, Freeman MP. Complementary and alternative medicine therapies for perinatal depression. Best Pract Res Clin Obstet Gynaecol 2014; 28:85–95.
  50. ACOG Committee on Practice Bulletins—Obstetrics. ACOG Practice Bulletin: clinical management guidelines for obstetrician-gynecologists number 92, April 2008 (replaces Practice Bulletin number 87, November 2007). Use of psychiatric medications during pregnancy and lactation. Obstet Gynecol 2008; 111:1001–1020.
  51. Ornoy A, Koren G. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors in human pregnancy: on the way to resolving the controversy. Semin Fetal Neonatal Med 2014; 19:188–194.
  52. Salisbury AL, Wisner KL, Pearlstein T, Battle CL, Stroud L, Lester BM. Newborn neurobehavioral patterns are differentially related to prenatal maternal major depressive disorder and serotonin reuptake inhibitor treatment. Depress Anxiety 2011; 28:1008–1019.
  53. Cohen LS, Altshuler LL, Harlow BL, et al. Relapse of major depression during pregnancy in women who maintain or discontinue antidepressant treatment. JAMA 2006; 295:499–507.
  54. Byatt N, Deligiannidis KM, Freeman MP. Antidepressant use in pregnancy: a critical review focused on risks and controversies. Acta Psychiatr Scand 2013; 127:94–114.
  55. Ban L, Gibson JE, West J, et al. Maternal depression, antidepressant prescriptions, and congenital anomaly risk in offspring: a population-based cohort study. BJOG 2014; 121:1471–1481.
  56. Kallen B, Olausson P. Maternal use of selective serotonin re-uptake inhibitors and persistent pulmonary hypertension of the newborn. Pharmacoepidemiol Drug Saf 2008; 17:801–806.
  57. Chambers CD, Johnson KA, Dick LM, Felix RJ, Jones KL. Birth outcomes in pregnant women taking fluoxetine. N Engl J Med 1996; 335:1010–1015.
  58. Costei AM, Kozer E, Ho T, Ito S, Koren G. Perinatal outcome following third trimester exposure to paroxetine. Arch Pediatr Adolesc Med 2002; 156:1129–1132.
  59. Salisbury AL, O’Grady KE, Battle CL, et al. The roles of maternal depression, serotonin reuptake inhibitor treatment, and concomitant benzodiazepine use on infant neurobehavioral functioning over the first postnatal month. Am J Psychiatry 2016; 173:147–157.
  60. Croen LA, Grether JK, Yoshida CK, Odouli R, Hendrick V. Antidepressant use during pregnancy and childhood autism spectrum disorders. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2011; 68:1104–1112.
  61. Rai D, Lee BK, Dalman C, Golding J, Lewis G, Magnusson C. Parental depression, maternal antidepressant use during pregnancy, and risk of autism spectrum disorders: population based case-control study. BMJ 2013; 346:f2059.
  62. Sorensen MJ, Gronborg TK, Christensen J, et al. Antidepressant exposure in pregnancy and risk of autism spectrum disorders. Clin Epidemiol 2013; 5:449–459.
  63. Clements CC, Castro VM, Blumenthal SR, et al. Prenatal antidepressant exposure is associated with risk for attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder but not autism spectrum disorder in a large health system. Mol Psychiatry 2015; 20:727–734.
  64. Castro VM, Kong SW, Clements CC, et al. Absence of evidence for increase in risk for autism or attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder following antidepressant exposure during pregnancy: a replication study. Transl Psychiatry 2016; 6:e708.
  65. Hale TW, Rowe HE. Medications and Mothers’ Milk. 16th ed. Amarillo, TX: Hale Publishing, L.P; 2014.
  66. Abreu AC, Stuart S. Pharmacologic and hormonal treatments for postpartum depression. Psychiatr Ann 2005; 35:568–576.
  67. Sit DK, Wisner KL. Decision making for postpartum depression treatment. Psychiatr Ann 2005; 35:577–584.
  68. Wisner KL, Parry BL, Piontek CM. Clinical practice. Postpartum depression. N Engl J Med 2002; 347:194–199.
  69. Howard M, Battle CL, Pearlstein T, Rosene-Montella K. A psychiatric mother-baby day hospital for pregnant and postpartum women. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2006; 9:213–218.
  70. Meltzer-Brody S, Brandon AR, Pearson B, et al. Evaluating the clinical effectiveness of a specialized perinatal psychiatry inpatient unit. Arch Women’s Ment Health 2014; 17:107–113.
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Page Number
388-396
Page Number
388-396
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Peripartum depression: Early recognition improves outcomes
Display Headline
Peripartum depression: Early recognition improves outcomes
Legacy Keywords
depression, postpartum, peripartum, major depressive disorder, pregnancy, Patient Health Questionnaire-9, PHQ-9, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors, SSRIs, antidepressants, Margaret Howard, Niharika Mehta, Raymond Powrie
Legacy Keywords
depression, postpartum, peripartum, major depressive disorder, pregnancy, Patient Health Questionnaire-9, PHQ-9, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors, SSRIs, antidepressants, Margaret Howard, Niharika Mehta, Raymond Powrie
Sections
Inside the Article

KEY POINTS

  • Depression occurs in up to 13% of pregnant women, a prevalence similar to that in nonpregnant women, but the incidence rises postpartum.
  • Depressed pregnant women are more likely to engage in behaviors that pose a risk to the fetus.
  • Depression in pregnancy is associated with adverse pregnancy outcomes such as preterm birth, low birth weight, gestational diabetes, and hypertensive disorders of pregnancy.
  • Risk factors for depression in pregnancy include past episodes of depression, poor social support, unwanted pregnancy, and domestic violence.
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Article PDF Media

Chronic constipation: Update on management

Article Type
Changed
Display Headline
Chronic constipation: Update on management

Chronic constipation has a variety of possible causes and mechanisms. Although traditional conservative treatments are still valid and first-line, if these fail, clinicians can choose from a growing list of new treatments, tailored to the cause in the individual patient.

This article discusses how defecation works (or doesn’t), the types of chronic constipation, the available diagnostic tools, and traditional and newer treatments, including some still in development.

THE EPIDEMIOLOGY OF CONSTIPATION

Chronic constipation is one of the most common gastrointestinal disorders, affecting about 15% of all adults and 30% of those over the age of 60.1 It can be a primary disorder or secondary to other factors.

Constipation is more prevalent in women and in institutionalized elderly people.2 It is associated with lower socioeconomic status, depression, less self-reported physical activity, certain medications, and stressful life events.3 Given its high prevalence and its impact on quality of life, it is also associated with significant utilization of healthcare resources.4

Constipation defined by Rome IV criteria

Physicians and patients may disagree about what constitutes constipation. Physicians primarily regard it as infrequent bowel movements, while patients tend to have a broader definition. According to the Rome IV criteria,5 chronic constipation is defined by the presence of the following for at least 3 months (with symptom onset at least 6 months prior to diagnosis):

 (1) Two or more of the following for more than 25% of defecations:

  • Straining
  • Lumpy or hard stools
  • Sensation of incomplete evacuation
  • Sensation of anorectal obstruction or blockage
  • Manual maneuvers to facilitate evacuation
  • Fewer than 3 spontaneous bowel movements per week.

 (2) Loose stools are rarely present without the use of laxatives.

 (3) The patient does not meet the criteria for diagnosis of irritable bowel syndrome.

DEFECATION IS COMPLEX

Defecation begins when the rectum fills with stool, causing relaxation of the internal anal sphincter and the urge to defecate. The external anal sphincter, which is under voluntary control, can then either contract to delay defecation or relax to allow the stool to be expelled.6

Colonic muscles propel stool toward the rectum in repetitive localized contractions that help mix and promote absorption of the content, and larger coordinated (high-amplitude propagating) contractions that, in healthy individuals, move the stool forward from the proximal to the distal colon multiple times daily. These contractions usually occur in the morning and are accentuated by gastric distention from food and the resulting gastrocolic reflex.

Serotonin (5-HT) is released by enterochromaffin cells in response to distention of the gut wall. It mediates peristaltic movements of the gastrointestinal tract by binding to receptors (especially 5-HT4), stimulating release of neurotransmitters such as acetylcholine, causing smooth-muscle contraction behind the luminal contents and propelling them forward.

PRIMARY CONSTIPATION DISORDERS

The American Gastroenterological Association7 classifies constipation into 3 groups on the basis of colonic transit time and anorectal function:

Normal-transit constipation

Stool normally takes 20 to 72 hours to pass through the colon, with transit time affected by diet, drugs, level of physical activity, and emotional status.8

Normal-transit constipation is the most common type of constipation. The term is sometimes used interchangeably with constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome, but the latter is a distinct entity characterized by abdominal pain relieved by defecation as the primary symptom, as well as having occasional loose stools. These 2 conditions can be hard to tell apart, especially if the patient cannot describe the symptoms precisely.

Slow-transit constipation

Slow-transit constipation—also called delayed-transit constipation, colonoparesis, colonic inertia, and pseudo-obstruction—is defined as prolonged stool transit in the colon, ie, for more than 5 days.9 It can be the result of colonic smooth muscle dysfunction, compromised colonic neural pathways, or both, leading to slow colon peristalsis.

Factors that can affect colonic motility such as opioid use and hypothyroidism should be carefully considered in these patients. Opioids are notorious for causing constipation by decreasing bowel tone and contractility and thereby increasing colonic transit time. They also tighten up the anal sphincters, resulting in decreased rectal evacuation.10

 

 

Outlet dysfunction

Outlet dysfunction, also called pelvic floor dysfunction or defecatory disorder, is associated with incomplete rectal evacuation. It can be a consequence of weak rectal expulsion forces (slow colonic transit, rectal hyposensitivity), functional resistance to rectal evacuation (high anal resting pressure, anismus, incomplete relaxation of the anal sphincter, dyssynergic defecation), or structural outlet obstruction (excessive perineal descent, rectoceles, rectal intussusception). About 50% of patients with outlet dysfunction have concurrent slow-transit constipation.

Dyssynergic defecation is the most common outlet dysfunction disorder, accounting for about half of the cases referred to tertiary centers. It is defined as a paradoxical elevation in anal sphincter tone or less than 20% relaxation of the resting anal sphincter pressure with weak abdominal and pelvic propulsive forces.11 Anorectal biofeedback is a therapeutic option for dyssynergic defecation, as we discuss later in this article.

SECONDARY CONSTIPATION

Constipation can be secondary to several conditions and factors (Table 1), including:

  • Neurologic disorders that affect gastrointestinal motility (eg, Hirschsprung disease, Parkinson disease, multiple sclerosis, spinal cord injury, stroke, spinal or ganglionic  tumor, hypothyroidism, amyloidosis, diabetes mellitus, hypercalcemia)
  • Drugs used to treat neurologic disorders
  • Mechanical obstruction
  • Diet (eg, low fiber, decreased fluid intake).

EVALUATION OF CONSTIPATION

It is crucial for physicians to efficiently use the available diagnostic tools for constipation to tailor the treatment to the patient.

FIGURE 1. Diagnosis and management of chronic constipation.

Evaluation of chronic constipation begins with a thorough history and physical examination to rule out secondary constipation (Figure 1). Red flags such as unintentional weight loss, blood in the stool, rectal pain, fever, and iron-deficiency anemia should prompt referral for colonoscopy to evaluate for malignancy, colitis, or other potential colonic abnormalities.12

A detailed perineal and rectal examination can help diagnose defecatory disorders and should include evaluation of the resting anal tone and the sphincter during simulated evacuation.

Laboratory tests of thyroid function, electrolytes, and a complete blood cell count should be ordered if clinically indicated.13

Further tests

Further diagnostic tests can be considered if symptoms persist despite conservative treatment or if a defecatory disorder is suspected. These include anorectal manometry, colonic transit studies, defecography, and colonic manometry.

Anorectal manometry and the rectal balloon expulsion test are usually done first because of their high sensitivity (88%) and specificity (89%) for defecatory disorders.14 These tests measure the function of the internal and external anal sphincters at rest and with straining and assess rectal sensitivity and compliance. Anorectal manometry is also used in biofeedback therapy in patients with dyssynergic defecation.15

Colonic transit time can be measured if anorectal manometry and the balloon expulsion test are normal. The study uses radiopaque markers, radioisotopes, or wireless motility capsules to confirm slow-transit constipation and to identify areas of delayed transit in the colon.16

Defecography is usually the next step in diagnosis if anorectal manometry and balloon expulsion tests are inconclusive or if an anatomic abnormality of the pelvic floor is suspected. It can be done with a variety of techniques. Barium defecography can identify anatomic defects, scintigraphy can quantify evacuation of artificial stools, and magnetic resonance defecography visualizes anatomic landmarks to assess pelvic floor motion without exposing the patient to radiation.17,18

Colonic manometry is most useful in patients with refractory slow-transit constipation and can identify patients with isolated colonic motor dysfunction with no pelvic floor dysfunction who may benefit from subtotal colectomy and end-ileostomy.7

TRADITIONAL TREATMENTS STILL THE MAINSTAY

Nonpharmacologic treatments are the first-line options for patients with normal-transit and slow-transit constipation and should precede diagnostic testing. Lifestyle modifications and dietary changes (Table 2) aim to augment the known factors that stimulate the gastrocolic reflex and increase intestinal motility by high-amplitude propagated contractions.

Increasing physical activity increases intestinal gas clearance, decreases bloating, and lessens constipation.19,20

Toilet training is an integral part of lifestyle modifications.21

Diet. Drinking hot caffeinated beverages, eating breakfast within an hour of waking up, and consuming fiber in the morning (25–30 g of fiber daily) have traditionally been recommended as the first-line measures for chronic constipation. Dehydrated patients with constipation also benefit from increasing their fluid intake.22

LAXATIVES

Fiber (bulk-forming laxatives) for normal-transit constipation

Fiber remains a key part of the initial management of chronic constipation, as it is cheap, available, and safe. Increasing fiber intake is effective for normal-transit constipation, but patients with slow-transit constipation or refractory outlet dysfunction are less likely to benefit.23 Other laxatives are incorporated into the regimen if first-line nonpharmacologic interventions fail (Table 3).

Bulk-forming laxatives include insoluble fiber (wheat bran) and soluble fiber (psyllium, methylcellulose, inulin, calcium polycarbo­phil). Insoluble fiber, though often used, has little impact on symptoms of chronic constipation after 1 month of use, and up to 60% of patients report adverse effects from it.24 On the other hand, clinical trials have shown that soluble fiber such as psyllium facilitates defecation and improves functional bowel symptoms in patients with normal-transit constipation.25

Patients should be instructed to increase their dietary fiber intake gradually to avoid adverse effects and should be told to expect significant symptomatic improvement only after a few weeks. They should also be informed that increasing dietary fiber intake can cause bloating but that the bloating is temporary. If it continues, a different fiber can be tried.

Osmotic laxatives

Osmotic laxatives are often employed as a first- line laxative treatment option for patients with constipation. They draw water into the lumen by osmosis, helping to soften stool and speed intestinal transit. They include macrogols (inert polymers of ethylene glycol), nonabsorbable carbohydrates (lactulose, sorbitol), magnesium products, and sodium phosphate products.

Polyethylene glycol, the most studied osmotic laxative, has been shown to maintain therapeutic efficacy for up to 2 years, though it is not generally used this long.26 A meta-analysis of 10 randomized clinical trials found it to be superior to lactulose in improving stool consistency and frequency, and rates of adverse effects were similar to those with placebo.27

Lactulose and sorbitol are semisynthetic disaccharides that are not absorbed from the gastrointestinal tract. Apart from the osmotic effect of the disaccharide, these sugars are metabolized by colonic bacteria to acetic acid and other short-chain fatty acids, resulting in acidification of the stool, which exerts an osmotic effect in the colonic lumen.

Lactulose and sorbitol were shown to have similar efficacy in increasing the frequency of bowel movements in a small study, though patients taking lactulose had a higher rate of nausea.28

The usual recommended dose is 15 to 30 mL once or twice daily.

Adverse effects include gas, bloating, and abdominal distention (due to fermentation by colonic bacteria) and can limit long-term use.

Magnesium citrate and magnesium hydroxide are strong osmotic laxatives, but so far no clinical trial has been done to assess their efficacy in constipation. Although the risk of hypermagnesemia is low with magnesium-based products, this group of laxatives is generally avoided in patients with renal or cardiac disease.29

Sodium phosphate enemas (Fleet enemas) are used for bowel cleansing before certain procedures but have only limited use in constipation because of potential adverse effects such as hyperphosphatemia, hypocalcemia, and the rarer but more serious complication of acute phosphate nephropathy.30

Stimulant laxatives for short-term use only

Stimulant laxatives include glycerin, bisacodyl, senna, and sodium picosulfate. Sodium piosulfate and bisacodyl have been validated for treatment of chronic constipation for up to 4 weeks.31–33

Stimulant laxative suppositories should be used 30 minutes after meals to augment the physiologic gastrocolic reflex.

As more evidence is available for osmotic laxatives such as polyethylene glycol, they tend to be preferred over stimulant agents, especially for long-term use. Clinicians have traditionally hesitated to prescribe stimulant laxatives for long-term use, as they were thought to damage the enteric nervous system.34 Although more recent studies have not shown this potential effect,35 more research is warranted on the use of stimulant laxatives for longer than 4 weeks.

 

 

STOOL SOFTENERS: LITTLE EVIDENCE

Stool softeners enhance the interaction of stool and water, leading to softer stool and easier evacuation. Docusate sodium and docusate calcium are thought to facilitate the mixing of aqueous and fatty substances, thereby softening the stool.

However, there is little evidence to support the use of docusate for constipation in hospitalized adults or in ambulatory care. A recent review reported that docusate was no better than placebo in diminishing symptoms of constipation.36

INTESTINAL SECRETAGOGUES

The secretagogues include lubiprostone, linaclotide, and plecanatide. These medications are preferred therapy for patients with normal- or slow-transit constipation once conservative therapies have failed. Even though there is no current consensus, lifestyle measures and conservative treatment options should be tried for about 8 weeks.

Lubiprostone and linaclotide are approved by the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for both constipation and constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome. They activate chloride channels on the apical surface of enterocytes, increasing intestinal secretion of chloride, which in turn increases luminal sodium efflux to maintain electroneutrality, leading to secretion of water into the intestinal lumen. This eventually facilitates intestinal transit and increases the passage of stool.

Lubiprostone

Lubiprostone, a prostaglandin E1 derivative, is approved for treating chronic constipation, constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome in women, and opioid-induced constipation in patients with chronic noncancer pain.

Adverse effects in clinical trials were nausea (up to 30%) and headache.37,38

Linaclotide

Linaclotide, a minimally absorbed 14-amino acid peptide, increases intestinal secretion of chloride and bicarbonate, increasing intestinal fluid and promoting intestinal transit.39 It also decreases the firing rate of the visceral afferent pain fibers and helps reduce visceral pain, especially in patients with constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome.40 It is approved for chronic constipation and constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome.41–43

Dosage starts at 145 μg/day for chronic constipation, and can be titrated up to 290 μg if there is no response or if a diagnosis of constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome is under consideration. Linaclotide should be taken 30 to 60 minutes before breakfast to reduce the likelihood of diarrhea.44

Adverse effects. Diarrhea led to treatment discontinuation in 4.5% of patients in one study.42

Plecanatide

Plecanatide is a guanylate cyclase-c agonist with a mode of action similar to that of linaclotide. It was recently approved by the FDA for chronic idiopathic constipation in adults. The recommended dose is 3 mg once daily.

Data from phase 2 trials in chronic constipation showed improvement in straining, abdominal discomfort, and stool frequency after 14 days of treatment.45

A phase 3 trial showed that plecanatide was more effective than placebo when used for 12 weeks in 951 patients with chronic constipation (P = .009).46 The most common adverse effect reported was diarrhea.

SEROTONIN RECEPTOR AGONISTS

Activation of serotonin 5-HT4 receptors in the gut leads to release of acetylcholine, which in turn induces mucosal secretion by activating submucosal neurons and increasing gut motility.47

Two 5-HT4 receptor agonists were withdrawn from the market (cisapride in 2000 and tegaserod in 2007) due to serious cardiovascular adverse events (fatal arrhythmias, heart attacks, and strokes) resulting from their affinity for hERG-K+ cardiac channels.  

The newer agents prucalopride,48 velusetrag, and naronapride are highly selective 5-HT4 agonists with low affinity for hERG-K+ receptors and do not have proarrhythmic properties, based on extensive assessment in clinical trials.

Prucalopride

Prucalopride has been shown to accelerate gastrointestinal and colonic transit in patients with chronic constipation, with improvement in bowel movements, symptoms of chronic constipation, and quality of life.49–52

Adverse effects reported with its use have been headache, nausea, abdominal pain, and cramps.

Prucalopride is approved in Europe and Canada for chronic constipation in women but is not yet approved in the United States.

Dosage is 2 mg orally once daily. Caution is advised in elderly patients, in whom the preferred maximum dose is 1 mg daily, as there are only limited data available on the safety of this medication in the elderly.

Velusetrag

Velusetrag has been shown to increase colonic motility and improve symptoms of chronic constipation. In a phase 2 trial,53 the most effective dose was 15 mg once daily. Higher doses were associated with a higher incidence of adverse effects such as diarrhea, headache, nausea, and vomiting.

Naronapride

Naronapride (ATI-7505) is in phase 2 trials for chronic constipation. Reported adverse effects were headache, diarrhea, nausea, and vomiting.54

BILE SALT ABSORPTION INHIBITORS

Bile acids exert prosecretory and prokinetic effects by increasing colonic secretion of water and electrolytes through the activation of adenylate cyclase. This happens as a result of their deconjugation after passage into the colon.

Elobixibat is an ileal bile acid transporter inhibitor that prevents absorption of nonconjugated bile salts in the distal ileum. It has few side effects because its systemic absorption is minimal. Phase 3 trials are under way. Dosage is 5 to 20 mg daily. Adverse effects are few because systemic absorption is minimal, but include abdominal pain and diarrhea.55,56

 

 

MANAGING OPIOID-INDUCED CONSTIPATION

Opioids cause constipation by binding to mu receptors in the enteric nervous system. Activation of these receptors decreases bowel tone and contractility, which increases transit time. Stimulation of these receptors also increases anal sphincter tone, resulting in decreased rectal evacuation.57

Though underrecognized, opioid-induced constipation affects 40% of patients who take these drugs for nonmalignant pain and 90% of those taking them for cancer pain. Patients with this condition were found to take more time off work and feel more impaired in their domestic and work-related obligations than patients who did not develop constipation with use of opioids.58

Initial management of opioid-induced constipation includes increasing intake of fluids and dietary fiber (fiber alone can worsen abdominal pain in this condition by increasing stool bulk without a concomitant improvement in peristalsis) and increasing physical activity. It is common clinical practice to use a stool softener along with a stimulant laxative if lifestyle modifications are inadequate.59 If these measures are ineffective, osmotic agents can be added.

If these conventional measures fail, a peripherally acting mu-opioid receptor antagonist such as methylnaltrexone or naloxegol should be considered.

Methylnaltrexone

Methylnaltrexone60,61 is a peripherally acting mu receptor antagonist with a rapid onset of action. It does not cross the blood-brain barrier, as it contains a methyl group. It was approved by the FDA in 2008 to treat opioid-induced constipation in adults with advanced illnesses when other approaches are ineffective.

Adverse effects. Although the mu receptor antagonist alvimopan had been shown to be associated with cardiovascular events hypothesized to be a consequence of opioid withdrawal, methylnaltrexone has been deemed to have a safe cardiovascular profile without any potential effects on platelets, corrected QT interval, metabolism, heart rate, or blood pressure.61 Side effects include abdominal pain, nausea, diarrhea, hot flashes, tremor, and chills.

Contraindications. Methylnaltrexone is contraindicated in patients with structural diseases of the gastrointestinal tract, ie, peptic ulcer disease, inflammatory bowel disease, diverticulitis, stomach or intestinal cancer) since it can increase the risk of perforation.

Dosing is 1 dose subcutaneously every other day, as needed, and no more than 1 dose in a 24-hour period. Dosage is based on weight: 0.15 mg/kg/dose for patients weighing less than 38 kg or more than 114 kg; 8 mg for those weighing 38 to 62 kg; and 12 mg for those weighing 62 to 114 kg.62

Naloxegol

Naloxegol, FDA-approved for treating opioid-induced constipation in 2014, consists of naloxone conjugated with polyethylene glycol, which prevents it from crossing the blood-brain barrier and diminishing the central effects of opioid-induced analgesia. Unlike methylnaltrexone, which is given by subcutaneous injection, naloxegol is taken orally.

Adverse effects reported in clinical trials63,64 were abdominal pain, diarrhea, nausea, headache, and flatulence. No clinically relevant association with QT and corrected QT interval prolongation or cardiac repolarization was noted.64

Dosing is 25 mg by mouth once daily, which can be decreased to 12.5 mg if the initial dose is difficult to tolerate. It should be taken on an empty stomach at least 1 hour before the first meal of the day or 2 hours after the meal. In patients with renal impairment (creatinine clearance < 60 mL/min), the dose is 12.5 mg once daily.65

CONSTIPATION-PREDOMINANT IRRITABLE BOWEL SYNDROME

Irritable bowel syndrome is the reason for 3.1 million office visits and 59 million prescriptions in the United States every year, with patients equally distributed between diarrhea-predominant, constipation-predominant, and mixed subtypes.66

To be diagnosed with constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome, patients must meet the Rome IV criteria, more than 25% of bowel movements should have Bristol stool form types 1 or 2, and less than 25% of bowel movements should have Bristol stool form types 6 or 7. In practice, patients reporting that their bowel movements are usually constipated often suffices to make the diagnosis.5

Osmotic laxatives are often tried first, but despite improving stool frequency and consistency, they have little efficacy in satisfying complaints of bloating or abdominal pain in patients with constipation-predominant irritable syndrome.67 Stimulant laxatives have not yet been tested in clinical trials. Lubiprostone and linaclotide are FDA-approved for this condition; in women, lubiprostone is approved only for those over age 18.

Antidepressant therapy

Patients often derive additional benefit from treatment with antidepressants. A meta-analysis demonstrated a number needed to treat of 4 for selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors and tricyclic antidepressants in managing abdominal pain associated with irritable bowel syndrome.68 The major limiting factor is usually adverse effects of these drugs.

For constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors are preferred over tricyclics because of their additional prokinetic properties. Starting at a low dose and titrating upward slowly avoids potential adverse effects.

Cognitive behavioral therapy has also been beneficial in treating irritable bowel syndrome.69

Adjunctive therapies

Adjunctive therapies including peppermint oil, probiotics (eg, Lactobacillus, Bifidobacterium), and acupuncture have also shown promise in managing irritable bowel syndrome, but more data are needed on the use of these therapies for constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome before any definite conclusions can be drawn.70 Other emerging pharmacologic therapies are plecanatide (discussed earlier) and tenapanor.

Peppermint oil is an antispasmodic that inhibits calcium channels, leading to relaxation of smooth muscles in the gastrointestinal tract. Different dosages and treatment durations have been studied—450 to 900 mg daily in 2 to 3 divided doses over 1 to 3 months.71,72 The most common adverse effect reported was gastroesophageal reflux, related in part to the oil’s relaxing effect on the lower esophageal sphincter. Observation of this led to the development of enteric-coated preparations that have the potential to bypass the upper gastrointestinal tract.73

Tenapanor inhibits the sodium-hydrogen exchanger 3 channel (a regulator of sodium and water uptake in intestinal lumen), which in turn leads to a higher sodium level in the entire gastrointestinal tract (whereas linaclotide’s action is limited to the duodenum and jejunem), resulting in more fluid volume and increased luminal transit.74 It was found effective in a phase 2 clinical trial,75 and the most effective dose was 50 mg twice daily.

Since tenapanor is minimally absorbed, it has few side effects, the major ones being diarrhea (11.2% vs 0% with placebo) and urinary tract infection (5.6% vs 4.4% with placebo).75 Further study is needed to confirm these findings.

Tenapanor also has the advantage of inhibiting luminal phosphorus absorption. This has led to exploration of its use as a phosphate binder in patients with end-stage renal disease.

DYSSYNERGIC DEFECATION AND ANORECTAL BIOFEEDBACK

According to the Rome IV criteria,5 dyssynergic defecation is present if the criteria for chronic constipation are met, if a dyssynergic pattern of defecation is confirmed by manometry, imaging, or electromyography, and if 1 or more of the following are present: inability to expel an artificial stool (a 50-mL water-filled balloon) within 1 minute, prolonged colonic transit time, inability to evacuate, or 50% or more retention of barium during defecography.5

Even though biofeedback has been controversial as a treatment for dyssynergic defecation because of conflicting results in older studies,76 3 trials have shown it to be better than placebo, laxatives, and muscle relaxants, with symptomatic improvement in 70% of patients.77–79

Biofeedback therapy involves an instrument-based auditory or visual tool (using electromyographic sensors or anorectal manometry) to help patients coordinate abdominal, rectal, puborectalis, and anal sphincter muscles and produce a propulsive force using their abdominal muscles to achieve complete evacuation. Important components of this therapy include:

Proper evacuation positioning (brace-pump technique, which involves sitting on the toilet leaning forward with forearms resting on thighs, shoulders relaxed, and feet placed on a small footstool

Breathing relaxation and training exercises during defecation (no straining, keeping a normal pattern of breathing, and avoiding holding the breath while defecating)

Use of the abdominal muscles by pushing the abdomen forward, along with relaxation of the anal sphincter.80

The anorectal feedback program usually consists of 6 weekly sessions of 45 to 60 minutes each. Limitations of this therapy include unavailability, lack of trained therapists, lack of insurance coverage, and inapplicability to certain patient groups, such as those with dementia or learning disabilities.

SURGERY FOR CHRONIC CONSTIPATION

Surgery for constipation is reserved for patients who continue to have symptoms despite optimal medical therapy.

Total abdominal colectomy and ileorectal anastomosis

Total abdominal colectomy with ileorectal anastomosis is a surgical option for medically intractable slow-transit constipation. Before considering surgery, complete diagnostic testing should be done, including colonic manometry and documentation of whether the patient also has outlet dysfunction. 

Even though it has shown excellent outcomes and satisfaction rates as high as 100% in patients with pure slow-transit constipation,81–83 results in older studies in patients with mixed disorders (eg, slow-transit constipation with features of outlet dysfunction) were less predictable.84 More recent studies have reported comparable long-term morbidity and postoperative satisfaction rates in those with pure slow-transit constipation and those with a mixed disorder, indicating that careful patient selection is likely the key to a favorable outcome.85

Partial colectomies based on segmental colon transit time measurements can also be considered in some patients.86

Stapled transanal resection

Stapled transanal resection involves circumferential transanal stapling of the redundant rectal mucosa. It is an option for patients with defecatory disorders, specifically large rectoceles and rectal intussusception not amenable to therapy with pelvic floor retraining exercises.87

The efficacy of this procedure in controlling symptoms and improving quality of life is around 77% to 81% at 12 months, though complication rates as high as 46% and disappointing long-term outcomes have been a deterrent to its widespread acceptance in the United States.88–91

References
  1. Mugie SM, Benninga MA, Di Lorenzo C. Epidemiology of constipation in children and adults: a systematic review. Best Pract Res Clin Gastroenterol 2011; 25:3–18.
  2. Kinnunen O. Study of constipation in a geriatric hospital, day hospital, old people's home and at home. Aging (Milano) 1991; 3:161–170.
  3. Everhart JE, Go VL, Johannes RS, Fitzsimmons SC, Roth HP, White LR. A longitudinal survey of self-reported bowel habits in the United States. Dig Dis Sci 1989; 34:1153–1162.
  4. Shah ND, Chitkara DK, Locke GR, Meek PD, Talley NJ. Ambulatory care for constipation in the United States, 1993-2004. Am J Gastroenterol 2008; 103:1746–1753.
  5. Mearin F, Lacy BE, Chang L, et al. Bowel disorders. Gastroenterology 2016; 150:1393–1407.
  6. Bharucha AE. Pelvic floor: anatomy and function. Neurogastroenterol Motil 2006; 18:507–519.
  7. Bharucha AE, Pemberton JH, Locke GR 3rd. American Gastroenterological Association technical review on constipation. Gastroenterology 2013; 144:218–238.
  8. Grundy D, Al-Chaer ED, Aziz Q, et al. Fundamentals of neurogastroenterology: basic science. Gastroenterology 2006; 130:1391–1411.
  9. Gallegos-Orozco JF, Foxx-Orenstein AE, Sterler SM, Stoa JM. Chronic constipation in the elderly. Am J Gastroenterol 2012; 107:18–26.
  10. Mancini I, Bruera E. Constipation in advanced cancer patients. Support Care Cancer 1998; 6:356–364.
  11. Bassotti G, Chistolini F, Sietchiping-Nzepa F, de Roberto G, Morelli A, Chiarioni G. Biofeedback for pelvic floor dysfunction in constipation. BMJ 2004; 328:393–396.
  12. American Gastroenterological Association, Bharucha AE, Dorn SD, Lembo A, Pressman A. American Gastroenterological Association medical position statement on constipation. Gastroenterology 2013; 144:211–217.
  13. Costilla VC, Foxx-Orenstein AE. Constipation in adults: diagnosis and management. Curr Treat Options Gastroenterol 2014; 12:310–321.
  14. Rao SS, Singh S. Clinical utility of colonic and anorectal manometry in chronic constipation. J Clin Gastroenterol 2010; 44:597–609.
  15. Minguez M, Herreros B, Sanchiz V, et al. Predictive value of the balloon expulsion test for excluding the diagnosis of pelvic floor dyssynergia in constipation. Gastroenterology 2004; 126:57–62.
  16. Diamant NE, Kamm MA, Wald A, Whitehead WE. AGA technical review on anorectal testing techniques. Gastroenterology 1999; 116:735–760.
  17. Pezim ME, Pemberton JH, Levin KE, Litchy WJ, Phillips SF. Parameters of anorectal and colonic motility in health and in severe constipation. Dis Colon Rectum 1993; 36:484–491.
  18. Bharucha AE, Fletcher JG, Seide B, Riederer SJ, Zinsmeister AR. Phenotypic variation in functional disorders of defecation. Gastroenterology 2005; 128:1199–1210.
  19. De Schryver AM, Samsom M, Smout AI. Effects of a meal and bisacodyl on colonic motility in healthy volunteers and patients with slow-transit constipation. Dig Dis Sci 2003; 48:1206–1212.
  20. Villoria A, Serra J, Azpiroz F, Malagelada JR. Physical activity and intestinal gas clearance in patients with bloating. Am J Gastroenterol 2006; 101:2552–2557.
  21. Sikirov D. Comparison of straining during defecation in three positions: results and implications for human health. Dig Dis Sci 2003; 48:1201–1205.
  22. Muller-Lissner SA, Kamm MA, Scarpignato C, Wald A. Myths and misconceptions about chronic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2005; 100:232–242.
  23. Voderholzer WA, Schatke W, Muhldorfer BE, Klauser AG, Birkner B, Muller-Lissner SA. Clinical response to dietary fiber treatment of chronic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 1997; 92:95–98.
  24. Bijkerk CJ, de Wit NJ, Muris JW, Whorwell PJ, Knottnerus JA, Hoes AW. Soluble or insoluble fibre in irritable bowel syndrome in primary care? Randomised placebo controlled trial. BMJ 2009; 339:b3154.
  25. Suares NC, Ford AC. Systematic review: the effects of fibre in the management of chronic idiopathic constipation. Aliment Pharmacol Ther 2011; 33:895–901.
  26. Dipalma JA, Cleveland MV, McGowan J, Herrera JL. A randomized, multicenter, placebo-controlled trial of polyethylene glycol laxative for chronic treatment of chronic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2007; 102:1436–1441.
  27. Lee-Robichaud H, Thomas K, Morgan J, Nelson RL. Lactulose versus polyethylene glycol for chronic constipation. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2010; 7:CD007570.
  28. Lederle FA, Busch DL, Mattox KM, West MJ, Aske DM. Cost-effective treatment of constipation in the elderly: a randomized double-blind comparison of sorbitol and lactulose. Am J Med 1990; 89:597–601.
  29. Nyberg C, Hendel J, Nielsen OH. The safety of osmotically acting cathartics in colonic cleansing. Nat Rev Gastroenterol Hepatol 2010; 7:557–564.
  30. Ainley EJ, Winwood PJ, Begley JP. Measurement of serum electrolytes and phosphate after sodium phosphate colonoscopy bowel preparation: an evaluation. Dig Dis Sci 2005; 50:1319–1323.
  31. Kienzle-Horn S, Vix JM, Schuijt C, Peil H, Jordan CC, Kamm MA. Efficacy and safety of bisacodyl in the acute treatment of constipation: a double-blind, randomized, placebo-controlled study. Aliment Pharmacol Ther 2006; 23:1479–1488.
  32. Kienzle-Horn S, Vix JM, Schuijt C, Peil H, Jordan CC, Kamm MA. Comparison of bisacodyl and sodium picosulphate in the treatment of chronic constipation. Curr Med Res Opin 2007; 23:691–699.
  33. Mueller-Lissner S, Kamm MA, Wald A, et al. Multicenter, 4-week, double-blind, randomized, placebo-controlled trial of sodium picosulfate in patients with chronic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2010; 105:897–903.
  34. Smith B. Pathologic changes in the colon produced by anthraquinone purgatives. Dis Colon Rectum 1973; 16:455–458.
  35. Kiernan JA, Heinicke EA. Sennosides do not kill myenteric neurons in the colon of the rat or mouse. Neuroscience 1989; 30:837–842.
  36. Ottawa (ON): Canadian Agency for Drugs and Technologies in Health. Dioctyl sulfosuccinate or docusate (calcium or sodium) for the prevention or management of constipation: a review of the clinical effectiveness. www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmedhealth/PMH0071207/. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  37. Saad R, Chey WD. Lubiprostone for chronic idiopathic constipation and irritable bowel syndrome with constipation. Expert Rev Gastroenterol Hepatol 2008; 2:497–508.
  38. Johanson JF, Morton D, Geenen J, Ueno R. Multicenter, 4-week, double-blind, randomized, placebo-controlled trial of lubiprostone, a locally-acting type-2 chloride channel activator, in patients with chronic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2008; 103:170–177.
  39. Harris LA, Crowell MD. Linaclotide, a new direction in the treatment of irritable bowel syndrome and chronic constipation. Curr Opin Mol Ther 2007; 9:403–410.
  40. Johnston JM, Kurtz CB, Macdougall JE, et al. Linaclotide improves abdominal pain and bowel habits in a phase IIb study of patients with irritable bowel syndrome with constipation. Gastroenterology 2010; 139:1877–1886.e2.
  41. Lembo AJ, Schneier HA, Shiff SJ, et al. Two randomized trials of linaclotide for chronic constipation. N Engl J Med 2011; 365:527–536.
  42. Chey WD, Lembo AJ, Lavins BJ, et al. Linaclotide for irritable bowel syndrome with constipation: a 26-week, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial to evaluate efficacy and safety. Am J Gastroenterol 2012; 107:1702–1712.
  43. Rao S, Lembo AJ, Shiff SJ, et al. A 12-week, randomized, controlled trial with a 4-week randomized withdrawal period to evaluate the efficacy and safety of linaclotide in irritable bowel syndrome with constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2012; 107:1714–1725.
  44. Chey WD, Kurlander J, Eswaran S. Irritable bowel syndrome: a clinical review. JAMA 2015; 313:949–958.
  45. Shailubhai K, Talluto C, Comiskey S, Foss JA, Joslyn A, Jacob G. Phase II clinical evaluation of SP-304, a guanylate cyclase-C agonist, for treatment of chronic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2010; 105:S487–S488.
  46. Miner P, Surowitz R, Fogel R, et al. Plecanatide, a novel guanylate cyclase-C (GC-C) receptor agonist, is efficacious and safe in patients with chronic idiopathic constipation (CIC): results from a 951 patient, 12-week, multi-center trial (abstract). Gastroenterology 2013; 144:S163.
  47. Coss-Adame E, Rao SS. Brain and gut interactions in irritable bowel syndrome: new paradigms and new understandings. Curr Gastroenterol Rep 2014; 16:379.
  48. Mendzelevski B, Ausma J, Chanter DO, et al. Assessment of the cardiac safety of prucalopride in healthy volunteers: a randomized, double-blind, placebo- and positive-controlled thorough QT study. Br J Clin Pharmacol 2012; 73:203–209.
  49. Camilleri M, Kerstens R, Rykx A, Vandeplassche L. A placebo-controlled trial of prucalopride for severe chronic constipation. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:2344–2354.
  50. Tack J, van Outryve M, Beyens G, Kerstens R, Vandeplassche L. Prucalopride (Resolor) in the treatment of severe chronic constipation in patients dissatisfied with laxatives. Gut 2009; 58:357–365.
  51. Quigley EM, Vandeplassche L, Kerstens R, Ausma J. Clinical trial: the efficacy, impact on quality of life, and safety and tolerability of prucalopride in severe chronic constipation—a 12-week, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study. Aliment Pharmacol Ther 2009; 29:315–328.
  52. Ford AC, Suares NC. Effect of laxatives and pharmacological therapies in chronic idiopathic constipation: systematic review and meta-analysis. Gut 2011; 60:209–218.
  53. Goldberg M, Li YP, Johanson JF, et al. Clinical trial: the efficacy and tolerability of velusetrag, a selective 5-HT4 agonist with high intrinsic activity, in chronic idiopathic constipation—a 4-week, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled, dose-response study. Aliment Pharmacol Ther 2010; 32:1102–1112.
  54. Palme M, Milner PG, Ellis DJ, Marmon T, Canafax DM. A novel gastrointestinal prokinetic, ATI-7505, increased spontaneous bowel movements (sbms) in a phase II, randomized, placebo-controlled study of patients with chronic idiopathic constipation (CIC). Gastroenterology 2010; 138:S-128–S-129.
  55. Chey WD, Camilleri M, Chang L, Rikner L, Graffner H. A randomized placebo-controlled phase IIb trial of a3309, a bile acid transporter inhibitor, for chronic idiopathic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2011; 106:1803–1812.
  56. Wong BS, Camilleri M, McKinzie S, Burton D, Graffner H, Zinsmeister AR. Effects of A3309, an ileal bile acid transporter inhibitor, on colonic transit and symptoms in females with functional constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2011; 106:2154–2164.
  57. Pappagallo M. Incidence, prevalence, and management of opioid bowel dysfunction. Am J Surg 2001; 182(suppl):11S–18S.
  58. Bell T, Annunziata K, Leslie JB. Opioid-induced constipation negatively impacts pain management, productivity, and health-related quality of life: findings from the National Health and Wellness Survey. J Opioid Manag 2009; 5:137–144.
  59. Sykes NP. A volunteer model for the comparison of laxatives in opioid-related constipation. J Pain Symptom Manage 1996; 11:363–369.
  60. ClinicalTrials.gov. A multicenter, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled, parallel-group study of oral MOA-728 for the treatment of opioid- induced bowel dysfunction in subjects with chronic nonmalignant pain. ClinicalTrials.gov Identifier: NCT00547586. https://clinicaltrials.gov/ct2/show/NCT00547586. Accessed March 22, 2017.
  61. ClinicalTrials.gov. An open-label study to evaluate the long-term safety of subcutaneous MOA-728 for treatment of opioid-induced constipation in subjects with nonmalignant pain. ClinicalTrials.gov Identifier: NCT00804141. https://clinicaltrials.gov/ct2/show/NCT00804141. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  62. Wyeth Pharmaceuticals. Relistor package insert. http://labeling.pfizer.com/showlabeling.aspx?id=499. Accessed March 22, 2017.
  63. Webster L, Dhar S, Eldon M, Masuoka L, Lappalainen J, Sostek M. A phase 2, double-blind, randomized, placebo-controlled, dose-escalation study to evaluate the efficacy, safety, and tolerability of naloxegol in patients with opioid-induced constipation. Pain 2013; 154:1542–1550.
  64. Chey WD, Webster L, Sostek M, Lappalainen J, Barker PN, Tack J. Naloxegol for opioid-induced constipation in patients with noncancer pain. N Engl J Med 2014; 370:2387–2396.
  65. Jones R, Prommer E, Backstedt D. Naloxegol: a novel therapy in the management of opioid-induced constipation. Am J Hosp Palliat Care 2016; 33:875–880.
  66. Guilera M, Balboa A, Mearin F. Bowel habit subtypes and temporal patterns in irritable bowel syndrome: systematic review. Am J Gastroenterol 2005; 100:1174–1184.
  67. Chapman RW, Stanghellini V, Geraint M, Halphen M. Randomized clinical trial: macrogol/PEG 3350 plus electrolytes for treatment of patients with constipation associated with irritable bowel syndrome. Am J Gastroenterol 2013; 108:1508–1515.
  68. Ford AC, Quigley EM, Lacy BE, et al. Effect of antidepressants and psychological therapies, including hypnotherapy, in irritable bowel syndrome: systematic review and meta-analysis. Am J Gastroenterol 2014; 109:1350–1366.
  69. Ballou S, Keefer L. Psychological interventions for irritable bowel syndrome and inflammatory bowel diseases. Clin Transl Gastroenterol 2017; 8:e214.
  70. Ford AC, Moayyedi P, Lacy BE, et al; Task Force on the Management of Functional Bowel Disorders. American College of Gastroenterology monograph on the management of irritable bowel syndrome and chronic idiopathic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2014; 109(suppl 1):S2–S27.
  71. Ford AC, Talley NJ, Spiegel BM, et al. Effect of fibre, antispasmodics, and peppermint oil in the treatment of irritable bowel syndrome: systematic review and meta-analysis. BMJ 2008; 337:a2313.
  72. Wall GC, Bryant GA, Bottenberg MM, Maki ED, Miesner AR. Irritable bowel syndrome: a concise review of current treatment concepts. World J Gastroenterol 2014; 20:8796–8806.
  73. Kligler B, Chaudhary S. Peppermint oil. Am Fam Physician 2007; 75:1027–1030.
  74. Spencer AG, Labonte ED, Rosenbaum DP, et al. Intestinal inhibition of the Na+/H+ exchanger 3 prevents cardiorenal damage in rats and inhibits Na+ uptake in humans. Sci Transl Med 2014; 6:227ra36.
  75. Rosenbaum DP. A randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study to assess the safety and efficacy of AZD1722 for the treatment of constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome (IBS-C). 2014. https://clinicaltrials.gov/ct2/show/NCT01923428. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  76. Rao SS. Biofeedback therapy for dyssynergic (obstructive) defecation. J Clin Gastroenterol 2000; 30:115–116.
  77. Cadeddu F, Salis F, De Luca E, Ciangola I, Milito G. Efficacy of biofeedback plus transanal stimulation in the management of pelvic floor dyssynergia: a randomized trial. Tech Coloproctol 2015; 19:333–338.
  78. Chiarioni G, Whitehead WE, Pezza V, Morelli A, Bassotti G. Biofeedback is superior to laxatives for normal transit constipation due to pelvic floor dyssynergia. Gastroenterology 2006; 130:657–664.
  79. Chiarioni G, Heymen S, Whitehead WE. Biofeedback therapy for dyssynergic defecation. World J Gastroenterol 2006; 12:7069–7074.
  80. Rao SS. Biofeedback therapy for constipation in adults. Best Pract Res Clin Gastroenterol 2011; 25:159–166.
  81. Hassan I, Pemberton JH, Young-Fadok TM, et al. Ileorectal anastomosis for slow transit constipation: long-term functional and quality of life results. J Gastrointest Surg 2006; 10:1330–1337.
  82. You YT, Wang JY, Changchien CR, et al. Segmental colectomy in the management of colonic inertia. Am Surg 1998; 64:775–777.
  83. Nyam DC, Pemberton JH, Ilstrup DM, Rath DM. Long-term results of surgery for chronic constipation. Dis Colon Rectum 1997; 40:273–279.
  84. Pemberton JH, Rath DM, Ilstrup DM. Evaluation and surgical treatment of severe chronic constipation. Ann Surg 1991; 214:403–413.
  85. Reshef A, Alves-Ferreira P, Zutshi M, Hull T, Gurland B. Colectomy for slow transit constipation: effective for patients with coexistent obstructed defecation. Int J Colorectal Dis 2013; 28:841–847.
  86. Lundin E, Karlbom U, Pahlman L, Graf W. Outcome of segmental colonic resection for slow-transit constipation. Br J Surg 2002; 89:1270–1274.
  87. Schwandner O, Stuto A, Jayne D, et al. Decision-making algorithm for the STARR procedure in obstructed defecation syndrome: position statement of the group of STARR pioneers. Surg Innov 2008; 15:105–109.
  88. Titu LV, Riyad K, Carter H, Dixon AR. Stapled transanal rectal resection for obstructed defecation: a cautionary tale. Dis Colon Rectum 2009; 52:1716–1722.
  89. Goede AC, Glancy D, Carter H, Mills A, Mabey K, Dixon AR. Medium-term results of stapled transanal rectal resection (STARR) for obstructed defecation and symptomatic rectal-anal intussusception. Colorectal Dis 2011; 13:1052–1057.
  90. Jayne DG, Schwandner O, Stuto A. Stapled transanal rectal resection for obstructed defecation syndrome: one-year results of the european STARR registry. Dis Colon Rectum 2009; 52:1205–1214.
  91. Madbouly KM, Abbas KS, Hussein AM. Disappointing long-term outcomes after stapled transanal rectal resection for obstructed defecation. World J Surg 2010; 34:2191–2196.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Umar Hayat, MD
Department of Internal Medicine, Medicine Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Mohannad Dugum, MD
Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology, and Nutrition, Department of Medicine, University of Pittsburgh, PA

Samita Garg, MD
Department of Gastroenterology and Hepatology, Digestive Disease Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Address: Mohannad Dugum, MD, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology, and Nutrition, Department of Medicine, University of Pittsburgh, Mezzanine Level, C-Wing, PUH, 200 Lothrop Street, Pittsburgh, PA 15213;
mdugum.md@gmail.com

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
397-408
Legacy Keywords
constipation, irritable bowel syndrome, Rome IV, defecation, slow-transit constipation, normal-transit constipation, outlet dysfunction, dyssynergic defecation, anorectal feedback, opioids, fiber, laxatives, Umar Hayat, Mohannad Dugum, Samita Garg
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Umar Hayat, MD
Department of Internal Medicine, Medicine Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Mohannad Dugum, MD
Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology, and Nutrition, Department of Medicine, University of Pittsburgh, PA

Samita Garg, MD
Department of Gastroenterology and Hepatology, Digestive Disease Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Address: Mohannad Dugum, MD, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology, and Nutrition, Department of Medicine, University of Pittsburgh, Mezzanine Level, C-Wing, PUH, 200 Lothrop Street, Pittsburgh, PA 15213;
mdugum.md@gmail.com

Author and Disclosure Information

Umar Hayat, MD
Department of Internal Medicine, Medicine Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Mohannad Dugum, MD
Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology, and Nutrition, Department of Medicine, University of Pittsburgh, PA

Samita Garg, MD
Department of Gastroenterology and Hepatology, Digestive Disease Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Address: Mohannad Dugum, MD, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology, and Nutrition, Department of Medicine, University of Pittsburgh, Mezzanine Level, C-Wing, PUH, 200 Lothrop Street, Pittsburgh, PA 15213;
mdugum.md@gmail.com

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

Chronic constipation has a variety of possible causes and mechanisms. Although traditional conservative treatments are still valid and first-line, if these fail, clinicians can choose from a growing list of new treatments, tailored to the cause in the individual patient.

This article discusses how defecation works (or doesn’t), the types of chronic constipation, the available diagnostic tools, and traditional and newer treatments, including some still in development.

THE EPIDEMIOLOGY OF CONSTIPATION

Chronic constipation is one of the most common gastrointestinal disorders, affecting about 15% of all adults and 30% of those over the age of 60.1 It can be a primary disorder or secondary to other factors.

Constipation is more prevalent in women and in institutionalized elderly people.2 It is associated with lower socioeconomic status, depression, less self-reported physical activity, certain medications, and stressful life events.3 Given its high prevalence and its impact on quality of life, it is also associated with significant utilization of healthcare resources.4

Constipation defined by Rome IV criteria

Physicians and patients may disagree about what constitutes constipation. Physicians primarily regard it as infrequent bowel movements, while patients tend to have a broader definition. According to the Rome IV criteria,5 chronic constipation is defined by the presence of the following for at least 3 months (with symptom onset at least 6 months prior to diagnosis):

 (1) Two or more of the following for more than 25% of defecations:

  • Straining
  • Lumpy or hard stools
  • Sensation of incomplete evacuation
  • Sensation of anorectal obstruction or blockage
  • Manual maneuvers to facilitate evacuation
  • Fewer than 3 spontaneous bowel movements per week.

 (2) Loose stools are rarely present without the use of laxatives.

 (3) The patient does not meet the criteria for diagnosis of irritable bowel syndrome.

DEFECATION IS COMPLEX

Defecation begins when the rectum fills with stool, causing relaxation of the internal anal sphincter and the urge to defecate. The external anal sphincter, which is under voluntary control, can then either contract to delay defecation or relax to allow the stool to be expelled.6

Colonic muscles propel stool toward the rectum in repetitive localized contractions that help mix and promote absorption of the content, and larger coordinated (high-amplitude propagating) contractions that, in healthy individuals, move the stool forward from the proximal to the distal colon multiple times daily. These contractions usually occur in the morning and are accentuated by gastric distention from food and the resulting gastrocolic reflex.

Serotonin (5-HT) is released by enterochromaffin cells in response to distention of the gut wall. It mediates peristaltic movements of the gastrointestinal tract by binding to receptors (especially 5-HT4), stimulating release of neurotransmitters such as acetylcholine, causing smooth-muscle contraction behind the luminal contents and propelling them forward.

PRIMARY CONSTIPATION DISORDERS

The American Gastroenterological Association7 classifies constipation into 3 groups on the basis of colonic transit time and anorectal function:

Normal-transit constipation

Stool normally takes 20 to 72 hours to pass through the colon, with transit time affected by diet, drugs, level of physical activity, and emotional status.8

Normal-transit constipation is the most common type of constipation. The term is sometimes used interchangeably with constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome, but the latter is a distinct entity characterized by abdominal pain relieved by defecation as the primary symptom, as well as having occasional loose stools. These 2 conditions can be hard to tell apart, especially if the patient cannot describe the symptoms precisely.

Slow-transit constipation

Slow-transit constipation—also called delayed-transit constipation, colonoparesis, colonic inertia, and pseudo-obstruction—is defined as prolonged stool transit in the colon, ie, for more than 5 days.9 It can be the result of colonic smooth muscle dysfunction, compromised colonic neural pathways, or both, leading to slow colon peristalsis.

Factors that can affect colonic motility such as opioid use and hypothyroidism should be carefully considered in these patients. Opioids are notorious for causing constipation by decreasing bowel tone and contractility and thereby increasing colonic transit time. They also tighten up the anal sphincters, resulting in decreased rectal evacuation.10

 

 

Outlet dysfunction

Outlet dysfunction, also called pelvic floor dysfunction or defecatory disorder, is associated with incomplete rectal evacuation. It can be a consequence of weak rectal expulsion forces (slow colonic transit, rectal hyposensitivity), functional resistance to rectal evacuation (high anal resting pressure, anismus, incomplete relaxation of the anal sphincter, dyssynergic defecation), or structural outlet obstruction (excessive perineal descent, rectoceles, rectal intussusception). About 50% of patients with outlet dysfunction have concurrent slow-transit constipation.

Dyssynergic defecation is the most common outlet dysfunction disorder, accounting for about half of the cases referred to tertiary centers. It is defined as a paradoxical elevation in anal sphincter tone or less than 20% relaxation of the resting anal sphincter pressure with weak abdominal and pelvic propulsive forces.11 Anorectal biofeedback is a therapeutic option for dyssynergic defecation, as we discuss later in this article.

SECONDARY CONSTIPATION

Constipation can be secondary to several conditions and factors (Table 1), including:

  • Neurologic disorders that affect gastrointestinal motility (eg, Hirschsprung disease, Parkinson disease, multiple sclerosis, spinal cord injury, stroke, spinal or ganglionic  tumor, hypothyroidism, amyloidosis, diabetes mellitus, hypercalcemia)
  • Drugs used to treat neurologic disorders
  • Mechanical obstruction
  • Diet (eg, low fiber, decreased fluid intake).

EVALUATION OF CONSTIPATION

It is crucial for physicians to efficiently use the available diagnostic tools for constipation to tailor the treatment to the patient.

FIGURE 1. Diagnosis and management of chronic constipation.

Evaluation of chronic constipation begins with a thorough history and physical examination to rule out secondary constipation (Figure 1). Red flags such as unintentional weight loss, blood in the stool, rectal pain, fever, and iron-deficiency anemia should prompt referral for colonoscopy to evaluate for malignancy, colitis, or other potential colonic abnormalities.12

A detailed perineal and rectal examination can help diagnose defecatory disorders and should include evaluation of the resting anal tone and the sphincter during simulated evacuation.

Laboratory tests of thyroid function, electrolytes, and a complete blood cell count should be ordered if clinically indicated.13

Further tests

Further diagnostic tests can be considered if symptoms persist despite conservative treatment or if a defecatory disorder is suspected. These include anorectal manometry, colonic transit studies, defecography, and colonic manometry.

Anorectal manometry and the rectal balloon expulsion test are usually done first because of their high sensitivity (88%) and specificity (89%) for defecatory disorders.14 These tests measure the function of the internal and external anal sphincters at rest and with straining and assess rectal sensitivity and compliance. Anorectal manometry is also used in biofeedback therapy in patients with dyssynergic defecation.15

Colonic transit time can be measured if anorectal manometry and the balloon expulsion test are normal. The study uses radiopaque markers, radioisotopes, or wireless motility capsules to confirm slow-transit constipation and to identify areas of delayed transit in the colon.16

Defecography is usually the next step in diagnosis if anorectal manometry and balloon expulsion tests are inconclusive or if an anatomic abnormality of the pelvic floor is suspected. It can be done with a variety of techniques. Barium defecography can identify anatomic defects, scintigraphy can quantify evacuation of artificial stools, and magnetic resonance defecography visualizes anatomic landmarks to assess pelvic floor motion without exposing the patient to radiation.17,18

Colonic manometry is most useful in patients with refractory slow-transit constipation and can identify patients with isolated colonic motor dysfunction with no pelvic floor dysfunction who may benefit from subtotal colectomy and end-ileostomy.7

TRADITIONAL TREATMENTS STILL THE MAINSTAY

Nonpharmacologic treatments are the first-line options for patients with normal-transit and slow-transit constipation and should precede diagnostic testing. Lifestyle modifications and dietary changes (Table 2) aim to augment the known factors that stimulate the gastrocolic reflex and increase intestinal motility by high-amplitude propagated contractions.

Increasing physical activity increases intestinal gas clearance, decreases bloating, and lessens constipation.19,20

Toilet training is an integral part of lifestyle modifications.21

Diet. Drinking hot caffeinated beverages, eating breakfast within an hour of waking up, and consuming fiber in the morning (25–30 g of fiber daily) have traditionally been recommended as the first-line measures for chronic constipation. Dehydrated patients with constipation also benefit from increasing their fluid intake.22

LAXATIVES

Fiber (bulk-forming laxatives) for normal-transit constipation

Fiber remains a key part of the initial management of chronic constipation, as it is cheap, available, and safe. Increasing fiber intake is effective for normal-transit constipation, but patients with slow-transit constipation or refractory outlet dysfunction are less likely to benefit.23 Other laxatives are incorporated into the regimen if first-line nonpharmacologic interventions fail (Table 3).

Bulk-forming laxatives include insoluble fiber (wheat bran) and soluble fiber (psyllium, methylcellulose, inulin, calcium polycarbo­phil). Insoluble fiber, though often used, has little impact on symptoms of chronic constipation after 1 month of use, and up to 60% of patients report adverse effects from it.24 On the other hand, clinical trials have shown that soluble fiber such as psyllium facilitates defecation and improves functional bowel symptoms in patients with normal-transit constipation.25

Patients should be instructed to increase their dietary fiber intake gradually to avoid adverse effects and should be told to expect significant symptomatic improvement only after a few weeks. They should also be informed that increasing dietary fiber intake can cause bloating but that the bloating is temporary. If it continues, a different fiber can be tried.

Osmotic laxatives

Osmotic laxatives are often employed as a first- line laxative treatment option for patients with constipation. They draw water into the lumen by osmosis, helping to soften stool and speed intestinal transit. They include macrogols (inert polymers of ethylene glycol), nonabsorbable carbohydrates (lactulose, sorbitol), magnesium products, and sodium phosphate products.

Polyethylene glycol, the most studied osmotic laxative, has been shown to maintain therapeutic efficacy for up to 2 years, though it is not generally used this long.26 A meta-analysis of 10 randomized clinical trials found it to be superior to lactulose in improving stool consistency and frequency, and rates of adverse effects were similar to those with placebo.27

Lactulose and sorbitol are semisynthetic disaccharides that are not absorbed from the gastrointestinal tract. Apart from the osmotic effect of the disaccharide, these sugars are metabolized by colonic bacteria to acetic acid and other short-chain fatty acids, resulting in acidification of the stool, which exerts an osmotic effect in the colonic lumen.

Lactulose and sorbitol were shown to have similar efficacy in increasing the frequency of bowel movements in a small study, though patients taking lactulose had a higher rate of nausea.28

The usual recommended dose is 15 to 30 mL once or twice daily.

Adverse effects include gas, bloating, and abdominal distention (due to fermentation by colonic bacteria) and can limit long-term use.

Magnesium citrate and magnesium hydroxide are strong osmotic laxatives, but so far no clinical trial has been done to assess their efficacy in constipation. Although the risk of hypermagnesemia is low with magnesium-based products, this group of laxatives is generally avoided in patients with renal or cardiac disease.29

Sodium phosphate enemas (Fleet enemas) are used for bowel cleansing before certain procedures but have only limited use in constipation because of potential adverse effects such as hyperphosphatemia, hypocalcemia, and the rarer but more serious complication of acute phosphate nephropathy.30

Stimulant laxatives for short-term use only

Stimulant laxatives include glycerin, bisacodyl, senna, and sodium picosulfate. Sodium piosulfate and bisacodyl have been validated for treatment of chronic constipation for up to 4 weeks.31–33

Stimulant laxative suppositories should be used 30 minutes after meals to augment the physiologic gastrocolic reflex.

As more evidence is available for osmotic laxatives such as polyethylene glycol, they tend to be preferred over stimulant agents, especially for long-term use. Clinicians have traditionally hesitated to prescribe stimulant laxatives for long-term use, as they were thought to damage the enteric nervous system.34 Although more recent studies have not shown this potential effect,35 more research is warranted on the use of stimulant laxatives for longer than 4 weeks.

 

 

STOOL SOFTENERS: LITTLE EVIDENCE

Stool softeners enhance the interaction of stool and water, leading to softer stool and easier evacuation. Docusate sodium and docusate calcium are thought to facilitate the mixing of aqueous and fatty substances, thereby softening the stool.

However, there is little evidence to support the use of docusate for constipation in hospitalized adults or in ambulatory care. A recent review reported that docusate was no better than placebo in diminishing symptoms of constipation.36

INTESTINAL SECRETAGOGUES

The secretagogues include lubiprostone, linaclotide, and plecanatide. These medications are preferred therapy for patients with normal- or slow-transit constipation once conservative therapies have failed. Even though there is no current consensus, lifestyle measures and conservative treatment options should be tried for about 8 weeks.

Lubiprostone and linaclotide are approved by the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for both constipation and constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome. They activate chloride channels on the apical surface of enterocytes, increasing intestinal secretion of chloride, which in turn increases luminal sodium efflux to maintain electroneutrality, leading to secretion of water into the intestinal lumen. This eventually facilitates intestinal transit and increases the passage of stool.

Lubiprostone

Lubiprostone, a prostaglandin E1 derivative, is approved for treating chronic constipation, constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome in women, and opioid-induced constipation in patients with chronic noncancer pain.

Adverse effects in clinical trials were nausea (up to 30%) and headache.37,38

Linaclotide

Linaclotide, a minimally absorbed 14-amino acid peptide, increases intestinal secretion of chloride and bicarbonate, increasing intestinal fluid and promoting intestinal transit.39 It also decreases the firing rate of the visceral afferent pain fibers and helps reduce visceral pain, especially in patients with constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome.40 It is approved for chronic constipation and constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome.41–43

Dosage starts at 145 μg/day for chronic constipation, and can be titrated up to 290 μg if there is no response or if a diagnosis of constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome is under consideration. Linaclotide should be taken 30 to 60 minutes before breakfast to reduce the likelihood of diarrhea.44

Adverse effects. Diarrhea led to treatment discontinuation in 4.5% of patients in one study.42

Plecanatide

Plecanatide is a guanylate cyclase-c agonist with a mode of action similar to that of linaclotide. It was recently approved by the FDA for chronic idiopathic constipation in adults. The recommended dose is 3 mg once daily.

Data from phase 2 trials in chronic constipation showed improvement in straining, abdominal discomfort, and stool frequency after 14 days of treatment.45

A phase 3 trial showed that plecanatide was more effective than placebo when used for 12 weeks in 951 patients with chronic constipation (P = .009).46 The most common adverse effect reported was diarrhea.

SEROTONIN RECEPTOR AGONISTS

Activation of serotonin 5-HT4 receptors in the gut leads to release of acetylcholine, which in turn induces mucosal secretion by activating submucosal neurons and increasing gut motility.47

Two 5-HT4 receptor agonists were withdrawn from the market (cisapride in 2000 and tegaserod in 2007) due to serious cardiovascular adverse events (fatal arrhythmias, heart attacks, and strokes) resulting from their affinity for hERG-K+ cardiac channels.  

The newer agents prucalopride,48 velusetrag, and naronapride are highly selective 5-HT4 agonists with low affinity for hERG-K+ receptors and do not have proarrhythmic properties, based on extensive assessment in clinical trials.

Prucalopride

Prucalopride has been shown to accelerate gastrointestinal and colonic transit in patients with chronic constipation, with improvement in bowel movements, symptoms of chronic constipation, and quality of life.49–52

Adverse effects reported with its use have been headache, nausea, abdominal pain, and cramps.

Prucalopride is approved in Europe and Canada for chronic constipation in women but is not yet approved in the United States.

Dosage is 2 mg orally once daily. Caution is advised in elderly patients, in whom the preferred maximum dose is 1 mg daily, as there are only limited data available on the safety of this medication in the elderly.

Velusetrag

Velusetrag has been shown to increase colonic motility and improve symptoms of chronic constipation. In a phase 2 trial,53 the most effective dose was 15 mg once daily. Higher doses were associated with a higher incidence of adverse effects such as diarrhea, headache, nausea, and vomiting.

Naronapride

Naronapride (ATI-7505) is in phase 2 trials for chronic constipation. Reported adverse effects were headache, diarrhea, nausea, and vomiting.54

BILE SALT ABSORPTION INHIBITORS

Bile acids exert prosecretory and prokinetic effects by increasing colonic secretion of water and electrolytes through the activation of adenylate cyclase. This happens as a result of their deconjugation after passage into the colon.

Elobixibat is an ileal bile acid transporter inhibitor that prevents absorption of nonconjugated bile salts in the distal ileum. It has few side effects because its systemic absorption is minimal. Phase 3 trials are under way. Dosage is 5 to 20 mg daily. Adverse effects are few because systemic absorption is minimal, but include abdominal pain and diarrhea.55,56

 

 

MANAGING OPIOID-INDUCED CONSTIPATION

Opioids cause constipation by binding to mu receptors in the enteric nervous system. Activation of these receptors decreases bowel tone and contractility, which increases transit time. Stimulation of these receptors also increases anal sphincter tone, resulting in decreased rectal evacuation.57

Though underrecognized, opioid-induced constipation affects 40% of patients who take these drugs for nonmalignant pain and 90% of those taking them for cancer pain. Patients with this condition were found to take more time off work and feel more impaired in their domestic and work-related obligations than patients who did not develop constipation with use of opioids.58

Initial management of opioid-induced constipation includes increasing intake of fluids and dietary fiber (fiber alone can worsen abdominal pain in this condition by increasing stool bulk without a concomitant improvement in peristalsis) and increasing physical activity. It is common clinical practice to use a stool softener along with a stimulant laxative if lifestyle modifications are inadequate.59 If these measures are ineffective, osmotic agents can be added.

If these conventional measures fail, a peripherally acting mu-opioid receptor antagonist such as methylnaltrexone or naloxegol should be considered.

Methylnaltrexone

Methylnaltrexone60,61 is a peripherally acting mu receptor antagonist with a rapid onset of action. It does not cross the blood-brain barrier, as it contains a methyl group. It was approved by the FDA in 2008 to treat opioid-induced constipation in adults with advanced illnesses when other approaches are ineffective.

Adverse effects. Although the mu receptor antagonist alvimopan had been shown to be associated with cardiovascular events hypothesized to be a consequence of opioid withdrawal, methylnaltrexone has been deemed to have a safe cardiovascular profile without any potential effects on platelets, corrected QT interval, metabolism, heart rate, or blood pressure.61 Side effects include abdominal pain, nausea, diarrhea, hot flashes, tremor, and chills.

Contraindications. Methylnaltrexone is contraindicated in patients with structural diseases of the gastrointestinal tract, ie, peptic ulcer disease, inflammatory bowel disease, diverticulitis, stomach or intestinal cancer) since it can increase the risk of perforation.

Dosing is 1 dose subcutaneously every other day, as needed, and no more than 1 dose in a 24-hour period. Dosage is based on weight: 0.15 mg/kg/dose for patients weighing less than 38 kg or more than 114 kg; 8 mg for those weighing 38 to 62 kg; and 12 mg for those weighing 62 to 114 kg.62

Naloxegol

Naloxegol, FDA-approved for treating opioid-induced constipation in 2014, consists of naloxone conjugated with polyethylene glycol, which prevents it from crossing the blood-brain barrier and diminishing the central effects of opioid-induced analgesia. Unlike methylnaltrexone, which is given by subcutaneous injection, naloxegol is taken orally.

Adverse effects reported in clinical trials63,64 were abdominal pain, diarrhea, nausea, headache, and flatulence. No clinically relevant association with QT and corrected QT interval prolongation or cardiac repolarization was noted.64

Dosing is 25 mg by mouth once daily, which can be decreased to 12.5 mg if the initial dose is difficult to tolerate. It should be taken on an empty stomach at least 1 hour before the first meal of the day or 2 hours after the meal. In patients with renal impairment (creatinine clearance < 60 mL/min), the dose is 12.5 mg once daily.65

CONSTIPATION-PREDOMINANT IRRITABLE BOWEL SYNDROME

Irritable bowel syndrome is the reason for 3.1 million office visits and 59 million prescriptions in the United States every year, with patients equally distributed between diarrhea-predominant, constipation-predominant, and mixed subtypes.66

To be diagnosed with constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome, patients must meet the Rome IV criteria, more than 25% of bowel movements should have Bristol stool form types 1 or 2, and less than 25% of bowel movements should have Bristol stool form types 6 or 7. In practice, patients reporting that their bowel movements are usually constipated often suffices to make the diagnosis.5

Osmotic laxatives are often tried first, but despite improving stool frequency and consistency, they have little efficacy in satisfying complaints of bloating or abdominal pain in patients with constipation-predominant irritable syndrome.67 Stimulant laxatives have not yet been tested in clinical trials. Lubiprostone and linaclotide are FDA-approved for this condition; in women, lubiprostone is approved only for those over age 18.

Antidepressant therapy

Patients often derive additional benefit from treatment with antidepressants. A meta-analysis demonstrated a number needed to treat of 4 for selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors and tricyclic antidepressants in managing abdominal pain associated with irritable bowel syndrome.68 The major limiting factor is usually adverse effects of these drugs.

For constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors are preferred over tricyclics because of their additional prokinetic properties. Starting at a low dose and titrating upward slowly avoids potential adverse effects.

Cognitive behavioral therapy has also been beneficial in treating irritable bowel syndrome.69

Adjunctive therapies

Adjunctive therapies including peppermint oil, probiotics (eg, Lactobacillus, Bifidobacterium), and acupuncture have also shown promise in managing irritable bowel syndrome, but more data are needed on the use of these therapies for constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome before any definite conclusions can be drawn.70 Other emerging pharmacologic therapies are plecanatide (discussed earlier) and tenapanor.

Peppermint oil is an antispasmodic that inhibits calcium channels, leading to relaxation of smooth muscles in the gastrointestinal tract. Different dosages and treatment durations have been studied—450 to 900 mg daily in 2 to 3 divided doses over 1 to 3 months.71,72 The most common adverse effect reported was gastroesophageal reflux, related in part to the oil’s relaxing effect on the lower esophageal sphincter. Observation of this led to the development of enteric-coated preparations that have the potential to bypass the upper gastrointestinal tract.73

Tenapanor inhibits the sodium-hydrogen exchanger 3 channel (a regulator of sodium and water uptake in intestinal lumen), which in turn leads to a higher sodium level in the entire gastrointestinal tract (whereas linaclotide’s action is limited to the duodenum and jejunem), resulting in more fluid volume and increased luminal transit.74 It was found effective in a phase 2 clinical trial,75 and the most effective dose was 50 mg twice daily.

Since tenapanor is minimally absorbed, it has few side effects, the major ones being diarrhea (11.2% vs 0% with placebo) and urinary tract infection (5.6% vs 4.4% with placebo).75 Further study is needed to confirm these findings.

Tenapanor also has the advantage of inhibiting luminal phosphorus absorption. This has led to exploration of its use as a phosphate binder in patients with end-stage renal disease.

DYSSYNERGIC DEFECATION AND ANORECTAL BIOFEEDBACK

According to the Rome IV criteria,5 dyssynergic defecation is present if the criteria for chronic constipation are met, if a dyssynergic pattern of defecation is confirmed by manometry, imaging, or electromyography, and if 1 or more of the following are present: inability to expel an artificial stool (a 50-mL water-filled balloon) within 1 minute, prolonged colonic transit time, inability to evacuate, or 50% or more retention of barium during defecography.5

Even though biofeedback has been controversial as a treatment for dyssynergic defecation because of conflicting results in older studies,76 3 trials have shown it to be better than placebo, laxatives, and muscle relaxants, with symptomatic improvement in 70% of patients.77–79

Biofeedback therapy involves an instrument-based auditory or visual tool (using electromyographic sensors or anorectal manometry) to help patients coordinate abdominal, rectal, puborectalis, and anal sphincter muscles and produce a propulsive force using their abdominal muscles to achieve complete evacuation. Important components of this therapy include:

Proper evacuation positioning (brace-pump technique, which involves sitting on the toilet leaning forward with forearms resting on thighs, shoulders relaxed, and feet placed on a small footstool

Breathing relaxation and training exercises during defecation (no straining, keeping a normal pattern of breathing, and avoiding holding the breath while defecating)

Use of the abdominal muscles by pushing the abdomen forward, along with relaxation of the anal sphincter.80

The anorectal feedback program usually consists of 6 weekly sessions of 45 to 60 minutes each. Limitations of this therapy include unavailability, lack of trained therapists, lack of insurance coverage, and inapplicability to certain patient groups, such as those with dementia or learning disabilities.

SURGERY FOR CHRONIC CONSTIPATION

Surgery for constipation is reserved for patients who continue to have symptoms despite optimal medical therapy.

Total abdominal colectomy and ileorectal anastomosis

Total abdominal colectomy with ileorectal anastomosis is a surgical option for medically intractable slow-transit constipation. Before considering surgery, complete diagnostic testing should be done, including colonic manometry and documentation of whether the patient also has outlet dysfunction. 

Even though it has shown excellent outcomes and satisfaction rates as high as 100% in patients with pure slow-transit constipation,81–83 results in older studies in patients with mixed disorders (eg, slow-transit constipation with features of outlet dysfunction) were less predictable.84 More recent studies have reported comparable long-term morbidity and postoperative satisfaction rates in those with pure slow-transit constipation and those with a mixed disorder, indicating that careful patient selection is likely the key to a favorable outcome.85

Partial colectomies based on segmental colon transit time measurements can also be considered in some patients.86

Stapled transanal resection

Stapled transanal resection involves circumferential transanal stapling of the redundant rectal mucosa. It is an option for patients with defecatory disorders, specifically large rectoceles and rectal intussusception not amenable to therapy with pelvic floor retraining exercises.87

The efficacy of this procedure in controlling symptoms and improving quality of life is around 77% to 81% at 12 months, though complication rates as high as 46% and disappointing long-term outcomes have been a deterrent to its widespread acceptance in the United States.88–91

Chronic constipation has a variety of possible causes and mechanisms. Although traditional conservative treatments are still valid and first-line, if these fail, clinicians can choose from a growing list of new treatments, tailored to the cause in the individual patient.

This article discusses how defecation works (or doesn’t), the types of chronic constipation, the available diagnostic tools, and traditional and newer treatments, including some still in development.

THE EPIDEMIOLOGY OF CONSTIPATION

Chronic constipation is one of the most common gastrointestinal disorders, affecting about 15% of all adults and 30% of those over the age of 60.1 It can be a primary disorder or secondary to other factors.

Constipation is more prevalent in women and in institutionalized elderly people.2 It is associated with lower socioeconomic status, depression, less self-reported physical activity, certain medications, and stressful life events.3 Given its high prevalence and its impact on quality of life, it is also associated with significant utilization of healthcare resources.4

Constipation defined by Rome IV criteria

Physicians and patients may disagree about what constitutes constipation. Physicians primarily regard it as infrequent bowel movements, while patients tend to have a broader definition. According to the Rome IV criteria,5 chronic constipation is defined by the presence of the following for at least 3 months (with symptom onset at least 6 months prior to diagnosis):

 (1) Two or more of the following for more than 25% of defecations:

  • Straining
  • Lumpy or hard stools
  • Sensation of incomplete evacuation
  • Sensation of anorectal obstruction or blockage
  • Manual maneuvers to facilitate evacuation
  • Fewer than 3 spontaneous bowel movements per week.

 (2) Loose stools are rarely present without the use of laxatives.

 (3) The patient does not meet the criteria for diagnosis of irritable bowel syndrome.

DEFECATION IS COMPLEX

Defecation begins when the rectum fills with stool, causing relaxation of the internal anal sphincter and the urge to defecate. The external anal sphincter, which is under voluntary control, can then either contract to delay defecation or relax to allow the stool to be expelled.6

Colonic muscles propel stool toward the rectum in repetitive localized contractions that help mix and promote absorption of the content, and larger coordinated (high-amplitude propagating) contractions that, in healthy individuals, move the stool forward from the proximal to the distal colon multiple times daily. These contractions usually occur in the morning and are accentuated by gastric distention from food and the resulting gastrocolic reflex.

Serotonin (5-HT) is released by enterochromaffin cells in response to distention of the gut wall. It mediates peristaltic movements of the gastrointestinal tract by binding to receptors (especially 5-HT4), stimulating release of neurotransmitters such as acetylcholine, causing smooth-muscle contraction behind the luminal contents and propelling them forward.

PRIMARY CONSTIPATION DISORDERS

The American Gastroenterological Association7 classifies constipation into 3 groups on the basis of colonic transit time and anorectal function:

Normal-transit constipation

Stool normally takes 20 to 72 hours to pass through the colon, with transit time affected by diet, drugs, level of physical activity, and emotional status.8

Normal-transit constipation is the most common type of constipation. The term is sometimes used interchangeably with constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome, but the latter is a distinct entity characterized by abdominal pain relieved by defecation as the primary symptom, as well as having occasional loose stools. These 2 conditions can be hard to tell apart, especially if the patient cannot describe the symptoms precisely.

Slow-transit constipation

Slow-transit constipation—also called delayed-transit constipation, colonoparesis, colonic inertia, and pseudo-obstruction—is defined as prolonged stool transit in the colon, ie, for more than 5 days.9 It can be the result of colonic smooth muscle dysfunction, compromised colonic neural pathways, or both, leading to slow colon peristalsis.

Factors that can affect colonic motility such as opioid use and hypothyroidism should be carefully considered in these patients. Opioids are notorious for causing constipation by decreasing bowel tone and contractility and thereby increasing colonic transit time. They also tighten up the anal sphincters, resulting in decreased rectal evacuation.10

 

 

Outlet dysfunction

Outlet dysfunction, also called pelvic floor dysfunction or defecatory disorder, is associated with incomplete rectal evacuation. It can be a consequence of weak rectal expulsion forces (slow colonic transit, rectal hyposensitivity), functional resistance to rectal evacuation (high anal resting pressure, anismus, incomplete relaxation of the anal sphincter, dyssynergic defecation), or structural outlet obstruction (excessive perineal descent, rectoceles, rectal intussusception). About 50% of patients with outlet dysfunction have concurrent slow-transit constipation.

Dyssynergic defecation is the most common outlet dysfunction disorder, accounting for about half of the cases referred to tertiary centers. It is defined as a paradoxical elevation in anal sphincter tone or less than 20% relaxation of the resting anal sphincter pressure with weak abdominal and pelvic propulsive forces.11 Anorectal biofeedback is a therapeutic option for dyssynergic defecation, as we discuss later in this article.

SECONDARY CONSTIPATION

Constipation can be secondary to several conditions and factors (Table 1), including:

  • Neurologic disorders that affect gastrointestinal motility (eg, Hirschsprung disease, Parkinson disease, multiple sclerosis, spinal cord injury, stroke, spinal or ganglionic  tumor, hypothyroidism, amyloidosis, diabetes mellitus, hypercalcemia)
  • Drugs used to treat neurologic disorders
  • Mechanical obstruction
  • Diet (eg, low fiber, decreased fluid intake).

EVALUATION OF CONSTIPATION

It is crucial for physicians to efficiently use the available diagnostic tools for constipation to tailor the treatment to the patient.

FIGURE 1. Diagnosis and management of chronic constipation.

Evaluation of chronic constipation begins with a thorough history and physical examination to rule out secondary constipation (Figure 1). Red flags such as unintentional weight loss, blood in the stool, rectal pain, fever, and iron-deficiency anemia should prompt referral for colonoscopy to evaluate for malignancy, colitis, or other potential colonic abnormalities.12

A detailed perineal and rectal examination can help diagnose defecatory disorders and should include evaluation of the resting anal tone and the sphincter during simulated evacuation.

Laboratory tests of thyroid function, electrolytes, and a complete blood cell count should be ordered if clinically indicated.13

Further tests

Further diagnostic tests can be considered if symptoms persist despite conservative treatment or if a defecatory disorder is suspected. These include anorectal manometry, colonic transit studies, defecography, and colonic manometry.

Anorectal manometry and the rectal balloon expulsion test are usually done first because of their high sensitivity (88%) and specificity (89%) for defecatory disorders.14 These tests measure the function of the internal and external anal sphincters at rest and with straining and assess rectal sensitivity and compliance. Anorectal manometry is also used in biofeedback therapy in patients with dyssynergic defecation.15

Colonic transit time can be measured if anorectal manometry and the balloon expulsion test are normal. The study uses radiopaque markers, radioisotopes, or wireless motility capsules to confirm slow-transit constipation and to identify areas of delayed transit in the colon.16

Defecography is usually the next step in diagnosis if anorectal manometry and balloon expulsion tests are inconclusive or if an anatomic abnormality of the pelvic floor is suspected. It can be done with a variety of techniques. Barium defecography can identify anatomic defects, scintigraphy can quantify evacuation of artificial stools, and magnetic resonance defecography visualizes anatomic landmarks to assess pelvic floor motion without exposing the patient to radiation.17,18

Colonic manometry is most useful in patients with refractory slow-transit constipation and can identify patients with isolated colonic motor dysfunction with no pelvic floor dysfunction who may benefit from subtotal colectomy and end-ileostomy.7

TRADITIONAL TREATMENTS STILL THE MAINSTAY

Nonpharmacologic treatments are the first-line options for patients with normal-transit and slow-transit constipation and should precede diagnostic testing. Lifestyle modifications and dietary changes (Table 2) aim to augment the known factors that stimulate the gastrocolic reflex and increase intestinal motility by high-amplitude propagated contractions.

Increasing physical activity increases intestinal gas clearance, decreases bloating, and lessens constipation.19,20

Toilet training is an integral part of lifestyle modifications.21

Diet. Drinking hot caffeinated beverages, eating breakfast within an hour of waking up, and consuming fiber in the morning (25–30 g of fiber daily) have traditionally been recommended as the first-line measures for chronic constipation. Dehydrated patients with constipation also benefit from increasing their fluid intake.22

LAXATIVES

Fiber (bulk-forming laxatives) for normal-transit constipation

Fiber remains a key part of the initial management of chronic constipation, as it is cheap, available, and safe. Increasing fiber intake is effective for normal-transit constipation, but patients with slow-transit constipation or refractory outlet dysfunction are less likely to benefit.23 Other laxatives are incorporated into the regimen if first-line nonpharmacologic interventions fail (Table 3).

Bulk-forming laxatives include insoluble fiber (wheat bran) and soluble fiber (psyllium, methylcellulose, inulin, calcium polycarbo­phil). Insoluble fiber, though often used, has little impact on symptoms of chronic constipation after 1 month of use, and up to 60% of patients report adverse effects from it.24 On the other hand, clinical trials have shown that soluble fiber such as psyllium facilitates defecation and improves functional bowel symptoms in patients with normal-transit constipation.25

Patients should be instructed to increase their dietary fiber intake gradually to avoid adverse effects and should be told to expect significant symptomatic improvement only after a few weeks. They should also be informed that increasing dietary fiber intake can cause bloating but that the bloating is temporary. If it continues, a different fiber can be tried.

Osmotic laxatives

Osmotic laxatives are often employed as a first- line laxative treatment option for patients with constipation. They draw water into the lumen by osmosis, helping to soften stool and speed intestinal transit. They include macrogols (inert polymers of ethylene glycol), nonabsorbable carbohydrates (lactulose, sorbitol), magnesium products, and sodium phosphate products.

Polyethylene glycol, the most studied osmotic laxative, has been shown to maintain therapeutic efficacy for up to 2 years, though it is not generally used this long.26 A meta-analysis of 10 randomized clinical trials found it to be superior to lactulose in improving stool consistency and frequency, and rates of adverse effects were similar to those with placebo.27

Lactulose and sorbitol are semisynthetic disaccharides that are not absorbed from the gastrointestinal tract. Apart from the osmotic effect of the disaccharide, these sugars are metabolized by colonic bacteria to acetic acid and other short-chain fatty acids, resulting in acidification of the stool, which exerts an osmotic effect in the colonic lumen.

Lactulose and sorbitol were shown to have similar efficacy in increasing the frequency of bowel movements in a small study, though patients taking lactulose had a higher rate of nausea.28

The usual recommended dose is 15 to 30 mL once or twice daily.

Adverse effects include gas, bloating, and abdominal distention (due to fermentation by colonic bacteria) and can limit long-term use.

Magnesium citrate and magnesium hydroxide are strong osmotic laxatives, but so far no clinical trial has been done to assess their efficacy in constipation. Although the risk of hypermagnesemia is low with magnesium-based products, this group of laxatives is generally avoided in patients with renal or cardiac disease.29

Sodium phosphate enemas (Fleet enemas) are used for bowel cleansing before certain procedures but have only limited use in constipation because of potential adverse effects such as hyperphosphatemia, hypocalcemia, and the rarer but more serious complication of acute phosphate nephropathy.30

Stimulant laxatives for short-term use only

Stimulant laxatives include glycerin, bisacodyl, senna, and sodium picosulfate. Sodium piosulfate and bisacodyl have been validated for treatment of chronic constipation for up to 4 weeks.31–33

Stimulant laxative suppositories should be used 30 minutes after meals to augment the physiologic gastrocolic reflex.

As more evidence is available for osmotic laxatives such as polyethylene glycol, they tend to be preferred over stimulant agents, especially for long-term use. Clinicians have traditionally hesitated to prescribe stimulant laxatives for long-term use, as they were thought to damage the enteric nervous system.34 Although more recent studies have not shown this potential effect,35 more research is warranted on the use of stimulant laxatives for longer than 4 weeks.

 

 

STOOL SOFTENERS: LITTLE EVIDENCE

Stool softeners enhance the interaction of stool and water, leading to softer stool and easier evacuation. Docusate sodium and docusate calcium are thought to facilitate the mixing of aqueous and fatty substances, thereby softening the stool.

However, there is little evidence to support the use of docusate for constipation in hospitalized adults or in ambulatory care. A recent review reported that docusate was no better than placebo in diminishing symptoms of constipation.36

INTESTINAL SECRETAGOGUES

The secretagogues include lubiprostone, linaclotide, and plecanatide. These medications are preferred therapy for patients with normal- or slow-transit constipation once conservative therapies have failed. Even though there is no current consensus, lifestyle measures and conservative treatment options should be tried for about 8 weeks.

Lubiprostone and linaclotide are approved by the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for both constipation and constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome. They activate chloride channels on the apical surface of enterocytes, increasing intestinal secretion of chloride, which in turn increases luminal sodium efflux to maintain electroneutrality, leading to secretion of water into the intestinal lumen. This eventually facilitates intestinal transit and increases the passage of stool.

Lubiprostone

Lubiprostone, a prostaglandin E1 derivative, is approved for treating chronic constipation, constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome in women, and opioid-induced constipation in patients with chronic noncancer pain.

Adverse effects in clinical trials were nausea (up to 30%) and headache.37,38

Linaclotide

Linaclotide, a minimally absorbed 14-amino acid peptide, increases intestinal secretion of chloride and bicarbonate, increasing intestinal fluid and promoting intestinal transit.39 It also decreases the firing rate of the visceral afferent pain fibers and helps reduce visceral pain, especially in patients with constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome.40 It is approved for chronic constipation and constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome.41–43

Dosage starts at 145 μg/day for chronic constipation, and can be titrated up to 290 μg if there is no response or if a diagnosis of constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome is under consideration. Linaclotide should be taken 30 to 60 minutes before breakfast to reduce the likelihood of diarrhea.44

Adverse effects. Diarrhea led to treatment discontinuation in 4.5% of patients in one study.42

Plecanatide

Plecanatide is a guanylate cyclase-c agonist with a mode of action similar to that of linaclotide. It was recently approved by the FDA for chronic idiopathic constipation in adults. The recommended dose is 3 mg once daily.

Data from phase 2 trials in chronic constipation showed improvement in straining, abdominal discomfort, and stool frequency after 14 days of treatment.45

A phase 3 trial showed that plecanatide was more effective than placebo when used for 12 weeks in 951 patients with chronic constipation (P = .009).46 The most common adverse effect reported was diarrhea.

SEROTONIN RECEPTOR AGONISTS

Activation of serotonin 5-HT4 receptors in the gut leads to release of acetylcholine, which in turn induces mucosal secretion by activating submucosal neurons and increasing gut motility.47

Two 5-HT4 receptor agonists were withdrawn from the market (cisapride in 2000 and tegaserod in 2007) due to serious cardiovascular adverse events (fatal arrhythmias, heart attacks, and strokes) resulting from their affinity for hERG-K+ cardiac channels.  

The newer agents prucalopride,48 velusetrag, and naronapride are highly selective 5-HT4 agonists with low affinity for hERG-K+ receptors and do not have proarrhythmic properties, based on extensive assessment in clinical trials.

Prucalopride

Prucalopride has been shown to accelerate gastrointestinal and colonic transit in patients with chronic constipation, with improvement in bowel movements, symptoms of chronic constipation, and quality of life.49–52

Adverse effects reported with its use have been headache, nausea, abdominal pain, and cramps.

Prucalopride is approved in Europe and Canada for chronic constipation in women but is not yet approved in the United States.

Dosage is 2 mg orally once daily. Caution is advised in elderly patients, in whom the preferred maximum dose is 1 mg daily, as there are only limited data available on the safety of this medication in the elderly.

Velusetrag

Velusetrag has been shown to increase colonic motility and improve symptoms of chronic constipation. In a phase 2 trial,53 the most effective dose was 15 mg once daily. Higher doses were associated with a higher incidence of adverse effects such as diarrhea, headache, nausea, and vomiting.

Naronapride

Naronapride (ATI-7505) is in phase 2 trials for chronic constipation. Reported adverse effects were headache, diarrhea, nausea, and vomiting.54

BILE SALT ABSORPTION INHIBITORS

Bile acids exert prosecretory and prokinetic effects by increasing colonic secretion of water and electrolytes through the activation of adenylate cyclase. This happens as a result of their deconjugation after passage into the colon.

Elobixibat is an ileal bile acid transporter inhibitor that prevents absorption of nonconjugated bile salts in the distal ileum. It has few side effects because its systemic absorption is minimal. Phase 3 trials are under way. Dosage is 5 to 20 mg daily. Adverse effects are few because systemic absorption is minimal, but include abdominal pain and diarrhea.55,56

 

 

MANAGING OPIOID-INDUCED CONSTIPATION

Opioids cause constipation by binding to mu receptors in the enteric nervous system. Activation of these receptors decreases bowel tone and contractility, which increases transit time. Stimulation of these receptors also increases anal sphincter tone, resulting in decreased rectal evacuation.57

Though underrecognized, opioid-induced constipation affects 40% of patients who take these drugs for nonmalignant pain and 90% of those taking them for cancer pain. Patients with this condition were found to take more time off work and feel more impaired in their domestic and work-related obligations than patients who did not develop constipation with use of opioids.58

Initial management of opioid-induced constipation includes increasing intake of fluids and dietary fiber (fiber alone can worsen abdominal pain in this condition by increasing stool bulk without a concomitant improvement in peristalsis) and increasing physical activity. It is common clinical practice to use a stool softener along with a stimulant laxative if lifestyle modifications are inadequate.59 If these measures are ineffective, osmotic agents can be added.

If these conventional measures fail, a peripherally acting mu-opioid receptor antagonist such as methylnaltrexone or naloxegol should be considered.

Methylnaltrexone

Methylnaltrexone60,61 is a peripherally acting mu receptor antagonist with a rapid onset of action. It does not cross the blood-brain barrier, as it contains a methyl group. It was approved by the FDA in 2008 to treat opioid-induced constipation in adults with advanced illnesses when other approaches are ineffective.

Adverse effects. Although the mu receptor antagonist alvimopan had been shown to be associated with cardiovascular events hypothesized to be a consequence of opioid withdrawal, methylnaltrexone has been deemed to have a safe cardiovascular profile without any potential effects on platelets, corrected QT interval, metabolism, heart rate, or blood pressure.61 Side effects include abdominal pain, nausea, diarrhea, hot flashes, tremor, and chills.

Contraindications. Methylnaltrexone is contraindicated in patients with structural diseases of the gastrointestinal tract, ie, peptic ulcer disease, inflammatory bowel disease, diverticulitis, stomach or intestinal cancer) since it can increase the risk of perforation.

Dosing is 1 dose subcutaneously every other day, as needed, and no more than 1 dose in a 24-hour period. Dosage is based on weight: 0.15 mg/kg/dose for patients weighing less than 38 kg or more than 114 kg; 8 mg for those weighing 38 to 62 kg; and 12 mg for those weighing 62 to 114 kg.62

Naloxegol

Naloxegol, FDA-approved for treating opioid-induced constipation in 2014, consists of naloxone conjugated with polyethylene glycol, which prevents it from crossing the blood-brain barrier and diminishing the central effects of opioid-induced analgesia. Unlike methylnaltrexone, which is given by subcutaneous injection, naloxegol is taken orally.

Adverse effects reported in clinical trials63,64 were abdominal pain, diarrhea, nausea, headache, and flatulence. No clinically relevant association with QT and corrected QT interval prolongation or cardiac repolarization was noted.64

Dosing is 25 mg by mouth once daily, which can be decreased to 12.5 mg if the initial dose is difficult to tolerate. It should be taken on an empty stomach at least 1 hour before the first meal of the day or 2 hours after the meal. In patients with renal impairment (creatinine clearance < 60 mL/min), the dose is 12.5 mg once daily.65

CONSTIPATION-PREDOMINANT IRRITABLE BOWEL SYNDROME

Irritable bowel syndrome is the reason for 3.1 million office visits and 59 million prescriptions in the United States every year, with patients equally distributed between diarrhea-predominant, constipation-predominant, and mixed subtypes.66

To be diagnosed with constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome, patients must meet the Rome IV criteria, more than 25% of bowel movements should have Bristol stool form types 1 or 2, and less than 25% of bowel movements should have Bristol stool form types 6 or 7. In practice, patients reporting that their bowel movements are usually constipated often suffices to make the diagnosis.5

Osmotic laxatives are often tried first, but despite improving stool frequency and consistency, they have little efficacy in satisfying complaints of bloating or abdominal pain in patients with constipation-predominant irritable syndrome.67 Stimulant laxatives have not yet been tested in clinical trials. Lubiprostone and linaclotide are FDA-approved for this condition; in women, lubiprostone is approved only for those over age 18.

Antidepressant therapy

Patients often derive additional benefit from treatment with antidepressants. A meta-analysis demonstrated a number needed to treat of 4 for selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors and tricyclic antidepressants in managing abdominal pain associated with irritable bowel syndrome.68 The major limiting factor is usually adverse effects of these drugs.

For constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors are preferred over tricyclics because of their additional prokinetic properties. Starting at a low dose and titrating upward slowly avoids potential adverse effects.

Cognitive behavioral therapy has also been beneficial in treating irritable bowel syndrome.69

Adjunctive therapies

Adjunctive therapies including peppermint oil, probiotics (eg, Lactobacillus, Bifidobacterium), and acupuncture have also shown promise in managing irritable bowel syndrome, but more data are needed on the use of these therapies for constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome before any definite conclusions can be drawn.70 Other emerging pharmacologic therapies are plecanatide (discussed earlier) and tenapanor.

Peppermint oil is an antispasmodic that inhibits calcium channels, leading to relaxation of smooth muscles in the gastrointestinal tract. Different dosages and treatment durations have been studied—450 to 900 mg daily in 2 to 3 divided doses over 1 to 3 months.71,72 The most common adverse effect reported was gastroesophageal reflux, related in part to the oil’s relaxing effect on the lower esophageal sphincter. Observation of this led to the development of enteric-coated preparations that have the potential to bypass the upper gastrointestinal tract.73

Tenapanor inhibits the sodium-hydrogen exchanger 3 channel (a regulator of sodium and water uptake in intestinal lumen), which in turn leads to a higher sodium level in the entire gastrointestinal tract (whereas linaclotide’s action is limited to the duodenum and jejunem), resulting in more fluid volume and increased luminal transit.74 It was found effective in a phase 2 clinical trial,75 and the most effective dose was 50 mg twice daily.

Since tenapanor is minimally absorbed, it has few side effects, the major ones being diarrhea (11.2% vs 0% with placebo) and urinary tract infection (5.6% vs 4.4% with placebo).75 Further study is needed to confirm these findings.

Tenapanor also has the advantage of inhibiting luminal phosphorus absorption. This has led to exploration of its use as a phosphate binder in patients with end-stage renal disease.

DYSSYNERGIC DEFECATION AND ANORECTAL BIOFEEDBACK

According to the Rome IV criteria,5 dyssynergic defecation is present if the criteria for chronic constipation are met, if a dyssynergic pattern of defecation is confirmed by manometry, imaging, or electromyography, and if 1 or more of the following are present: inability to expel an artificial stool (a 50-mL water-filled balloon) within 1 minute, prolonged colonic transit time, inability to evacuate, or 50% or more retention of barium during defecography.5

Even though biofeedback has been controversial as a treatment for dyssynergic defecation because of conflicting results in older studies,76 3 trials have shown it to be better than placebo, laxatives, and muscle relaxants, with symptomatic improvement in 70% of patients.77–79

Biofeedback therapy involves an instrument-based auditory or visual tool (using electromyographic sensors or anorectal manometry) to help patients coordinate abdominal, rectal, puborectalis, and anal sphincter muscles and produce a propulsive force using their abdominal muscles to achieve complete evacuation. Important components of this therapy include:

Proper evacuation positioning (brace-pump technique, which involves sitting on the toilet leaning forward with forearms resting on thighs, shoulders relaxed, and feet placed on a small footstool

Breathing relaxation and training exercises during defecation (no straining, keeping a normal pattern of breathing, and avoiding holding the breath while defecating)

Use of the abdominal muscles by pushing the abdomen forward, along with relaxation of the anal sphincter.80

The anorectal feedback program usually consists of 6 weekly sessions of 45 to 60 minutes each. Limitations of this therapy include unavailability, lack of trained therapists, lack of insurance coverage, and inapplicability to certain patient groups, such as those with dementia or learning disabilities.

SURGERY FOR CHRONIC CONSTIPATION

Surgery for constipation is reserved for patients who continue to have symptoms despite optimal medical therapy.

Total abdominal colectomy and ileorectal anastomosis

Total abdominal colectomy with ileorectal anastomosis is a surgical option for medically intractable slow-transit constipation. Before considering surgery, complete diagnostic testing should be done, including colonic manometry and documentation of whether the patient also has outlet dysfunction. 

Even though it has shown excellent outcomes and satisfaction rates as high as 100% in patients with pure slow-transit constipation,81–83 results in older studies in patients with mixed disorders (eg, slow-transit constipation with features of outlet dysfunction) were less predictable.84 More recent studies have reported comparable long-term morbidity and postoperative satisfaction rates in those with pure slow-transit constipation and those with a mixed disorder, indicating that careful patient selection is likely the key to a favorable outcome.85

Partial colectomies based on segmental colon transit time measurements can also be considered in some patients.86

Stapled transanal resection

Stapled transanal resection involves circumferential transanal stapling of the redundant rectal mucosa. It is an option for patients with defecatory disorders, specifically large rectoceles and rectal intussusception not amenable to therapy with pelvic floor retraining exercises.87

The efficacy of this procedure in controlling symptoms and improving quality of life is around 77% to 81% at 12 months, though complication rates as high as 46% and disappointing long-term outcomes have been a deterrent to its widespread acceptance in the United States.88–91

References
  1. Mugie SM, Benninga MA, Di Lorenzo C. Epidemiology of constipation in children and adults: a systematic review. Best Pract Res Clin Gastroenterol 2011; 25:3–18.
  2. Kinnunen O. Study of constipation in a geriatric hospital, day hospital, old people's home and at home. Aging (Milano) 1991; 3:161–170.
  3. Everhart JE, Go VL, Johannes RS, Fitzsimmons SC, Roth HP, White LR. A longitudinal survey of self-reported bowel habits in the United States. Dig Dis Sci 1989; 34:1153–1162.
  4. Shah ND, Chitkara DK, Locke GR, Meek PD, Talley NJ. Ambulatory care for constipation in the United States, 1993-2004. Am J Gastroenterol 2008; 103:1746–1753.
  5. Mearin F, Lacy BE, Chang L, et al. Bowel disorders. Gastroenterology 2016; 150:1393–1407.
  6. Bharucha AE. Pelvic floor: anatomy and function. Neurogastroenterol Motil 2006; 18:507–519.
  7. Bharucha AE, Pemberton JH, Locke GR 3rd. American Gastroenterological Association technical review on constipation. Gastroenterology 2013; 144:218–238.
  8. Grundy D, Al-Chaer ED, Aziz Q, et al. Fundamentals of neurogastroenterology: basic science. Gastroenterology 2006; 130:1391–1411.
  9. Gallegos-Orozco JF, Foxx-Orenstein AE, Sterler SM, Stoa JM. Chronic constipation in the elderly. Am J Gastroenterol 2012; 107:18–26.
  10. Mancini I, Bruera E. Constipation in advanced cancer patients. Support Care Cancer 1998; 6:356–364.
  11. Bassotti G, Chistolini F, Sietchiping-Nzepa F, de Roberto G, Morelli A, Chiarioni G. Biofeedback for pelvic floor dysfunction in constipation. BMJ 2004; 328:393–396.
  12. American Gastroenterological Association, Bharucha AE, Dorn SD, Lembo A, Pressman A. American Gastroenterological Association medical position statement on constipation. Gastroenterology 2013; 144:211–217.
  13. Costilla VC, Foxx-Orenstein AE. Constipation in adults: diagnosis and management. Curr Treat Options Gastroenterol 2014; 12:310–321.
  14. Rao SS, Singh S. Clinical utility of colonic and anorectal manometry in chronic constipation. J Clin Gastroenterol 2010; 44:597–609.
  15. Minguez M, Herreros B, Sanchiz V, et al. Predictive value of the balloon expulsion test for excluding the diagnosis of pelvic floor dyssynergia in constipation. Gastroenterology 2004; 126:57–62.
  16. Diamant NE, Kamm MA, Wald A, Whitehead WE. AGA technical review on anorectal testing techniques. Gastroenterology 1999; 116:735–760.
  17. Pezim ME, Pemberton JH, Levin KE, Litchy WJ, Phillips SF. Parameters of anorectal and colonic motility in health and in severe constipation. Dis Colon Rectum 1993; 36:484–491.
  18. Bharucha AE, Fletcher JG, Seide B, Riederer SJ, Zinsmeister AR. Phenotypic variation in functional disorders of defecation. Gastroenterology 2005; 128:1199–1210.
  19. De Schryver AM, Samsom M, Smout AI. Effects of a meal and bisacodyl on colonic motility in healthy volunteers and patients with slow-transit constipation. Dig Dis Sci 2003; 48:1206–1212.
  20. Villoria A, Serra J, Azpiroz F, Malagelada JR. Physical activity and intestinal gas clearance in patients with bloating. Am J Gastroenterol 2006; 101:2552–2557.
  21. Sikirov D. Comparison of straining during defecation in three positions: results and implications for human health. Dig Dis Sci 2003; 48:1201–1205.
  22. Muller-Lissner SA, Kamm MA, Scarpignato C, Wald A. Myths and misconceptions about chronic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2005; 100:232–242.
  23. Voderholzer WA, Schatke W, Muhldorfer BE, Klauser AG, Birkner B, Muller-Lissner SA. Clinical response to dietary fiber treatment of chronic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 1997; 92:95–98.
  24. Bijkerk CJ, de Wit NJ, Muris JW, Whorwell PJ, Knottnerus JA, Hoes AW. Soluble or insoluble fibre in irritable bowel syndrome in primary care? Randomised placebo controlled trial. BMJ 2009; 339:b3154.
  25. Suares NC, Ford AC. Systematic review: the effects of fibre in the management of chronic idiopathic constipation. Aliment Pharmacol Ther 2011; 33:895–901.
  26. Dipalma JA, Cleveland MV, McGowan J, Herrera JL. A randomized, multicenter, placebo-controlled trial of polyethylene glycol laxative for chronic treatment of chronic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2007; 102:1436–1441.
  27. Lee-Robichaud H, Thomas K, Morgan J, Nelson RL. Lactulose versus polyethylene glycol for chronic constipation. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2010; 7:CD007570.
  28. Lederle FA, Busch DL, Mattox KM, West MJ, Aske DM. Cost-effective treatment of constipation in the elderly: a randomized double-blind comparison of sorbitol and lactulose. Am J Med 1990; 89:597–601.
  29. Nyberg C, Hendel J, Nielsen OH. The safety of osmotically acting cathartics in colonic cleansing. Nat Rev Gastroenterol Hepatol 2010; 7:557–564.
  30. Ainley EJ, Winwood PJ, Begley JP. Measurement of serum electrolytes and phosphate after sodium phosphate colonoscopy bowel preparation: an evaluation. Dig Dis Sci 2005; 50:1319–1323.
  31. Kienzle-Horn S, Vix JM, Schuijt C, Peil H, Jordan CC, Kamm MA. Efficacy and safety of bisacodyl in the acute treatment of constipation: a double-blind, randomized, placebo-controlled study. Aliment Pharmacol Ther 2006; 23:1479–1488.
  32. Kienzle-Horn S, Vix JM, Schuijt C, Peil H, Jordan CC, Kamm MA. Comparison of bisacodyl and sodium picosulphate in the treatment of chronic constipation. Curr Med Res Opin 2007; 23:691–699.
  33. Mueller-Lissner S, Kamm MA, Wald A, et al. Multicenter, 4-week, double-blind, randomized, placebo-controlled trial of sodium picosulfate in patients with chronic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2010; 105:897–903.
  34. Smith B. Pathologic changes in the colon produced by anthraquinone purgatives. Dis Colon Rectum 1973; 16:455–458.
  35. Kiernan JA, Heinicke EA. Sennosides do not kill myenteric neurons in the colon of the rat or mouse. Neuroscience 1989; 30:837–842.
  36. Ottawa (ON): Canadian Agency for Drugs and Technologies in Health. Dioctyl sulfosuccinate or docusate (calcium or sodium) for the prevention or management of constipation: a review of the clinical effectiveness. www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmedhealth/PMH0071207/. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  37. Saad R, Chey WD. Lubiprostone for chronic idiopathic constipation and irritable bowel syndrome with constipation. Expert Rev Gastroenterol Hepatol 2008; 2:497–508.
  38. Johanson JF, Morton D, Geenen J, Ueno R. Multicenter, 4-week, double-blind, randomized, placebo-controlled trial of lubiprostone, a locally-acting type-2 chloride channel activator, in patients with chronic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2008; 103:170–177.
  39. Harris LA, Crowell MD. Linaclotide, a new direction in the treatment of irritable bowel syndrome and chronic constipation. Curr Opin Mol Ther 2007; 9:403–410.
  40. Johnston JM, Kurtz CB, Macdougall JE, et al. Linaclotide improves abdominal pain and bowel habits in a phase IIb study of patients with irritable bowel syndrome with constipation. Gastroenterology 2010; 139:1877–1886.e2.
  41. Lembo AJ, Schneier HA, Shiff SJ, et al. Two randomized trials of linaclotide for chronic constipation. N Engl J Med 2011; 365:527–536.
  42. Chey WD, Lembo AJ, Lavins BJ, et al. Linaclotide for irritable bowel syndrome with constipation: a 26-week, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial to evaluate efficacy and safety. Am J Gastroenterol 2012; 107:1702–1712.
  43. Rao S, Lembo AJ, Shiff SJ, et al. A 12-week, randomized, controlled trial with a 4-week randomized withdrawal period to evaluate the efficacy and safety of linaclotide in irritable bowel syndrome with constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2012; 107:1714–1725.
  44. Chey WD, Kurlander J, Eswaran S. Irritable bowel syndrome: a clinical review. JAMA 2015; 313:949–958.
  45. Shailubhai K, Talluto C, Comiskey S, Foss JA, Joslyn A, Jacob G. Phase II clinical evaluation of SP-304, a guanylate cyclase-C agonist, for treatment of chronic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2010; 105:S487–S488.
  46. Miner P, Surowitz R, Fogel R, et al. Plecanatide, a novel guanylate cyclase-C (GC-C) receptor agonist, is efficacious and safe in patients with chronic idiopathic constipation (CIC): results from a 951 patient, 12-week, multi-center trial (abstract). Gastroenterology 2013; 144:S163.
  47. Coss-Adame E, Rao SS. Brain and gut interactions in irritable bowel syndrome: new paradigms and new understandings. Curr Gastroenterol Rep 2014; 16:379.
  48. Mendzelevski B, Ausma J, Chanter DO, et al. Assessment of the cardiac safety of prucalopride in healthy volunteers: a randomized, double-blind, placebo- and positive-controlled thorough QT study. Br J Clin Pharmacol 2012; 73:203–209.
  49. Camilleri M, Kerstens R, Rykx A, Vandeplassche L. A placebo-controlled trial of prucalopride for severe chronic constipation. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:2344–2354.
  50. Tack J, van Outryve M, Beyens G, Kerstens R, Vandeplassche L. Prucalopride (Resolor) in the treatment of severe chronic constipation in patients dissatisfied with laxatives. Gut 2009; 58:357–365.
  51. Quigley EM, Vandeplassche L, Kerstens R, Ausma J. Clinical trial: the efficacy, impact on quality of life, and safety and tolerability of prucalopride in severe chronic constipation—a 12-week, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study. Aliment Pharmacol Ther 2009; 29:315–328.
  52. Ford AC, Suares NC. Effect of laxatives and pharmacological therapies in chronic idiopathic constipation: systematic review and meta-analysis. Gut 2011; 60:209–218.
  53. Goldberg M, Li YP, Johanson JF, et al. Clinical trial: the efficacy and tolerability of velusetrag, a selective 5-HT4 agonist with high intrinsic activity, in chronic idiopathic constipation—a 4-week, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled, dose-response study. Aliment Pharmacol Ther 2010; 32:1102–1112.
  54. Palme M, Milner PG, Ellis DJ, Marmon T, Canafax DM. A novel gastrointestinal prokinetic, ATI-7505, increased spontaneous bowel movements (sbms) in a phase II, randomized, placebo-controlled study of patients with chronic idiopathic constipation (CIC). Gastroenterology 2010; 138:S-128–S-129.
  55. Chey WD, Camilleri M, Chang L, Rikner L, Graffner H. A randomized placebo-controlled phase IIb trial of a3309, a bile acid transporter inhibitor, for chronic idiopathic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2011; 106:1803–1812.
  56. Wong BS, Camilleri M, McKinzie S, Burton D, Graffner H, Zinsmeister AR. Effects of A3309, an ileal bile acid transporter inhibitor, on colonic transit and symptoms in females with functional constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2011; 106:2154–2164.
  57. Pappagallo M. Incidence, prevalence, and management of opioid bowel dysfunction. Am J Surg 2001; 182(suppl):11S–18S.
  58. Bell T, Annunziata K, Leslie JB. Opioid-induced constipation negatively impacts pain management, productivity, and health-related quality of life: findings from the National Health and Wellness Survey. J Opioid Manag 2009; 5:137–144.
  59. Sykes NP. A volunteer model for the comparison of laxatives in opioid-related constipation. J Pain Symptom Manage 1996; 11:363–369.
  60. ClinicalTrials.gov. A multicenter, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled, parallel-group study of oral MOA-728 for the treatment of opioid- induced bowel dysfunction in subjects with chronic nonmalignant pain. ClinicalTrials.gov Identifier: NCT00547586. https://clinicaltrials.gov/ct2/show/NCT00547586. Accessed March 22, 2017.
  61. ClinicalTrials.gov. An open-label study to evaluate the long-term safety of subcutaneous MOA-728 for treatment of opioid-induced constipation in subjects with nonmalignant pain. ClinicalTrials.gov Identifier: NCT00804141. https://clinicaltrials.gov/ct2/show/NCT00804141. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  62. Wyeth Pharmaceuticals. Relistor package insert. http://labeling.pfizer.com/showlabeling.aspx?id=499. Accessed March 22, 2017.
  63. Webster L, Dhar S, Eldon M, Masuoka L, Lappalainen J, Sostek M. A phase 2, double-blind, randomized, placebo-controlled, dose-escalation study to evaluate the efficacy, safety, and tolerability of naloxegol in patients with opioid-induced constipation. Pain 2013; 154:1542–1550.
  64. Chey WD, Webster L, Sostek M, Lappalainen J, Barker PN, Tack J. Naloxegol for opioid-induced constipation in patients with noncancer pain. N Engl J Med 2014; 370:2387–2396.
  65. Jones R, Prommer E, Backstedt D. Naloxegol: a novel therapy in the management of opioid-induced constipation. Am J Hosp Palliat Care 2016; 33:875–880.
  66. Guilera M, Balboa A, Mearin F. Bowel habit subtypes and temporal patterns in irritable bowel syndrome: systematic review. Am J Gastroenterol 2005; 100:1174–1184.
  67. Chapman RW, Stanghellini V, Geraint M, Halphen M. Randomized clinical trial: macrogol/PEG 3350 plus electrolytes for treatment of patients with constipation associated with irritable bowel syndrome. Am J Gastroenterol 2013; 108:1508–1515.
  68. Ford AC, Quigley EM, Lacy BE, et al. Effect of antidepressants and psychological therapies, including hypnotherapy, in irritable bowel syndrome: systematic review and meta-analysis. Am J Gastroenterol 2014; 109:1350–1366.
  69. Ballou S, Keefer L. Psychological interventions for irritable bowel syndrome and inflammatory bowel diseases. Clin Transl Gastroenterol 2017; 8:e214.
  70. Ford AC, Moayyedi P, Lacy BE, et al; Task Force on the Management of Functional Bowel Disorders. American College of Gastroenterology monograph on the management of irritable bowel syndrome and chronic idiopathic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2014; 109(suppl 1):S2–S27.
  71. Ford AC, Talley NJ, Spiegel BM, et al. Effect of fibre, antispasmodics, and peppermint oil in the treatment of irritable bowel syndrome: systematic review and meta-analysis. BMJ 2008; 337:a2313.
  72. Wall GC, Bryant GA, Bottenberg MM, Maki ED, Miesner AR. Irritable bowel syndrome: a concise review of current treatment concepts. World J Gastroenterol 2014; 20:8796–8806.
  73. Kligler B, Chaudhary S. Peppermint oil. Am Fam Physician 2007; 75:1027–1030.
  74. Spencer AG, Labonte ED, Rosenbaum DP, et al. Intestinal inhibition of the Na+/H+ exchanger 3 prevents cardiorenal damage in rats and inhibits Na+ uptake in humans. Sci Transl Med 2014; 6:227ra36.
  75. Rosenbaum DP. A randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study to assess the safety and efficacy of AZD1722 for the treatment of constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome (IBS-C). 2014. https://clinicaltrials.gov/ct2/show/NCT01923428. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  76. Rao SS. Biofeedback therapy for dyssynergic (obstructive) defecation. J Clin Gastroenterol 2000; 30:115–116.
  77. Cadeddu F, Salis F, De Luca E, Ciangola I, Milito G. Efficacy of biofeedback plus transanal stimulation in the management of pelvic floor dyssynergia: a randomized trial. Tech Coloproctol 2015; 19:333–338.
  78. Chiarioni G, Whitehead WE, Pezza V, Morelli A, Bassotti G. Biofeedback is superior to laxatives for normal transit constipation due to pelvic floor dyssynergia. Gastroenterology 2006; 130:657–664.
  79. Chiarioni G, Heymen S, Whitehead WE. Biofeedback therapy for dyssynergic defecation. World J Gastroenterol 2006; 12:7069–7074.
  80. Rao SS. Biofeedback therapy for constipation in adults. Best Pract Res Clin Gastroenterol 2011; 25:159–166.
  81. Hassan I, Pemberton JH, Young-Fadok TM, et al. Ileorectal anastomosis for slow transit constipation: long-term functional and quality of life results. J Gastrointest Surg 2006; 10:1330–1337.
  82. You YT, Wang JY, Changchien CR, et al. Segmental colectomy in the management of colonic inertia. Am Surg 1998; 64:775–777.
  83. Nyam DC, Pemberton JH, Ilstrup DM, Rath DM. Long-term results of surgery for chronic constipation. Dis Colon Rectum 1997; 40:273–279.
  84. Pemberton JH, Rath DM, Ilstrup DM. Evaluation and surgical treatment of severe chronic constipation. Ann Surg 1991; 214:403–413.
  85. Reshef A, Alves-Ferreira P, Zutshi M, Hull T, Gurland B. Colectomy for slow transit constipation: effective for patients with coexistent obstructed defecation. Int J Colorectal Dis 2013; 28:841–847.
  86. Lundin E, Karlbom U, Pahlman L, Graf W. Outcome of segmental colonic resection for slow-transit constipation. Br J Surg 2002; 89:1270–1274.
  87. Schwandner O, Stuto A, Jayne D, et al. Decision-making algorithm for the STARR procedure in obstructed defecation syndrome: position statement of the group of STARR pioneers. Surg Innov 2008; 15:105–109.
  88. Titu LV, Riyad K, Carter H, Dixon AR. Stapled transanal rectal resection for obstructed defecation: a cautionary tale. Dis Colon Rectum 2009; 52:1716–1722.
  89. Goede AC, Glancy D, Carter H, Mills A, Mabey K, Dixon AR. Medium-term results of stapled transanal rectal resection (STARR) for obstructed defecation and symptomatic rectal-anal intussusception. Colorectal Dis 2011; 13:1052–1057.
  90. Jayne DG, Schwandner O, Stuto A. Stapled transanal rectal resection for obstructed defecation syndrome: one-year results of the european STARR registry. Dis Colon Rectum 2009; 52:1205–1214.
  91. Madbouly KM, Abbas KS, Hussein AM. Disappointing long-term outcomes after stapled transanal rectal resection for obstructed defecation. World J Surg 2010; 34:2191–2196.
References
  1. Mugie SM, Benninga MA, Di Lorenzo C. Epidemiology of constipation in children and adults: a systematic review. Best Pract Res Clin Gastroenterol 2011; 25:3–18.
  2. Kinnunen O. Study of constipation in a geriatric hospital, day hospital, old people's home and at home. Aging (Milano) 1991; 3:161–170.
  3. Everhart JE, Go VL, Johannes RS, Fitzsimmons SC, Roth HP, White LR. A longitudinal survey of self-reported bowel habits in the United States. Dig Dis Sci 1989; 34:1153–1162.
  4. Shah ND, Chitkara DK, Locke GR, Meek PD, Talley NJ. Ambulatory care for constipation in the United States, 1993-2004. Am J Gastroenterol 2008; 103:1746–1753.
  5. Mearin F, Lacy BE, Chang L, et al. Bowel disorders. Gastroenterology 2016; 150:1393–1407.
  6. Bharucha AE. Pelvic floor: anatomy and function. Neurogastroenterol Motil 2006; 18:507–519.
  7. Bharucha AE, Pemberton JH, Locke GR 3rd. American Gastroenterological Association technical review on constipation. Gastroenterology 2013; 144:218–238.
  8. Grundy D, Al-Chaer ED, Aziz Q, et al. Fundamentals of neurogastroenterology: basic science. Gastroenterology 2006; 130:1391–1411.
  9. Gallegos-Orozco JF, Foxx-Orenstein AE, Sterler SM, Stoa JM. Chronic constipation in the elderly. Am J Gastroenterol 2012; 107:18–26.
  10. Mancini I, Bruera E. Constipation in advanced cancer patients. Support Care Cancer 1998; 6:356–364.
  11. Bassotti G, Chistolini F, Sietchiping-Nzepa F, de Roberto G, Morelli A, Chiarioni G. Biofeedback for pelvic floor dysfunction in constipation. BMJ 2004; 328:393–396.
  12. American Gastroenterological Association, Bharucha AE, Dorn SD, Lembo A, Pressman A. American Gastroenterological Association medical position statement on constipation. Gastroenterology 2013; 144:211–217.
  13. Costilla VC, Foxx-Orenstein AE. Constipation in adults: diagnosis and management. Curr Treat Options Gastroenterol 2014; 12:310–321.
  14. Rao SS, Singh S. Clinical utility of colonic and anorectal manometry in chronic constipation. J Clin Gastroenterol 2010; 44:597–609.
  15. Minguez M, Herreros B, Sanchiz V, et al. Predictive value of the balloon expulsion test for excluding the diagnosis of pelvic floor dyssynergia in constipation. Gastroenterology 2004; 126:57–62.
  16. Diamant NE, Kamm MA, Wald A, Whitehead WE. AGA technical review on anorectal testing techniques. Gastroenterology 1999; 116:735–760.
  17. Pezim ME, Pemberton JH, Levin KE, Litchy WJ, Phillips SF. Parameters of anorectal and colonic motility in health and in severe constipation. Dis Colon Rectum 1993; 36:484–491.
  18. Bharucha AE, Fletcher JG, Seide B, Riederer SJ, Zinsmeister AR. Phenotypic variation in functional disorders of defecation. Gastroenterology 2005; 128:1199–1210.
  19. De Schryver AM, Samsom M, Smout AI. Effects of a meal and bisacodyl on colonic motility in healthy volunteers and patients with slow-transit constipation. Dig Dis Sci 2003; 48:1206–1212.
  20. Villoria A, Serra J, Azpiroz F, Malagelada JR. Physical activity and intestinal gas clearance in patients with bloating. Am J Gastroenterol 2006; 101:2552–2557.
  21. Sikirov D. Comparison of straining during defecation in three positions: results and implications for human health. Dig Dis Sci 2003; 48:1201–1205.
  22. Muller-Lissner SA, Kamm MA, Scarpignato C, Wald A. Myths and misconceptions about chronic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2005; 100:232–242.
  23. Voderholzer WA, Schatke W, Muhldorfer BE, Klauser AG, Birkner B, Muller-Lissner SA. Clinical response to dietary fiber treatment of chronic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 1997; 92:95–98.
  24. Bijkerk CJ, de Wit NJ, Muris JW, Whorwell PJ, Knottnerus JA, Hoes AW. Soluble or insoluble fibre in irritable bowel syndrome in primary care? Randomised placebo controlled trial. BMJ 2009; 339:b3154.
  25. Suares NC, Ford AC. Systematic review: the effects of fibre in the management of chronic idiopathic constipation. Aliment Pharmacol Ther 2011; 33:895–901.
  26. Dipalma JA, Cleveland MV, McGowan J, Herrera JL. A randomized, multicenter, placebo-controlled trial of polyethylene glycol laxative for chronic treatment of chronic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2007; 102:1436–1441.
  27. Lee-Robichaud H, Thomas K, Morgan J, Nelson RL. Lactulose versus polyethylene glycol for chronic constipation. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2010; 7:CD007570.
  28. Lederle FA, Busch DL, Mattox KM, West MJ, Aske DM. Cost-effective treatment of constipation in the elderly: a randomized double-blind comparison of sorbitol and lactulose. Am J Med 1990; 89:597–601.
  29. Nyberg C, Hendel J, Nielsen OH. The safety of osmotically acting cathartics in colonic cleansing. Nat Rev Gastroenterol Hepatol 2010; 7:557–564.
  30. Ainley EJ, Winwood PJ, Begley JP. Measurement of serum electrolytes and phosphate after sodium phosphate colonoscopy bowel preparation: an evaluation. Dig Dis Sci 2005; 50:1319–1323.
  31. Kienzle-Horn S, Vix JM, Schuijt C, Peil H, Jordan CC, Kamm MA. Efficacy and safety of bisacodyl in the acute treatment of constipation: a double-blind, randomized, placebo-controlled study. Aliment Pharmacol Ther 2006; 23:1479–1488.
  32. Kienzle-Horn S, Vix JM, Schuijt C, Peil H, Jordan CC, Kamm MA. Comparison of bisacodyl and sodium picosulphate in the treatment of chronic constipation. Curr Med Res Opin 2007; 23:691–699.
  33. Mueller-Lissner S, Kamm MA, Wald A, et al. Multicenter, 4-week, double-blind, randomized, placebo-controlled trial of sodium picosulfate in patients with chronic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2010; 105:897–903.
  34. Smith B. Pathologic changes in the colon produced by anthraquinone purgatives. Dis Colon Rectum 1973; 16:455–458.
  35. Kiernan JA, Heinicke EA. Sennosides do not kill myenteric neurons in the colon of the rat or mouse. Neuroscience 1989; 30:837–842.
  36. Ottawa (ON): Canadian Agency for Drugs and Technologies in Health. Dioctyl sulfosuccinate or docusate (calcium or sodium) for the prevention or management of constipation: a review of the clinical effectiveness. www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmedhealth/PMH0071207/. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  37. Saad R, Chey WD. Lubiprostone for chronic idiopathic constipation and irritable bowel syndrome with constipation. Expert Rev Gastroenterol Hepatol 2008; 2:497–508.
  38. Johanson JF, Morton D, Geenen J, Ueno R. Multicenter, 4-week, double-blind, randomized, placebo-controlled trial of lubiprostone, a locally-acting type-2 chloride channel activator, in patients with chronic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2008; 103:170–177.
  39. Harris LA, Crowell MD. Linaclotide, a new direction in the treatment of irritable bowel syndrome and chronic constipation. Curr Opin Mol Ther 2007; 9:403–410.
  40. Johnston JM, Kurtz CB, Macdougall JE, et al. Linaclotide improves abdominal pain and bowel habits in a phase IIb study of patients with irritable bowel syndrome with constipation. Gastroenterology 2010; 139:1877–1886.e2.
  41. Lembo AJ, Schneier HA, Shiff SJ, et al. Two randomized trials of linaclotide for chronic constipation. N Engl J Med 2011; 365:527–536.
  42. Chey WD, Lembo AJ, Lavins BJ, et al. Linaclotide for irritable bowel syndrome with constipation: a 26-week, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial to evaluate efficacy and safety. Am J Gastroenterol 2012; 107:1702–1712.
  43. Rao S, Lembo AJ, Shiff SJ, et al. A 12-week, randomized, controlled trial with a 4-week randomized withdrawal period to evaluate the efficacy and safety of linaclotide in irritable bowel syndrome with constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2012; 107:1714–1725.
  44. Chey WD, Kurlander J, Eswaran S. Irritable bowel syndrome: a clinical review. JAMA 2015; 313:949–958.
  45. Shailubhai K, Talluto C, Comiskey S, Foss JA, Joslyn A, Jacob G. Phase II clinical evaluation of SP-304, a guanylate cyclase-C agonist, for treatment of chronic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2010; 105:S487–S488.
  46. Miner P, Surowitz R, Fogel R, et al. Plecanatide, a novel guanylate cyclase-C (GC-C) receptor agonist, is efficacious and safe in patients with chronic idiopathic constipation (CIC): results from a 951 patient, 12-week, multi-center trial (abstract). Gastroenterology 2013; 144:S163.
  47. Coss-Adame E, Rao SS. Brain and gut interactions in irritable bowel syndrome: new paradigms and new understandings. Curr Gastroenterol Rep 2014; 16:379.
  48. Mendzelevski B, Ausma J, Chanter DO, et al. Assessment of the cardiac safety of prucalopride in healthy volunteers: a randomized, double-blind, placebo- and positive-controlled thorough QT study. Br J Clin Pharmacol 2012; 73:203–209.
  49. Camilleri M, Kerstens R, Rykx A, Vandeplassche L. A placebo-controlled trial of prucalopride for severe chronic constipation. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:2344–2354.
  50. Tack J, van Outryve M, Beyens G, Kerstens R, Vandeplassche L. Prucalopride (Resolor) in the treatment of severe chronic constipation in patients dissatisfied with laxatives. Gut 2009; 58:357–365.
  51. Quigley EM, Vandeplassche L, Kerstens R, Ausma J. Clinical trial: the efficacy, impact on quality of life, and safety and tolerability of prucalopride in severe chronic constipation—a 12-week, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study. Aliment Pharmacol Ther 2009; 29:315–328.
  52. Ford AC, Suares NC. Effect of laxatives and pharmacological therapies in chronic idiopathic constipation: systematic review and meta-analysis. Gut 2011; 60:209–218.
  53. Goldberg M, Li YP, Johanson JF, et al. Clinical trial: the efficacy and tolerability of velusetrag, a selective 5-HT4 agonist with high intrinsic activity, in chronic idiopathic constipation—a 4-week, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled, dose-response study. Aliment Pharmacol Ther 2010; 32:1102–1112.
  54. Palme M, Milner PG, Ellis DJ, Marmon T, Canafax DM. A novel gastrointestinal prokinetic, ATI-7505, increased spontaneous bowel movements (sbms) in a phase II, randomized, placebo-controlled study of patients with chronic idiopathic constipation (CIC). Gastroenterology 2010; 138:S-128–S-129.
  55. Chey WD, Camilleri M, Chang L, Rikner L, Graffner H. A randomized placebo-controlled phase IIb trial of a3309, a bile acid transporter inhibitor, for chronic idiopathic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2011; 106:1803–1812.
  56. Wong BS, Camilleri M, McKinzie S, Burton D, Graffner H, Zinsmeister AR. Effects of A3309, an ileal bile acid transporter inhibitor, on colonic transit and symptoms in females with functional constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2011; 106:2154–2164.
  57. Pappagallo M. Incidence, prevalence, and management of opioid bowel dysfunction. Am J Surg 2001; 182(suppl):11S–18S.
  58. Bell T, Annunziata K, Leslie JB. Opioid-induced constipation negatively impacts pain management, productivity, and health-related quality of life: findings from the National Health and Wellness Survey. J Opioid Manag 2009; 5:137–144.
  59. Sykes NP. A volunteer model for the comparison of laxatives in opioid-related constipation. J Pain Symptom Manage 1996; 11:363–369.
  60. ClinicalTrials.gov. A multicenter, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled, parallel-group study of oral MOA-728 for the treatment of opioid- induced bowel dysfunction in subjects with chronic nonmalignant pain. ClinicalTrials.gov Identifier: NCT00547586. https://clinicaltrials.gov/ct2/show/NCT00547586. Accessed March 22, 2017.
  61. ClinicalTrials.gov. An open-label study to evaluate the long-term safety of subcutaneous MOA-728 for treatment of opioid-induced constipation in subjects with nonmalignant pain. ClinicalTrials.gov Identifier: NCT00804141. https://clinicaltrials.gov/ct2/show/NCT00804141. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  62. Wyeth Pharmaceuticals. Relistor package insert. http://labeling.pfizer.com/showlabeling.aspx?id=499. Accessed March 22, 2017.
  63. Webster L, Dhar S, Eldon M, Masuoka L, Lappalainen J, Sostek M. A phase 2, double-blind, randomized, placebo-controlled, dose-escalation study to evaluate the efficacy, safety, and tolerability of naloxegol in patients with opioid-induced constipation. Pain 2013; 154:1542–1550.
  64. Chey WD, Webster L, Sostek M, Lappalainen J, Barker PN, Tack J. Naloxegol for opioid-induced constipation in patients with noncancer pain. N Engl J Med 2014; 370:2387–2396.
  65. Jones R, Prommer E, Backstedt D. Naloxegol: a novel therapy in the management of opioid-induced constipation. Am J Hosp Palliat Care 2016; 33:875–880.
  66. Guilera M, Balboa A, Mearin F. Bowel habit subtypes and temporal patterns in irritable bowel syndrome: systematic review. Am J Gastroenterol 2005; 100:1174–1184.
  67. Chapman RW, Stanghellini V, Geraint M, Halphen M. Randomized clinical trial: macrogol/PEG 3350 plus electrolytes for treatment of patients with constipation associated with irritable bowel syndrome. Am J Gastroenterol 2013; 108:1508–1515.
  68. Ford AC, Quigley EM, Lacy BE, et al. Effect of antidepressants and psychological therapies, including hypnotherapy, in irritable bowel syndrome: systematic review and meta-analysis. Am J Gastroenterol 2014; 109:1350–1366.
  69. Ballou S, Keefer L. Psychological interventions for irritable bowel syndrome and inflammatory bowel diseases. Clin Transl Gastroenterol 2017; 8:e214.
  70. Ford AC, Moayyedi P, Lacy BE, et al; Task Force on the Management of Functional Bowel Disorders. American College of Gastroenterology monograph on the management of irritable bowel syndrome and chronic idiopathic constipation. Am J Gastroenterol 2014; 109(suppl 1):S2–S27.
  71. Ford AC, Talley NJ, Spiegel BM, et al. Effect of fibre, antispasmodics, and peppermint oil in the treatment of irritable bowel syndrome: systematic review and meta-analysis. BMJ 2008; 337:a2313.
  72. Wall GC, Bryant GA, Bottenberg MM, Maki ED, Miesner AR. Irritable bowel syndrome: a concise review of current treatment concepts. World J Gastroenterol 2014; 20:8796–8806.
  73. Kligler B, Chaudhary S. Peppermint oil. Am Fam Physician 2007; 75:1027–1030.
  74. Spencer AG, Labonte ED, Rosenbaum DP, et al. Intestinal inhibition of the Na+/H+ exchanger 3 prevents cardiorenal damage in rats and inhibits Na+ uptake in humans. Sci Transl Med 2014; 6:227ra36.
  75. Rosenbaum DP. A randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study to assess the safety and efficacy of AZD1722 for the treatment of constipation-predominant irritable bowel syndrome (IBS-C). 2014. https://clinicaltrials.gov/ct2/show/NCT01923428. Accessed April 6, 2017.
  76. Rao SS. Biofeedback therapy for dyssynergic (obstructive) defecation. J Clin Gastroenterol 2000; 30:115–116.
  77. Cadeddu F, Salis F, De Luca E, Ciangola I, Milito G. Efficacy of biofeedback plus transanal stimulation in the management of pelvic floor dyssynergia: a randomized trial. Tech Coloproctol 2015; 19:333–338.
  78. Chiarioni G, Whitehead WE, Pezza V, Morelli A, Bassotti G. Biofeedback is superior to laxatives for normal transit constipation due to pelvic floor dyssynergia. Gastroenterology 2006; 130:657–664.
  79. Chiarioni G, Heymen S, Whitehead WE. Biofeedback therapy for dyssynergic defecation. World J Gastroenterol 2006; 12:7069–7074.
  80. Rao SS. Biofeedback therapy for constipation in adults. Best Pract Res Clin Gastroenterol 2011; 25:159–166.
  81. Hassan I, Pemberton JH, Young-Fadok TM, et al. Ileorectal anastomosis for slow transit constipation: long-term functional and quality of life results. J Gastrointest Surg 2006; 10:1330–1337.
  82. You YT, Wang JY, Changchien CR, et al. Segmental colectomy in the management of colonic inertia. Am Surg 1998; 64:775–777.
  83. Nyam DC, Pemberton JH, Ilstrup DM, Rath DM. Long-term results of surgery for chronic constipation. Dis Colon Rectum 1997; 40:273–279.
  84. Pemberton JH, Rath DM, Ilstrup DM. Evaluation and surgical treatment of severe chronic constipation. Ann Surg 1991; 214:403–413.
  85. Reshef A, Alves-Ferreira P, Zutshi M, Hull T, Gurland B. Colectomy for slow transit constipation: effective for patients with coexistent obstructed defecation. Int J Colorectal Dis 2013; 28:841–847.
  86. Lundin E, Karlbom U, Pahlman L, Graf W. Outcome of segmental colonic resection for slow-transit constipation. Br J Surg 2002; 89:1270–1274.
  87. Schwandner O, Stuto A, Jayne D, et al. Decision-making algorithm for the STARR procedure in obstructed defecation syndrome: position statement of the group of STARR pioneers. Surg Innov 2008; 15:105–109.
  88. Titu LV, Riyad K, Carter H, Dixon AR. Stapled transanal rectal resection for obstructed defecation: a cautionary tale. Dis Colon Rectum 2009; 52:1716–1722.
  89. Goede AC, Glancy D, Carter H, Mills A, Mabey K, Dixon AR. Medium-term results of stapled transanal rectal resection (STARR) for obstructed defecation and symptomatic rectal-anal intussusception. Colorectal Dis 2011; 13:1052–1057.
  90. Jayne DG, Schwandner O, Stuto A. Stapled transanal rectal resection for obstructed defecation syndrome: one-year results of the european STARR registry. Dis Colon Rectum 2009; 52:1205–1214.
  91. Madbouly KM, Abbas KS, Hussein AM. Disappointing long-term outcomes after stapled transanal rectal resection for obstructed defecation. World J Surg 2010; 34:2191–2196.
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 84(5)
Page Number
397-408
Page Number
397-408
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Chronic constipation: Update on management
Display Headline
Chronic constipation: Update on management
Legacy Keywords
constipation, irritable bowel syndrome, Rome IV, defecation, slow-transit constipation, normal-transit constipation, outlet dysfunction, dyssynergic defecation, anorectal feedback, opioids, fiber, laxatives, Umar Hayat, Mohannad Dugum, Samita Garg
Legacy Keywords
constipation, irritable bowel syndrome, Rome IV, defecation, slow-transit constipation, normal-transit constipation, outlet dysfunction, dyssynergic defecation, anorectal feedback, opioids, fiber, laxatives, Umar Hayat, Mohannad Dugum, Samita Garg
Sections
Inside the Article

KEY POINTS

  • Although newer drugs are available, lifestyle modifications and laxatives continue to be the treatments of choice for chronic constipation, as they have high response rates and few adverse effects and are relatively affordable.
  • Chronic constipation requires different management approaches depending on whether colonic transit time is normal or prolonged and whether outlet function is abnormal.
  • Surgical treatments for constipation are reserved for patients whose symptoms persist despite maximal medical therapy.
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Use ProPublica
Article PDF Media